Home

User Manual - DiTranslator

1. This creates data in the Export File which is found at the DOS directory path Program files DiTranslator edata network partner set set mail_in rfm 2 Now optionally double click the Consolidate the Export File icon to append your Export File to a single consolidated file This consolidated file is found at the DOS directory path Program Files DiTranslator tppc32 user mail_in con In your DiTranslator system you can find the consolidated file by double clicking the System Management icon in the Desktop window double clicking the User icon and then the System Wide Data File icon The Export Consolidated File icon contains the data resulting from this step For further details about exporting data see the Exporting Data From DiTranslator 8 section in the Interfacing With Other Applications chapter 2 Creating Outbound Data The first step in sending your partner EDI data is to create your outbound data using one of the following methods By extracting the data from one of your applications outside of DiTranslator 8 and importing it The Document Turn Around feature using Data Editor Each of these methods for creating data is discussed in this chapter 134 2 1 Creating Outbound Data by Importing Data from another Application If you are going to create your outbound data by extracting the data from one of your applications outside of DiTranslator 8 and importing it into DiTranslator 8 r
2. Use your mouse to expand and contract the list of available items in the left half of the screen That is if you click the sign next to Networks amp the Internet then all networks installed in your system will appear in the list If you continue and click the sign next to a network then all the tasks available within the network will appear in the list as well You may contract the list by clicking the signs to close up that portion of the list 3 After you identify the item task to which you wish to create a shortcut select where you would like the shortcut to appear Favorites select this option to save the shortcut to the Favorites window Start Menu select this option to save the shortcut to the Windows Start Menu Start Up select this option to save the shortcut to your start up procedure which means the shortcut will run once Windows is loaded Desktop select this option to save the shortcut to your Windows Desktop 4 Click the Create button to create the shortcut where you have specified Tree view Detail view Favorites za i Sort Mail User Tracked Task 14 2 Maintaining a Shortcut You can view and or change the properties of the shortcut You can also rename a shortcut 14 2 1 Shortcut Properties 1 Inthe Favorites tab right click on the desired shortcut and select Properties from the pop up menu The Properties dialog box is displayed
3. MewofO AN NUM ee Use the following instructions to learn how to make these kinds of changes In the Desktop double click the DiTranslator 8 icon In the Trading Partners window double click the icon for the trading partner for whom you want to customize a data entry screen 3 Inthe partner window right click on the transaction set for which you want to customize the data entry screen and select Properties The Transaction Set Wizard is displayed 194 Transaction Set Wizard Transaction Set Wizard Title 810 Vers020 Details Data Path Anse87043020 OF Cancel Help Database Map i Custom MM Curent Active Database Map u tam Map CAFPROGRATATRADIN T systemi naps 4ner e50307 0 dom Create Database and in turm what fields will be displayed in the Data Editor The database map dictates how data will be stored in the Trading Partner Ei 5 Ifa custom database map for this version of the transaction set does not already exist click the Create button If a custom database map does exist the Create button will be inactive Then click the Edit button to display the DB Map Editor A screen like the following will display i 8103040 Invoice DB Map Editor File Edit iew Help e NTE Note S pecial Instructic CJ CUR Currency Invoice Ho 76 Invoice Date 4 CJ PER dministrative Comm C PO Date jz H NTN ame PO No BS GN AAddl Nam
4. PO 2 Segments SE Transaction Set Trailer GE Functional Group Trailer GS Functional Group Header ST Transaction Set Header INV 1 Segments SE Transaction Set Trailer ST Transaction Set Header INV 2 Segments SE Transaction Set Trailer ST Transaction Set Header INV 3 Segments SE Transaction Set Trailer GE Functional Group Trailer IEA Interchange Control Trailer Example ASC X12 Envelope Structure 3 1 Reading an ISA Line You can view the ISA line when you open the New Mail In file in WordPad or the text editor you are using The following is a sample ISA segment followed by GS and ST segments 30 Receipt Tag 960717 1601 ISA 00 0000000000 00 0000000000 2Z2 7083179000 12 3122721850 960717 1113 U 00304 00000001 0 T gt GS PO 70831 79000 3132721850 96071 771113 1 X 003040 9 1 850 000000001 Find ISA second line down far left This marks the beginning of the ISA segment Find the fields contained within the ISA listed in order and described below The asterisk is an example of an ANSI ASC X12 data element separator character You will see this character throughout the ISA segment used for separating the fields 00 ISA01 Authorization information qualifier This qualifies the next element In the example above 00 means ignore the next element 0000000000 I
5. Right When data entered is not as long as the maximum length allowed this option will place excess spaces to the left of the data None When data entered is not as long as the maximum length allowed this option will prevent leading spaces being deleted Required A check in this box makes it mandatory that you enter data in this field Remove the check to make it optional The Required checkbox is not active if it is required by the EDI standards The Required status can also be set by clicking the right mouse button on the data element name in the DB Map Editor and choosing Required to enter or remove a check Hidden A check in this box means the field will not display for data entry in the Data Editor Remove the check if you want to enter data in this field This field is not active if it is required by the EDI standards The Hidden status can also be set by clicking the right mouse 198 button on the data element name in the DB Map Editor and choosing Hidden to enter or remove a check Reformat A check in this box means the data in this field will be included in the reformatted RFM file Zero Fill When numeric data entered is not as long as the maximum length allowed a check in this box will result in zeros filling excess spaces 2 Creating Custom Reports A Hub or custom report is customized in its format for a particular trading partner and transaction set It describes received EDI data in an easy to un
6. 117 fe Sort Mail Properties Application Target location Code Target WD Central Di Translator Code Tppc ene T1355 Start in C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator code Shortcut key None Minimized C Program Files DiCentral Di Translator code ipr 2 If you need to make changes make any changes necessary and click the Apply button then click the OK button to close the Properties dialog box Otherwise click the Cancel button to exit without saving any changes 14 2 2 Renaming Shortcuts 1 Inthe Favorites tab right click on the desired shortcut and select Rename from the pop up menu 2 Type the new name for the selected shortcut and press Enter 14 3 Creating a Folder 1 Select the Favorites tab 2 Right click and select New Favorites then Folder from the pop up menu Z Folder Ctrl F E Open Ctrl O Shortcut Ctri S Run Ctrl R Run Unattended Ctrl T 118 3 Enter the folder name then press Enter You will see your new folder in the Favorites window Notes A folder can only be created in the Favorites window 14 4Running a Shortcut Outside of DiTranslator 8 You can also run a specified task Task List or program from your Favorites window without starting your DiTranslator 8 system Right click on the DiTranslator icon in the System Tray and select the desired task ECLA Sort Mail Favorties tab User Tracked Task Open Close About Tppc 15 User Vie
7. C TMP CROSSREF INI File CROSSREF INI at the path C TMP is deleted FCOPY Temporary file number Use FCOPY and FSWITCH together to copy output data to a temporary file to delay printing the data You may use as many different temporary files as memory allows FCOPY will recall the data written to the temporary file by FSWITCH and write it to the report Temporary file number is an integer specifying the temporary file to extract output data from See the FSWITCH command for an example of how to use FCOPY FD SkipBefore SkipAfter RptCol Seg Position InputLength Format DecPlace Use FD to insert or replace input file values into a report SkipBefore and Skip After specify the number of lines to skip before and after printing the output data and RptCol specifies the starting column for printing the output data Seg Position and InputLength specify the segment from which the input data is to be extracted its offset position within the segment and its length beginning at the starting position respectively Format specifies how to justify the output data DecPlace specifies how many decimal places to be used for numeric output data If you do not specify a DEFAULT or CODE command the input data is written to the report unchanged If you do not specify a DEFAULT command and the extracted input data does not match any of the CODE command values the input data is written to the report unchanged PUP te Uy 270013 10 73 0
8. 16 Click the Validation button Element Validation x Cancel 17 Enter your validation codes and click the OK button 18 To save your changes select Save from the File menu the select Exit Meaning of fields Use the following table to assist you in editing the Segment Properties screen Name Modify the name as you want it to appear in the DB Map Editor and in your data entry screen Sequence This number reflects the order the segments appear in the transaction set structure Count If the count is more than 1 this field is active You can change the count to be a number less than the default value For example if the EDI standards allows up to 100 of a certain segment and you know you will always use 2 change the count to be 2 197 Required A check in this box makes it mandatory that you enter data in this segment Remove the check to make it optional This field is not active if it is required by the EDI standards The Required status can also be set by clicking the right mouse button on the segment name in the DB Map Editor and choosing Required to enter or remove a check Hidden A check in this box means the segment will not display for data entry in the Data Editor Deselect the checkbox if you want to enter data in this segment This field is not active if it is required by the EDI standards The Hidden status can also be set by clicking the right mouse button on the segment name in the DB Map Edito
9. 4 6 Register Commands Report Writer uses arithmetic register commands for calculations and printing and text registers for non numeric values and printing There are 100 available registers for you to use as temporary storage locations The following commands use registers and text registers as arguments Each of these commands is explained in detail in the Report Writer Command Reference section Numeric and text registers are separate registers 4 7 Conditional Commands Conditional commands are used to specify the condition under which a set of commands will be executed Report Writer has the following conditional commands Each of these commands is explained in detail in the Report Writer Command Reference section FLOAT amp ENDFLOAT IFEQ amp ENDIF IFNE amp ENDIF IFREQ amp ENDIF IFREQR amp ENDIF IFRGTR amp ENDIF IFRLTR amp ENDIF IFRNE amp ENDIF IFRNER amp ENDIF IFTREQ amp ENDIF IFTREQTR amp ENDIF IFTRNE amp ENDIF IFTRNETR amp ENDIF LOOP amp ENDLOOP 4 8 Table Lookup Commands Table lookup cross referencing commands are used in conjunction with the register commands to read and write from files other than the normal input and output files The table lookup commands include commands that Retrieve information CROSSREF Write information CROSSWRITE Transform data REGTOTREG TREGTOREG TREGCAT and DELETEFILE Each of these commands is explained in detail in the Report Writer Command
10. 9 Click the OK button to save your settings 2 Adding a Network Mailbox to Your System There are two methods for adding a network to your system Adda network using the Asynchronous Network Collection which is what most of our users will do Create a custom network by manually entering the required data In this case you must provide or write your own communications package At any time during the installation process you may click the Back button to display the previous screen or the Cancel button to stop the installation See one of the following two sections for instructions Add A Network Using The Asynchronous Collection Create A Custom Network 2 1 Adding a Network Using the Asynchronous Network Collection Follow the steps below to add a network to DiTranslator 8 1 Perform either of the steps below to open DiTranslator Setup window a Goto File gt New b Select New Eicon in the toolbar 2 Select the Networks tab 3 Select New at the bottom of the screen 46 Dilranslator Setup Tasks and Data Files Yo 503316480 The Network Wizard window displays How do you wish to add a Network 47 On the Network Wizard screen choose Install pre configured Network option and click Next Click the Next button Click Browse button to specify the drive where the network kit locates click OK and Next button to continue When the Network Wizard is redisplayed a Accept or mod
11. C ProgramFiles DiCentral DiTranslator Edata Network TradingPartner Standard Transacti onSet Version Filename Example Home Directory Edata NS_AS2 3M Ansi 850 3010 MAIL_OUT RFM Or Home Directory Edata NS_AS2 3M Ansi 850 3010 MAIL_OUT TRN Or Copy the file if CON to the following directory and filename Home Directory DiTranslator User MAIL_OUT CON 4 Configure the Network Generator task For complete details see the Network Generator Task Installation And Configuration section in the Setting Up Your System chapter 3 The DiTranslator 8 File Format There are different DiTranslator 8 files that can be used for importing and exporting data 3 1 DiTranslator 8 Files Used for Exporting If you receive a transmission from a trading partner and want to export upload the data to another application such as a mainframe or mini computer you can use the following files MAIL_IN CON Export Consolidated File MAIL_IN RFM Export File or MAIL_IN TRN Translated Mail You will probably want to use the MAIL_IN CON for data from multiple networks trading partners and transaction sets The MAIL_IN CON file contains all the inbound transaction sets you received from all trading partners and networks Use the MAIL_IN TRN file or MAIL_IN RFM file to export from a single transaction set The MAIL_IN TRN file is the output file after you Receive Sort and Interpret Mail for a specific trading partner The MAIL_
12. PDy by bpey OVO 66 57 LJUBE U If the date in the data is 19980312 the following will print 03 12 98 Example DATEFORMAT MM DD 20YY SPECIAL 0 0 0 DATE If the current date is September 30 2000 the following will print 09 30 2000 DEFAULT Syntax DEFAULT DefaultValue Remarks Use DEFAULT after an FD and CODE commands to replace an input value with a default value The input value to be replaced is specified in the preceding FD command If FD s input value is not any CODE argument that follows the FD command and precedes the DEFAULT command the output value will be the DefaultValue Example FD 0 0 1 0013 10 3 LJUBF 0 CODE GEN General Information DEFAULT Other Instructions Report Writer will extract three characters of input data beginning at position 10 of segment 0013 see command FD If those three characters are GEN they will be replaced by General Information when printed to a report If those three characters are not GEN they will be replaced by the default value Other Instructions DELETEFILE Syntax DELETEFILE FilePath Remarks This command will delete the file named in FilePath FilePath can be either a quoted string or text register number naming the DOS path to the file to be deleted If 224 Example FCOPY Syntax Remarks FD Syntax Remarks Example FilePath contains only a filename then it is assumed to exist in the current working directory DELETEFILE
13. 3 Select New at the bottom of the screen The Trading Partner Wizard window displays p ia C Create a custom Trading Partner 4 Select the Install pre configured Trading Partner Kit option and click the Next button 54 Trading Partner Wizard Select or install the Network to use when communicating with this Trading Partner F the desired Network does not appear you may install one by clicking below Install New Network Select the network you will use to communicate with this trading partner and click the Next button If the network you intend to use is not in the list click the Install New Network button and see the Adding A Network Mailbox To Your System section in this chapter for assistance Click Next to continue If you are installing your customized kit from CD ROM please see the installation instructions that accompany the CD ROM Click Browse button to specify the drive where the trading partner kit locates Click the OK and Next button to continue If your selected folder contains more than one Pre configured Trading Partner Kit drag and drop the desired folder from the top to bottom box skip this step if your selected folder contains one Pre configured Trading Partner Kit Click the Next button to continue 55 Trading Partner Wizard Walmart Kit CD ROM Available WMORG Drag items from the list above to the list below then click Next To be Installed WalMart Folder Walmar
14. Data Path C Program Files DlCentralDi Translator Edata NS_A 610 Vers010 a 810 Ver3010 Inb 3 810 Ver3010 Out e ME amp 10 Verdi 0 890 Ver3010 997 VerALL Task Id 1141 New Update Delete UniquelD 1174405141 5 The Put Import File to Translated Task Configuration tab below displays your configuration options with the default values shown For additional information about the task click the Details tab Task Wizard Map Name 8103010 dbm Input File Name mail out RFM Output File Name mail_out tm 100 6 Change the configuration settings as desired To save the settings click the OK button Meaning of Settings Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings Write Status Message select the checkbox to send messages to the Audit Log when this task is executed You must have the Audit Log option selected in the System Settings window to use this option Archive File select the checkbox to automatically archive the input data when this task is executed Map Name Type the database map name for the transaction set in use The default is the database map name for the transaction set in use The database file name is the transaction set and version number followed by a DBM file extension For example 8103010 DBM for an 810 Invoice version 003010 transactions set Input File Name Type the input file you want to use for this task For example MAIL_IN DB Ou
15. insert commands specifying output data to be saved FSWITCH O Use FSWITCH and FCOPY together to save output data to a temporary file to delay printing the data to the report You may use as many different temporary files as memory allows FSWITCH will copy output data to a temporary file and FCOPY will recall the data written to the temporary file and write it to the report Temporary file number is an integer specifying the temporary file to which the output data will be saved The command FSWITCH O specifies the end of file for the specified temporary file FSWITCH 3 TX 0 O 1 Message Type TX 0 0 1 sss s LOOP 13 FD O O 1 0013 10 3 IBF O CODE GEN General Information CODE TRA Transportation Information DEFAULT Other Instructions NOFIELD No Field Sent LOOP 15 TX 0 0 1 Customer Name FD O O 17 0015 10 30 L JBF O 226 ENDLOOP ENDLOOP FSWITCH O TX 0 0 1 Sample Of FSWITCH FCOPY 3 The above commands will print the following on your report Message Type General Information Customer Name John Doe Transportation Information Customer Name United Parcel Service HEADER amp ENDHEADER Syntax Remarks Example HEADER insert other commands ENDHEADER Use HEADER to print a header at the top of every page of a report HEADER TX0 0 1l POD Of Report TX 0 0 1 PO
16. you can use Put Import File into Database to convert the data from Document Turn Around to a format suitable for the Data Editor or after you run the Sort Host Data File task when importing data Database use this icon to access the Data Editor to enter data for outbound transactions Put Import File To Translated File takes data from the Data Editor or from another of your PC or mainframe applications and reformat it into a translated TRN file Generate EDI Mail from Translated validates outbound data against ASC X12 standards and generate the Mail Out Ready file that is ready to send Send Mail initiates a communications session with your network and sends outbound mail to your partner 27 This chapter includes the following topics An Overview Of EDI EDI Terminology ASC X12 Interchange Control Structures EDIFACT Interchange Control Structures Functional Acknowledgments 1 Overview of EDI Electronic Data Interchange EDI is the computer to computer movement of routine business data in an approved standard format e g ANSI ASC X12 EDIFACT or TRADACOMS Companies that decide to trade business data with each other using EDI are called trading partners The trading partners must decide which transaction sets EDI business documents will be exchanged electronically what information will be included i e what segments and data elements within the transaction set should be sent and received and what method of co
17. 4 REFO2 refers to the Ref No The Ref No begins at the 13th position and is 30 characters in length The Ref No is the Internal Vendor Number followed by the required blank spaces 5 REFO3 refers to the Desc The Desc begins at the 43rd position and is 80 characters in length This is a free form description followed by the required blank spaces In the example above there is no free form description 5 The Delimited File Format When selecting the delimited file format for input in Put Import file to Translated file icon the format is no longer fixed length but delimited Delimited files can only be imported into translated files and not database files Each field is separated by the defined delimiter The delimiter is determined in one of two ways 1 The system will attempt to determine what the single character delimiter is if no delimiter is specified in the file For example if the delimiter is the character S the system will look for 0001S and assume that the delimited for the file is a If the system sees a double quote before the 0001 it will use the double quoted comma delimited format referred to as dBASE 2 If the delimiter is specified explicitly in the file that delimiter will be used The specifier is e Delimiter e Delimiter dBASE In the first case the delimiter is a single ASCII character and in the second case the delimiter is a quoted comma delimited file The delimiter can also
18. A Hub report is customized in its format for a particular trading partner and transaction set It describes outbound EDI data in an easy to understand format and follows your trading partner s segment specifications Make sure you delete any previously generated reports before continuing with the next step Delete these reports by clicking on the report icon with the right mouse button and choosing Purge Data There also must be data present in the Translated File 1 Inthe Outbound window double click the desired report icon to generate the report After the report is created the paper in the report icon sticks up to indicate the report is ready to be printed or viewed Continue with the following steps to view and print the report 2 To print the report right click on the report icon and select Print 3 To view the report double click the Report icon The report is displayed in Microsoft Notepad Notes If you want your system to automatically print a report after generating it see the sections Configuring Raw Data Reports and Configuring Hub Reports in the chapter Setting Up Your System for instructions 3 1 4 Generating EDI Mail This step will take the Translated File as input and generate a file in the EDI standard format On the Transaction Tasks and Files pane double click on the Generate EDI Mail from Translated icon 3 1 5 Sending EDI Mail This step activates your network communications and sends the
19. Click the Delete button in the Reconciliation Detail screen To delete multiple transaction sets from the list Inthe Reconciliation Viewer window select Delete from the File menu The Delete screen is displayed The default values are shown below Check the desired boxes enter the number of days and click the OK button to delete the desired transaction sets from the list Click the Cancel button to exit the screen without deleting anything Meaning of Field Use the following table to assist you with the Delete screen Accepted Transactions Check this box to delete transaction sets from the reconciliation list that have an A for Accepted in the Ack field Transactions With Errors Check this box to delete transaction sets from the reconciliation list that have a value other than A in the Ack field 159 Transactions Without Ack Check this box to delete transaction sets from the reconciliation list that have no value entered in the Ack field which means the document has yet to be acknowledged Delete Transactions Over x Days Old Enter the number of days old a transaction set must be before it can be deleted This condition must be met in addition to any condition checked above in order for the deletion to take place 4 1 8 Reconciliation Viewer Preferences 1 Inthe Reconciliation Viewer window select Preferences from the View menu The Preferences window is displayed The default values are shown below Prefere
20. Common Terms For Data Entry A EDI Standards Information Data entry is used when you are going to manually enter data to be sent to your trading partner DiTranslator 8 uses the Data Editor to make this task easy It is important that you have all the necessary information before you begin using the Data Editor to create and edit outbound data Please review the list below Your trading partner will provide you with their transaction set technical requirements so you know exactly what segments and data elements they want to receive as well as acceptable codes for certain data elements You may want to purchase a directory for the EDI standards you are using ANSI ASC X12 EDIFACT or TRADACOMS A standards directory lists all available transaction sets segments composite elements and data elements contained in the standard valid codes for certain data elements as well as details for their intended use You may also want to purchase the industry specific guides such as the VICS publication if you are using that Standard for trading B Features of the Data Editor The capabilities of the Data Editor are as follows 137 You can manually enter a complete transaction set and send it to your partner You may also edit or view existing data Data entry is one step in the outbound process See the Outbound Processing section for complete details about the outbound process If you must enter a lot of the same information in a t
21. For example IN NEW is a Data Icon for the MAIL_IN NEW data file Data Segment A segment used to convey business information Contrast with Interchange Control Segment which conveys control information Default A setting that was pre selected Double click To quickly press and release a mouse button twice on the same object Double clicking initiates an action See Choose Download See Import 271 EDI Electronic Data Interchange The transmission of structured data from computer to computer through a communications line such as a VAN or telephone line using public standard format EDIFACT Electronic Data Interchange For Administration Commerce and Transport EDIFACT is the international standard sponsored by the United Nations Element A unit of information within a segment E Mail Electronic Mail Electronic mail is unstructured text that is transmitted from one computer to another Export To send data from one application to another within the same computer or from one computer to another You can transfer data manually through diskette or through file transfer software Exporting from a PC computer to a mainframe or midrange computer is the same as uploading Fax Communications Facsimile Communications Facsimile communications are unstructured images that are transferred from one machine to another File menu A menu that contains commands related to files Functional Acknowledgment A
22. Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator EDATA ANYNET ACME ANSI 810 3010 3 Outbound Processing Before you can send data see the section Essentials Before Sending And Receiving Data in the Getting Started chapter for a checklist of tasks to complete before processing data In addition you must create your outbound data using the instructions in the previous section Creating Outbound Data before sending data to your partner This section includes An overview of outbound processing Steps to process and send data See the Additional DiTranslator 8 Features section at the end of this chapter for information on optional features that can enhance your processing 3 1 Overview of Outbound Processing The diagram below represents the Outbound Processing for DiTranslator 8 Run 1 Import Host Sort Aun Pu mpar oe 3 Database ans Sort Host Data into ae file is created file is created file task Database task Import file is created Run v 2 Receive pues rer impor mip Translated Run desired _ Data or Hub Report Incoming mail Convert mine gt fileis created Report is created g task Translated File P task Run Generate EDI Mail from Translated task t R EDI i un mail is sent to Mall Out meady Send Mail your partner via your file is created task modem 148 Annotation 1 Sta
23. ProgramFiles DiCentral DiTranslator edata connection name tra dingpartner name ansi 850 3010 MAIL IN TRN 2 Importing Data to DiTranslator 8 You can import files on a system wide level files from all your networks trading partners and transaction sets or by individual transaction sets The term import has the same meaning as the term download and the term export has the same meaning as the term upload 2 1 Importing Files from another Computer or Application To import mail files that contain mail destined for multiple networks trading partners and transaction sets Make sure the file has a DOS file structure Format the file according to the instructions in the The DiTranslator 8 File Format or The Delimited File Format section later in this chapter 3 Copy the file to the following directory and file C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator user MAIL_OUT CON Note Make sure the file name is MAIL_OUT CON 2 2 Importing a Delimited File into a Database in DiTranslator 8 To import a delimited file into a database in DiTranslator 8 Create the delimited file as normal and name it MAIL_IN TRN instead of MAIL_IN RFM Save the MAIL_IN TRN in the appropriate directory Edata Network TradingPartner Ansi TransactionSet Wersion Example If your trading partner is ACME using the AnyNet network sending Invoices 810 version 4010 save the MAIL_IN TRN file to the following directory C Program Files DiCentra
24. TRADACOMS Trading Partner Name eee n My Trading Partner 1X12 ISAIEA Part Network NS_AS2 Coy EO Configuration fo Auto Configuration EE Transaction Sets i ie ene r Done Trading Partner cannot be used until these items are Checked Your new trading partner must be configured before you can communicate with them You may either do so now or you may simply click the Finish button and configure the partner later If you click the Finish button without configuring a message box is displayed Click the Yes button to exit and configure the partner later Whether you configure now or later use the instructions in the next Configuring A Trading Partner section in this chapter to assist you 60 After creating a custom trading partner you must install all transaction sets which you intend to trade with them using the instructions in the Adding A Transaction Set For Your Partner section in this chapter Once the installation is complete you will see the new trading partner icon in the TradingPartners window 5 Configuring a Trading Partner Before you can communicate with a trading partner you must enter the configuration information 1 Configuration can be done at the end of installation in this case continue with step 2 or at any other time by right clicking on the desired trading partner icon and selecting Properties The DiTranslator Setup is displayed DiTr
25. Task Network Generator Netware Tranelatar Select the type of Task that you wish to create 5 When the system is done adding the task the configuration options for this task are displayed See step 3 in the following section for assistance with configuring the task Otherwise select Finish to skip the configuration 107 6 You will now see the new communications task icon in your window with the name you assigned to it Process Process Outbound Data Receive Mail a vend And Receive _ send Mail Send Receive And Sort Sort Mail 12 10 2 Configuration 1 Inthe Tree View expand the node Network icon 2 Right click on the desired communication task icon and select Properties 3 Select Configuration in the DiTranslator Setup window Communications Task C Program Files DCentral Di Translator Edata NS_ AS mr F Task ld 331 New Update Delete UniquelD f 174405266 108 4 The Task Wizard is displayed the User Communication Task Configuration tab For additional information about the task click the Details and Status tabs Task Wizard User Communication Task Configuration Details Phone Number 000 Parameter 1 pO Parameter 2 pO Parameter 3 pO Parameter 4 pO Parameter 5 pO Executable Name st ok cows me 5 Change the configuration settings as desired To save the settings click Ok Meaning of Settings Use the following
26. change directories to the Home Directory tradin 1 system maps standards directory for the corresponding transaction set or message Example type Cd System Maps Ansi 2 Type fieldist followed by the transaction set followed by the version Example type fieldist 8502040 The XRF file is in a text format 4 2 Reading an XRF File The XRF file details the format of the transaction set or message data The following examples show the REF segment for an Invoice 810 version 3010 Format Appearing In XRF File REF Seg 0004 Level 1 REF Ref Nos Name Type seg Off Len Description SEQ S 0004 4 6 Ref No Seq REFO1L C 0004 10 2 Ref No Qual REFO2 A 0004 12 30 Ref No REFOS A 0004 42 80 Desc Important information and columns are as follows 178 Shows the Record ID identifying the segment In the first row the SEQ refers to the Sequence Number In the rows that follow the Name column refers to the data element reference designator Refers to the data element type per corresponding EDI standard Refers to the Record ID Off Refers to the starting position of the field in the record the field a a eoan neronen Len The maximum size of this field Blank spaces are used to pad data m O ee ee Describes the data element 4 3 Corresponding REF Segment in a DiTranslator 8 Interpreted File Example 1 REFO1L ONONGAES ONORGTONO IRS a0 Ihe IE ILI 2272 cust
27. its mailbox flag will be in the down position When archiving a file DiTranslator 8 automatically assigns a name to the file Archived inbound data files are called IN_01 IN_02 etc where the number of the file name is the archive number Archived outbound data files are called OUT 01 OUT O02 etc where the number in the file name is the archive number Each file has one of the following extensions to identify what type of file it is NEW for files containing raw EDI data SRT for files containing sorted data TRN for files containing translated data EDT for database files RFM for files containing imported and exported data CON for files containing consolidated exported data 165 4 4 3 Unarchiving a File 1 Right click the icon of the file you want to unarchive and select Unarchive Purge Data Delete Object Archive UnArchive Rename Print Ctrl P Update Wizard Ctrl W Modified Un rchive 12 16 2011 17 48 58 PM Purge E OEE Cancel 2 Select the file you want to unarchive and click the UnArchive button Notes By default unarchive files are sorted by date and time To sort the unarchive data files by a different category click the appropriate column header 166 This chapter includes the following topics Exporting Data From DiTranslator 8 Importing Data To DiTranslator 8 The DiTranslator File Format The Delimited File Format The XRF File 1 Exp
28. 0 5 0041 40 LJBE O Extracts the sequence number from each occurrence Sor tche NA in the Purchase order PE Oude aes COAL LO E Assigned ID PpITLOL A 0020 10 Ris Assigned ID EDO el 0041 10 6 eels bs 0 Extracts the POL0OL from che PO and printe it in the p IT10L of the Lavoie POLOZ N QQ4AL 16 11 Quantity Ordered g IT alle OV N 0020 16 12 Quantity Invoiced ED Oy Osaki Olah see Bins O Extracts che POL02 from che PO and printe it in the p 1T102 of the invoice 2 P0103 Q04L 27 2 Unit of Measurement Code 2 LOS C 0020 28 2 Unit of Measurement Code Bb Oy Oi OOO Ae ere Extracts the POLOS from tche PO anc prints ic in tche MAG oy of tche LnvoLce PO104 N 0041 29 16 UnLEe Price PET LOA N 0020 30 16 UnLie Price ED 0 0 31 0041 29 16 LJBE 0 pExtracts the POLOA from the PO anc prints it in the p eh OA o the Lnvoice B0106 004AL ATF 2 Product Service ID Qual pITLOG C 0020 48 2 Product Service ID Qual FD 0 0 49 07041 4717 27 bJIBE 0 s mxceracte che POLOG rron che PRO 212 and prints if an the 1T106G of the invoice POLOT A 0041 49 30 Product Service ID a EO A 0020 50 30 Product Service ID EDO On MOOTO OBEO jHxtracts the POLO7 from the PO and printe it im the p 1107 of the LnvoiLce EEDE Seth OO re ian A ON ie ee Prod uct Itemn DeS 5 5 55555553 55555555555 55 955555 55555555555 j PID seq 0026 Level 2 SS2 SS22SS25 222522225552 2 22222225 gt gt gt
29. 1 0 9 2 0 9 3 0 1 0 1 0 9 2 0 3 0 5J 0 5 0 9 0 9 L0 9 1 R 0 9 0 9 Nn 0 9 0 9 23 2 3 A B CID E F G H I I K L M N P QIS T U Zz 54 BY FE IM IR LR PF S5E SR ZZ Begin Grou 66 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Alc D 66 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Fi 9 D F O but H Lit Oo Md 66 48 49 50 53 54 55 56 5 66 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 9 66 B5 c1 c2 c5 calcB cc c 66 E0 ER ES FA FB FC FD FI 66 MD MI MK ML MN MP MR NA 66 5B6 5D 5F 51I 53 5L 5P sT s5v End Group Begin Group 91 6 7 A B C DJEJFJH IT I K LIMIN 91 Dw ED FA FL GG GR GS HH LA LT 91 5T TA TC TT VA VE VL wP Y L Y 2 End Group Begin Group 98 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 04 06 0D 0E 0F OH 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 14 98 16 1C 1D 1E 1F 1G 1H 11 13 1K 1L 1M 1N 10 1P 10 1R 1sS 1T 1U 1iv iw 1x 1ly 1z 20 96 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 26 2c 2b 2E 2F 26 2H 21T 23 2K 2L 2M 2N 20 2P 20 4 nT I Pe oh ww et D uo ww nae ere Ww Pm ome on 27 Bw iw H Z TADH A MwA LA oa uu C F N os _ mn Lt AR AP ENWR OTA P wr NS ASOORE mW EEREN fc eer KHTKOOmA Pe oo CUCA P We z g Mme kiek ie Team TAn CUropybhe ses a ee maD E se ee 7 ea ee es es et Onan ew N Moo ee T ang H E J D l es A gt d mH QIRIS X Y AC AE AF AH AR BP BU CE DA P P P PRIPTIRC RR SB SC SD SE SR 55 77 7 Add or edit the codes accor
30. 220 T7 oO Network ANYNet TPACME 7083179000 0013076388 Eny Contreol 000000001 911213 1113 Test Env Tagl Env Tag2 r START SET 850 VERSION 002040 GROUP PO Mocule 3122721850 TSI 2 66t Concrol 01 A e p e a OOOO O se a a Se cleus Grp Tagl Grp Tag2 ACcCept t 0001000001005402 35 0TESTPO 0551 900708 00040000017IA12345678900 0007000001NS AAS LORE 0012000001012 2 0014000001037900702 001400000200190 0709 0016000001P4 0016000002SP 0023000001B 2 HYMF 0030000001BYACME DC 9 0229457520551 00420000010000012 EAT 490 CB023000500 VA20 27 uUP1253456789012 0045000001 RSRES14 990 00500000011 00420000020000023 EA7490 CEOZ 3000S 02 VA20 27 UPZIO9S 7 654321 VO4 SS OOC OO SRE See 30 00500000011 00890000012 5 END SET 850 VERSION 002040 GROUP PO yMoGu ke 31227216850 TSL Set Contcrol 01 PaO On ET OL E OCOT OO OIT aE T S Grp Tagl Gp lage 252 Appendix E DiTranslator 8 Directory Structure DiTranslator 8 contains two main directories the DiTranslator 8 directory and the EData directory See the sample directory structure below S E DiTranslator code Code Fg EData 4 EDATA Ei ArpNet4 Network H E ABCInc a Ame jam Partner 6 A Ansi Standard i a 810 4 Transaction Set 9 3040 4 Standard Version AL Archive 4 Archive Flag 955 H E 679 H E ggz Transaction Set H E 898 H E 889 E Archive 4 Archive Network files 9 Reports lt Reports EG i
31. An archive level is the number of backup files of the same type the system maintains at all times which can be set either at a system wide level or for a specific data file For example when you sort the New Mail In file DiTranslator 8 archives the file If the archive level is set to 10 the system default DiTranslator 8 creates a backup of the New Mail In file for three consecutive sorts Once you perform a fourth sort the new archived file overwrites the oldest archived file You can set your archive level to a higher number if you wish to store more files of the same type for future use For information about specifying your system s archive level see the Setting System Options section in the Setting Up Your System chapter 4 4 2 Archiving a File Certain tasks in DiTranslator 8 are set by default to archive the input file when the task is performed with no errors This option can be turned off and on See the desired task configuration in the Adding and Configuring Tasks section in the Setting Up Your System chapter for details To manually archive a file right click on the icon representing the file you want to archive and select Archive s send Mail Purge Data Del Send Recei pf Delete Object Ctrl L Sort Mail Mail Out Reac Ctrl A UnArchive Ctrl U ll Status NEW 4 Rename Unknown Dod cy Print Ctrl P Unknown TP Update Wizard Ctrl W Once the file has been archived
32. Body of Data xx xx G S A DS A I TS E S OA DS AE AS TE S E S S E A TS S OS S NS E AS DS IX 0 0 1L CO Ono COG Gabe This creates the BIG segment gt BIGO D 0001 10 6 Invoice Date TX 07 0O O es 2 Put im to incicate that dare ie needed 2 BIG02 A Invoice No TXO Or lees as 2 Put in to indicate date is needed BEG05 D BIG03 D 209 EPD 0 0 39 0001 66 6 LJSE 0 pmxtracts PO fron BEGOS and puts ic im BIGOS Notice that columa for the output is 39 When data is pwricten in report writer it goes tO the specific column number When data is read by Report Writer it is done using the offset BEGO3 A 0001 14 22 PROMENON BIG04 A 0001 44 22 PRO RNOR ED 0 0 45 0001 14 22 LJBE 0 p mxtcracts the POr rrom BEGO3S and prints it Lm BIG04 TX 0 0 1 O00 4000001 PNLOOTEGE Creates an REF segment with specific data Dae es FOB Seg 0007 Level a a a a a ae el Poe wa ees RRO Pups Related Instructhlons fea a i ae p FOB Seg 0014 Leyel ete a ee ee p P O B Related ge ON oa NS cae Sea aN TreQ 0007 0 4 0007 This Ls a conditional command that checks the existence of segment 0007 If it exists it moves on bOn the next Commande LE ir Coes not exist it searches until it finds an ENDIF statement and continues from there PSWILITCH 10 Turns on temporary file number 10 What ever info is generated between FSWITCH 10 and Phew he Hy 0 Wade bees bored fom lacer use EPX 1 0 1 0014
33. Code iesire a n a tee ned eee Raa 269 Appendix Glossary of Terms sisig aaea 271 DiTranslator 8 is designed to take full advantage of true 32 and 64 bit architecture and provides you with unprecedented power and flexibility for your EDI applications Operating under Windows 7 and Windows 2008 your EDI program gets off to a quick start New features and enhancements make it easy to manage your EDI program communicate with your partners and integrate EDI processing with your existing applications DiTranslator 8 works in concert with DiCentral s popular software extensions for EDI including Pre configured EDI kits for major industry and government programs Data Transformer which allows the storage of your EDI data in a database format and allows the creation of complete reports Third party bar coding software for satisfying advance ship notice and labeling requirements Electronic procurement software for securing federal government business This chapter includes the following topics System Requirements Essentials Before Sending And Receiving Data Installation Instructions For DiTranslator 8 DiCentral Technical Services DiTranslator 8 Overview 1 System Requirements Ensure that your system at least meets the minimum requirements described below Intel Pentium Celeron processor at 1 Ghz or compatible CPU 512 MB of RAM At least 500 MB of available hard disk space Hardware A graphic card capable of 10
34. Commands The explanations of the available File View Tools and Help menu commands in DiTranslator 8 are provided below Some of these commands function slightly differently if you are in the Data Editor or the Task List Editor See Using The Data Editor in the Daily Processing chapter and The Task List 18 Editor in the Automating DiTranslator chapter respectively for details about the Data Editor and Task List Editor menu commands awk The File File Menu menu commands are listed below Ctrl N Open Ctrl 0 Run Ctrl R Run Unattended Ctrl T Purge Data Del D elete Object Ctrl L Archive Ctrl A u nArchive Ctrl U Rename Print Ctrl P U pdate Wizard Ctrl wW Schedule Event Ctrl Properties Ctri E Edit Ctrl D C C onfiguration Migration tool Ctrl M lone Trading Partner Ctrl C Email to support Ctrl E Exit The New command accesses the appropriate window to add a network trading partner task or data file depending on what window you are in when you activate the command This command can also be activated by right clicking on a blank area of a window and selecting New from the pop up menu The Open command performs the same operation as double clicking an item It moves you to another window data file or it initiates a task This command can also be activated by right clicking on a file icon or task icon and selecting Open from t
35. EXpOmine sisirin a E a 173 3 2 DiTranslator8 Files Used TOMmIMPOMiINng cesa ae RA E eau aa aeeeene 173 3 5 Dilranslator S File LOCATIONS oipukonnone n aha ueaualecbeg aes upeavaessuesea via ios 174 3 4 DiTranslator 8 File Format Description cccccccsssecccessececeeseccceenecceceesecesaesecesseeeceeseneeeeeas 174 3 5 ADOUL Tie Oreanizatlomor LNG BiG cscccsten cis test canescens ie ea ee 174 5 6 FIC SECTION DESCHIDUIONS area deel annaiane a situa aruitavecrnnue fone talents cceemaehe 175 AE ARF EE au ctcoasna vse csaneu utp tees wecseldcauelhncsee deta uedanulosive ud dysdvovet sarees a evevewetsandourdsedveset ious detyuevenntoaeets 178 A tGeneratine on XRF EE odao a A 178 4 2 Reddine an XRF PIC aces a eer tea E ees 178 4 3 Corresponding REF Segment in a DiTranslator 8 Interpreted File cccccceeccseeeseeeeeseeenees 179 Se LNG DElMIted PIC Fonmat enere naa a a a 180 Chapter VII Automating DiTranslator 8 s s sussssussusunnunnnnunnnnunnununnunnnnunnnnunnunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nanana 182 tras k LITS asn a a AEO N nates oatna eaten ca wae eteaen ies 182 1 1 Overview Of Task Lists cccccccscsccscaccscsccscsccecscecscaesecsteecscoecscaesscausecatancstaecscassscaesecasancess 182 1 2 We Tisk List EdItO saassasszeastenccaaswsysecaimessnaesusnessnnoeysvacannveenneniisaaevancveasnensaqnwuss orenioupuaeeesvereains 185 PAME aN WT RLS e E N ER 187 1 4 Opening an Existing Task List e seseessseenss
36. For instructions on how to configure the Interpret Mail task to send the proper Functional Acknowledgment or to disable automatic generation of Functional Acknowledgments see Interpret Sorted Mail Task Configuration in the Setting Up Your System chapter 1 Inthe Inbound Documents tab expand the transaction set you wish to process by clicking on the sign to the left of its icon 2 Double click the trading partner name or icon for which you will process a transaction set The Inbound window is displayed 3 Make sure the Translated Mail icon is empty i e the flag on the mailbox is down before continuing to the next step The Sorted Mail icon contains data i e the flag on the mailbox is up received from your partner which was sorted in the Sort EDI Mail section 4 Double click the Interpret Sorted Mail icon to initiate the interpreting process ms Outbor 4f Consolidate the Export File 204 Ver4010 210 Ver4010 Put Translated to Export File 810 Ver3010 Raw Data Report Im T Epot File 810 Ver4010 Sorted Mail 820 Ver4010 Translated Mail 974 Ver4010 EG Unknown Translated File 50 Ver3010 50 Ver4010 52 Ver4010 55 Ver4010 56 Ver4010 60 Ver4010 64 Ver4010 997 VerALL Notes The Translated Mail file may contain data from a previous Interpret Sorted Mail task If there is data in the Translated Mail file i e the red flag is up on the mailbox archive or delete it using 132 the Purge Data
37. Gl NULG if hConv NULL attempt to start the server app Wannee Gal vO see oles in OVW NOW sEry OucOnnect again i Peony DdeConnece dwhDRIinst Nezsenver hSezloore PCONVCONTE xX NULLO ties if hConv NULL MessageBox hWnd TPPC server is unavailable szAppName MB ICONHAND GlobalFreePtr lpszCommand Glopa i reek Tp Z Opr GlobalFreePtr lpszltem EndDialog hwnd TRUE eS elie TRUR 2 3 Request services from DiTranslator 8 via the DdeClientTransaction API In this case it s an execution command create a data handle for our command hddeCmd DdeCreateDataHandle dwDDEInst instance identifier lpszCommand address command buffer lstrlen lpszCommand l1 length of command Che j7 Sstare ac beqinnimg NULL Qe ES soreness a Cle SN aE text format Ce ee let system own data if hddeCmd MessageBox hWnd Unable to alloc data handle for TPPC command szAppName MB ICONHAND GlobalFreePtr lpszCommand GAbolocibimissreleicietGheisyAuo o ile ie GlobalFreePtr lpszitem Ero Ora LOT ANEA TRUE Return TRUE tell the server app to execute a tasklist if TRUE DdeClientTransaction HDDEDATA hddeCmad command we re sending a data handle hCony conversation handle NULL item Ce PRE Dany clipboard format KIPARE E UTE A eane ac tion TOUTOS 10 sec timeout amp dwResult result flags NSS ero E Jatigel IDIDIK Texe
38. In 12 4 2 Configuration To access the appropriate configuration screen perform as follows 1 Inthe Tree View expand the node for connection whose Network Generator locates 2 Right click on the Network Generator icon and select Properties 3 Select Configuration on the DiTranslator Setup window 94 DiTranslator Setup Task Id 328 UniquelD i 174405267 4 The Generate Mail Task Configuration tab below displays your configuration options with the default settings shown For additional information about the task click the Details tab Task Wizard Generate Mail Task Configuration Details Use Set Control s from Input File I Use All Control s from Input File Disable Validation Wrap Output File Save Unwrapped File Wrapped Record Length 0 5 Change the configuration settings as desired To save the settings click OK button 95 Meaning of Settings Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings Write Status Message select the checkbox to send messages to the Audit Log when this task is executed You must have the Audit Log option selected in the System Settings window to use this option Archive File select the checkbox to automatically archive the input data when this task is executed Unique Outbound Group Control select the checkbox to instruct the system to increment the Unique Outbound Group Control of the Functional Group Header stored in th
39. Installshield 13 If you would like to review the Release Notes and QuickStart Guide select their perspective checkboxes Otherwise click Finish to complete Notes Typical is recommended for most users Appropriate files are then copied to your system This section includes information about DiTranslator 8 User Guide Education and Training Technical Support DiTranslator 8 User Guide is a complete guide to all DiTranslator 8 operations features and commands This guide is designed for new and advanced DiTranslator 8 users who are familiar with Windows operating systems and Electronic Data Interchange EDI DiTranslator 8 User Guide is organized in a task oriented format A brief description of each chapter is provided below Chapter 1 Getting Started provides you a list of things to do before you receive and send data system installation instructions important overview information about this guide and how to get help and training 16 Chapter 2 Electronic Data Interchange gives you an overview of what EDI is about and how to read EDI data Chapter 3 Communications gives you an overview of communications in general and how it relates to DiTranslator Chapter 4 Setting Up Your System instructs you in customizing options for every facet of your system Most of the configuration is optional since many of the default settings will probably meet your needs Some configuration however is mandator
40. Language Rules And Command Reference 1 Creating Custom Data Entry Screens The DB Database Map Editor makes customizing your data entry screens an easy to use and efficient process The changes you are able to make to your data entry screens are as follows You may determine which segments and data elements will be displayed on the data entry screen You may mark desired segments or data elements as required fields The integrity of the EDI standard is upheld as you are not allowed to make required ASC X12 or EDIFACT data optional You may customize the name of a segment or data element You may omit segments or data elements from the Imported File RFM which is used to interface with another of your applications You can change the segment occurrence counts For data elements you may specify a default value a field type for validation and whether or not to right justify or zero fill the field By choosing Options from the Edit menu within the Data Editor you may also select the date format for any dates to be entered in the editor YYMMDD MMDDYY or DDMMYY Suppose you access the Data Editor for ACME Inc s 810 versions 3020 and the data entry screen displays like the one below 193 EF Hail_out Invoice Data Editor File Edit View Help ca fal Hi EE e gt a gt AK P b FIG Inv oice NTEJNote S pecial Instructi Invoice No 2 sear Invoice Date PER Administrative Co
41. Number from the standards manual or the Data Element Type e g Nn for a numeric field Field Names These names describe the fields or elements you will enter edit or view Names in bold mark required fields The default field names are taken from the EDI standard documentation Data This is the data entered in the field which can be edited or viewed A down arrow to the right of a data field provides a list of acceptable entries to choose from for this field Press F1 for Help when the cursor is in the data field C Common Terms for Data Entry The following are terms used in the Data Editor These definitions should be helpful to you while learning about data entry Meaning of terms Field The place where you enter text or numbers as data If you are using ANSI ASC X12 the field is equivalent to a data element If you are using EDIFACT a field is equivalent to a simple data element Record A collection of fields If you are using ANSI ASC X12 or EDIFACT standards a record is equivalent to a segment Loop 139 A loop is a collection of records that repeat The first record of a loop is called a parent record The other records are called child records A child record can be a parent record of another loop To enter data for any record in a loop you must first enter data for the parent record of the group After you enter data for the parent record you may enter data for any child record If you are using the ANSI ASC X12
42. Omes tee 2 Click Network Help for specific information about the network you installed Use the information in the Configure the Network Connection topic of the How To section to assist you with configuring the network You may print the current topic by selecting Print Topic from the File menu Select Exit from the File menu to return to the Network Wizard 3 On the Network Wizard screen click the Configuration button to access a series of communication configuration screens From here use the Help buttons and your online Network Help information from the previous step to assist you in completing these screens After you have entered configuration information for your network you will see a check mark next to the Configuration button meaning that your network is ready for use 3 2 Configuring a Custom Network Before a network can be used to send or receive mail it must be configured 51 1 Configuration can be done at the end of installation in this case continue with Step 2 or at any other time by right clicking on the desired network icon in the Networks amp the Internet window and selecting Properties The DiTranslator Setup is displayed DiTranslator Setup Name NS_AS2 Part 04 06 2071 Vv tem is configured 2 tem is not configured Networks cannot be used until fully configured New Update Delete UniquelD 503316480 2 Click the Configuration button The
43. Partner Wizard is redisplayed 125 5 Ifyou are prompted to configure your trading partner go to the Configuring a Trading Partner section in this chapter for details Otherwise just click the Finish button Trading Partner Wizard Trading Partner Name Bm X12 ISMEA Fart Network 200504000 2 10 94 Done 4 Coy ED Configuration O Auto Configuration 4 EE Transaction Sets Perea Trading Partner cannot be used until these items are Checked cows Heb 16 4 Updating Transaction Set Version If you need to move to another version of your EDI standard you don t need to update the old version You simply install the new version For example suppose you have been using ANSI ASC X12 transaction sets 810 Invoice 850 Purchase Order and 855 Purchase Order Acknowledgment at Version Release 003010 If you and your partner decide to move to Version Release 004010 you need to use the instructions in the Adding a Transaction Set For Your Partner section in this chapter to install the Version Release 004010 of the 810 850 and 855 transaction sets for your partner After installing the new transaction sets your trading partner window will display two icons for each transaction set one with version 003010 and one with version 004010 You can keep the old version on your system or you may remove each transaction set icon of the old version if you will not continue to use it by single clicking th
44. Read the File Layout XRF File later in this chapter 7 Determine which fields in the incoming transaction set you want transferred and to which fields in the associated outgoing transaction set they will be transferred With your specifications from your trading partner in front of you it may be helpful to make a chart to map which segments elements you will need to map from your inbound Purchase Order to your outbound Invoice The chart may look something like this All this information is available in the XRF file 206 Input from PO 850 v3010 P O Data Element P O Number Entity Identifier Code ID Code Qualifier ID Code Assigned ID Quantity Ordered Unit of Measure Unit Price Product Service ID Qualifier Product Service ID Product Service ID Qualifier Product Service ID Number of Line Items Transfer P O Ref To Field Des BEGO3 N101 N103 N104 PO101 P0102 P0103 P0104 P0106 PO107 PO108 P0109 CTTO1 Output to Invoice 810 v3010 Invoice Ref Des BIGO4 N101 N103 N104 IT101 IT102 IT103 IT104 IT106 IT107 IT108 IT109 CTTO1 Invoice Data Element P O Number Entity Identifier Code ID Code Qualifier ID Code Assigned ID Quantity Invoiced Unit of Measure Unit Price Product Service ID Qualifier Product Service ID Product Service ID Qualifier Product Service ID Number of Line Items 8 Once you have decided which
45. Reference section Using these commands you may cross reference tables ascend numbering across transaction sets and envelopes store addresses referenced from store numbers and more Using a table similar in style to a Windows INI file you may access various pieces of information by specifying the SectionName and the KeyWord Such a file would look something like this 219 addresses 1234 333 Sycamore Dr 1235 1414 Windsor St 1256 211 Oak St 1288 2345 Waukegan Rd zipcodes 1234 60201 1235 80504 1256 50333 1288 60015 Addresses and zip codes are considered SectionNames For example the Data string for KeyWord 1234 is 333 Sycamore Dr General considerations for the INI file include The file size is limited to 64K Text register data lengths are currently limited to 199 characters Choose either Blanks or Spaces Blanks that are not leading or trailing shall be significant When writing to a cross reference table the leading and trailing spaces are not saved f data in a cross reference table has double quotes all characters within the double quotes including the blanks are significant and will be retrieved You could have many sections of information or only one There can be multiple files of this construct to access different pieces of information 4 9 Report Writer Arguments Each Report Writer command has a specific set of arguments Arguments that are used by more than one command are listed
46. Shortcut What would you like to name the shortcut Type a name for this shortcut Click Finish to create the shortcut 6 Click the Finish button Before you can use this shortcut you must first enter the correct working directory for the transaction set The following step will walk you through this process Right click the shortcut we have just created and select Properties Click the Shortcut tab The Shortcut properties is displayed 146 Target type Application Target location Code Target m Files DICentral Di Translator Code Tsiedit exe Start in C Program Files DICentral Di Translator Edata l Shortcut key None an Comment 9 Enter the following command line in the Start in text box C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator EDATA connection_name tradingpartner_name ANSI transacti on_number version number 10 Click the Apply button 11 Click the OK button to exit and save changes The following are sample command line options that can be added to the Start in of your shortcut Example 1 C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator Code Tsiedit exe FILE MAIL_OUT EDT WORK C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator EDATA connection_name tradingpartner_name ANSi transacti on_number version_number Example 2 147 C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator Code Tsiedit exe FILE MAIL_OUT EDT MAP 8103010 STANDARD ANSI SYSTEM C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator WORK C
47. Trading Partners cannot be used until configured 2 Select the trading partners whom you would like to add transactions too then click the Transaction Sets button or Messages when using EDIFACT The Transaction Sets window is displayed or the Messages window when using EDIFACT and lists all transaction sets installed for this trading partner Each transaction set must be configured though the default values are likely to accommodate most installations FE H Sy 850 ver3010 Aly 997 YerSLl Configure Tasks and Files Update Delete Corio eee Install Ue 72 3 Select the desired transaction set and click the Configure button The screen that follows differs depending on the EDI standard being used One of the following screens is displayed e The X12 Transaction Set Configuration screen which has the Basic Advanced and Functional Acknowledgments tabs The Basic tab is active e The EDIFACT Message Configuration screen which has the UNH Details UNG Details Functional Acknowledgments and MSGLINK tabs The UNH Details tab is active e The TRADACOMS Message Configuration screen which has the Basic and MSGLINK tabs Complete the first screen by tabbing from field to field and using the following table for help with each individual field Then click the Next tab and enter the needed information and so on until you have entered information in each tab The information must be alpha
48. Transaction Set Structure Pane Status Bar E MAIL_OUT RFM Invoice Data Editor m a r es File Edit View Help waa Safe gt lal ale 2 r BIG Invoice NTE Note Special Instruction Invoice No CUR Currency _ REF Reference ID _ YNQ Yes No Question PO Date 2 PERJAdministratrve Comm Contact PO No N1 Name is N2 Addl Name Info Invoice Date Release No _ N3 Address Info Change Order Sequence Mo 2 N4 Geographic Location Transaction Type Code REF Reference ID PER Administrative Comm Contact DMG Demographic Info Action Code TO Terms of Sale Deferred Terms of Sale Consolidated Invoice Mo DTM Date Time Ref FOB F O B Related Instructions PID Product Item Desc MEA Measurements Transaction Set Purpose Code Top screen EditView Pane Data Element Reference or Data Element Type 138 Meaning of area functions Menu Bar The menu bar activates Data Editor commands Command See the Using the Data Editor Menu Commands section for details about each Data Editor command Toolbar The buttons in this toolbar are duplicated as menu bar commands They make moving through the Data Editor even easier Buttons are available for File menu commands Open Save and Save As Edit menu commands Cut Copy Paste Undo New Delete Sets and Duplicate View menu commands Previous Next Skip Backward and Skip Forward and Help menu command
49. UNG Queries EDIFACT There may be different UNG information for each message installed in DiTranslator 8 under a given trading partner Therefore UNG information queries need to be prepended with the transaction set and version The three pieces of item information are separated with an exclamation point The topic string still specifies the trading partner we want information about There may not be any spaces in the item string when requesting trading partner configuration information For example to get the Tax Message Indicator for version 4 of the ORDERS message the item string would be ORDERS 4 TaxMessagelnd The keywords are shown in the following table For the following item strings XXXXXX identifies a configured EDIFACT message and 99 identifies the standards version of that transaction in DiTranslator 8 o e XXXXXX 99 MessageCode Code from the Message section of the EDIFACT SNe anngarason sage renret oo XXXXXX 99 MessageVersion Version from the Message section of the inna EDIFACT Configuration dialog is returned XXXXXX 99 MessageRelease Release from the Message section of the lene EDIFACT Configuration dialog is returned XXXXXX 99 MessageAgencyCode Agency Code from the Message section of the lel EDIFACT Configuration dialog is returned XXXXXX 99 MessageAssocCode Assoc Code from the Message section of the inn EDIFACT Configuration dialog is returned XXXXXX 99 TaxMessagelnd Tax Message from the Message secti
50. a tool that allows you to quickly make a general report map for your transaction set which can be modified by the user if desired Trading Partner Kit Maps Each Trading Partner Kit contains customized reports for each transaction set within the kit which use the Report Writer scripting language Other maps may also be available for specific transaction sets These maps should not be modified since they are created to meet the specific requirements of the hub company User Created Maps These are created by starting with one of the above maps and modifying it or creating one from scratch Universal Report Maps These can be provided for certain transaction sets and will print user friendly text in place of codes Document Turn Around Instructions These are generally provided for Trading Partner Kits but can be created by the user for partners that are manually entered as well These instructions are written using the same commands used to create a custom report and transfer data from an inbound transaction set such as a Purchase Order and transfer applicable data from the Purchase Order to an outgoing document such as the Invoice In order to use the features of the Report Writer it is helpful to understand the flat file format of DiTranslator 8 data Generate an XRF file using the instructions in the The XRF File section in the The DiTranslator 8 File Format chapter The XRF file describes the layout of the specific tr
51. and explained below DecPlace A number specifying how many decimal places to use for computation and printing Data is rounded if DecPlace is less than the number of decimal places appearing in the data Format Used to specify the format of the data in the output file Valid format options are 220 ASIS Copy the field as is DECIMAL Print the field as a decimal adjusting for the decimal place Do not use on an alphanumeric field LIBF Left justify blank fill to length LIDECIMAL Print this field as a left justified decimal adjusting for the decimal place Do not use for alphanumeric fields LIZF Left justify zero fill to length RJBF Right justify blank fill to length RJDECIMAL Print the field as a right justified decimal adjusting for the decimal place Do not use on an alphanumeric field RJZF Right justify zero fill to length SQUEEZE The blanks at the beginning and end of the field will be removed Multiple blanks in the field will be reduced to one blank Length A number greater than zero and less than or equal to 127 that specifies how many characters to extract or print LinesToEnd A number specifying the output lines per page The value O zero generates a page break Position A number specifying the starting character position of a field within a record Position O zero specifies the first character of the record Regnum A number associated with a register There are 100 registers available
52. because the sequence of the inbound data is not always the same as in the outbound data Report Writer also writes sequentially to the output file Output is defined using column numbers Once a column has been written to Report Writer cannot go backwards on a line Report Writer commands are executed from the top down once per transaction For example a file containing five Purchase Orders will cause the Report Writer map to execute 5 times from start to finish To accommodate the sequencing of segments you will need to use a couple of commands that will hold output data in memory so that it can be printed later in the document These involve the 208 FCOPY FSWITCH commands and also those dealing with text registers TREGSAVE TREGSET and others The two most common Report Writer Commands that will be used in a Document Turn Around are TX and FD 3 3 1 TX This command is used to insert a text literal into the transaction set It is commonly used to create the segment and sequence numbers in the output file Skip Before of lines to skip before printing Skip After of lines to skip after printing RptCol The column to start printing in The text to print 3 3 2 FD This command is used to extract data from the input file KN Ln Offset of characters that precede the ee Tomat Tre deses tomato treana Here is an example of the commands that will map the data described in the previous table p IS S N E Y TS
53. commands which are listed by menu in the order they appear New File Use this command to create a new Task List Open File Use this command to open an existing Task List Close File Use this command to close the active Task List You must save your Task List before you close or you will lose all changes made since the last time you saved it Save File Use this command to save the Task List Print File Use this command to print the contents of the Task List Properties File Use this command to configure the currently selected task Exit File Use this command to exit the Task List Editor Cut Edit Use this command to remove a task from the list and put it on the clipboard This command is unavailable if there is no data currently selected Copy Edit Use this command to copy a task from the list onto the clipboard This command is unavailable if there is no data currently selected Paste Edit Use this command to insert the task you cut or copied at the insertion point This command is unavailable if the clipboard is empty Delete Edit Use this command to delete a task from your list Toolbar View Use this command to hide or display the toolbar which includes buttons for some of the most commonly used commands in the Task List Editor A check mark appears next to the menu item when the toolbar is displayed Status Bar View Use this command to hide or display the status bar at t
54. detection and correction standards used in modems and software today The trend towards higher data rates underscores the need for assurance of error free data transfers A number of different error control mechanisms are tabulated later in the Data Communication Standards section of this chapter 3 5 File Transfer Protocol The file transfer protocol used during a communications session defines the ground rules that must be followed by the two nodes A common bisynchronous protocol is the 3780 bisynchronous protocol Common asynchronous protocols include xmodem ymodem zmodem and kermit to name a few 4 Data Communications Standards Now that we have reviewed the general attributes associated with a communications session let s take a closer look at specific data communications standards Recall that data communications standards are separate from EDI standards Meaning of Error Controls MNP Level 2 3 and 4 Three error control standards from Microcom available in the public domain V 42 Protocol defined by CCITT Meaning of Signal Speeds V 22 bis 1200 amp 2400 bps V 32 4800 amp 9600 bps V 32 bis 4800 9600 and 14 400 bps Meaning of Data Compressions MNPS5 A proprietary data compression scheme from V 42 bis A CCITT data compression scheme Any particular modem can contain any combination of the standards depending on how a modem manufacturer wants to position itself in the market For example a
55. gt j Product Item Dee S 55 555555555 55555 55 SSS 55555 555555555 LOCE O46 Allows for multiple occurrences of the PID Seqmenity TX 07 UG OUzG Creates the PID segment in the invoice EDO 0 75 0046 4 6 LIBE 0 Extracts the sequence number from each OCCUrPreENnce or the PID in the Purchase order PPIDOL ic ANS 10 1 Item Desc Type Hoe IL DIG IL C 0026 10 1 Item Desc Type TENEM COAG EOT This is a conditional command that checks tO see if PIDOIL te blank Uf it 16 NOT blank Report Writer carries out the following command BDRM NIMOOL CORRO Extracts the PIDOL from the PO and prints ENDIF it in the PIDO1l of the invoice This is the matching statement for IFNE above If element PIDO1 was blank Report Writer would have skipped to this point before continuing PINDO A 0046 28 80 Desc PIDs A 0026 28 80 Desc EINE OIA 2 orp la et This is a Conditional command that checks cO 666 1f PID0S is blank It irt 16 NOT blank Report Writer carries out the following command EFD 0 0 29 0046 268 880 JBE 0 p Extracte the PIDOS from the PO and printe it ian the s PIDOS of the invoice ENDIF This is the matching statement for LENE above If element PIDO5 was blank Report Writer would have skipped to this point before continuing ENDLOOP Closes the PID loop ENDLOOP Closes the PO1 loop p TDS Seg 0050 Level US SS ee a Se eS ee a ee totall Monetary Value Summary
56. installing to flacal MSQULSERVER Browse Connect using T Windows authentication SUL Server authentication using Login ID and password below Login ID F AEZIMO d Next gt Cancel 8 Inthe Database server that you are installing to drop down list select the SQL Server that you would like to run with DiTranslator 9 Under Connect using select SQL Server authentication using Login ID and password below 10 Enter username and password that you use in the SQL Server into Login ID and Password fields Click Next to continue The DiTranslator Program Activation window is displayed 14 Activation via the Internet License Rew LWS 1 SBR PRIVEE BAL BBGH SSE GAG Activate Customer ID 998443 Achvation via Support Phone Call Challenge A4E S54 E SC New Challenge Challege Response Activate Cancel 11 Select Activate to confirm the License Key and Customer ID The small DiTranslator Setup window is displayed Installing Trading Partner network and kits Trading Partner networks and kits can only be installed within the DiT ranslator application Please review the instructions available in DiTranslator documentation for detailed installation procedures 12 Select Next to continue The InstallShield Wizard Complete stage is displayed 15 Whlrancltoe Ceni InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing Dilranslator on your computer View Quick Start Guide
57. network I DiTranslator calls a transmission mai 26 Sort Mail sorts the received EDI mail by trading partner Once sorted by trading partner the mail is then sorted by transaction set and version For example if your partner sends you an 850 Purchase Order version 004010 the system directs that mail first to your partner s mail slot and then to the Sorted Mail file at the Ansi 850 Ver 004010 transaction set level After sorting your mail use the Interpret Sorted Mail task to validate the sorted mail against the EDI standard you are using such as ASC X12 or EDIFACT The system validates the mail to meet the standard s requirements Executing the Interpret Sorted Mail task automatically generates a 997 Functional Acknowledgment A Functional Acknowledgment is a message you send to or receive from your partner indicating the EDI transmission was successful or that it had errors Generate And Print A Report once inbound mail is interpreted or outbound mail is reformatted use this task to view and print an inbound or outbound report which describes the data in an easy to understand format Document Turn Around if the Document Turn Around feature is included in your kit you can use this feature to transfer applicable data from inbound mail to outbound mail An example is transferring received Purchase Order data to your outgoing Invoice Put Import File Into Database if the Document Turn Around feature is included in your kit
58. page header Example 1 TX 0 0 1 Message Type TX 0 0 1 S Using the above commands the following will print out Message Type Example 2 TO Sle Pics oe Mes a ees TX Oy ie Ss tS Ya ao ees Using the above commands the following will print out THIS Be a test nas rs a test Note Since the Report Writer appends text on a line this escape code may not have an effect 241 Chapter IK Solving Common Problems This chapter addresses common problems that can occur in DiTranslator 8 and includes the following topics Error Messages Data In Your Unknown Documents And Unknown TP Mail Files Solving The Unknown TP Mail Solving The Unknown Documents 1 Error Messages When an error or warning message occurs a message box appears containing a message description and reference number This section covers the most commonly reported messages their probable causes and suggestions for their resolution The following list of messages includes the message number a description of the message and possible solutions For each message number the actual message may vary Therefore the exact message that appears on your screen may be slightly different than the general message description provided below 10 You don t have enough RAM There may be too many programs running at once To solve this error try these actions Close some of your running applications Exit DiTranslator 8 and Windows and reb
59. partner have defined and agreed upon to uniquely identify your company For example your DUNS number Authorization Optionally enter Authorization Information ISAO2 a code you and your trading partner have defined and agreed upon to further identify your company Your EDI Information BG 9 Code Enter your Application Sender s Receiver s Code BG03 04 you and your trading partner have defined and agreed upon to uniquely identify your company ID Optionally enter your Communications ID BGO1 you and your trading partner have defined and agreed upon to uniquely identify your company when sending data Your EDI Information EDIFACT 9 Identification Enter the Sender Recipient Identification you and your trading partner have defined and agreed upon to uniquely identify your company This value will be placed in field UNBO201 or UNBO301 depending on whether your company is sending or receiving Qualifier If the Identification field is coded enter the Partner Identifier Code Qualifier to specify the source of the codes used to identify your company This value will be placed in field UNBO202 or UNBO302 depending on whether your company is sending or receiving Rev Routing Optionally enter the Address for Reverse Routing that you wish for your partner to include in response interchanges to facilitate internal routing This value will be placed in the UNBO203 field Communications Agreement ID Optio
60. s Node Name User Tree view Detail view Favorites EEE EFR Sot Host Data Fle Parent s Unique Id 335544331 Node Name System Wide Data Files rt consolidated fil System Wide Data Files Mi Export consokdated fle Original Name e L System Wide Tasks 2 Import hostsort file i 7 Sorted Mail at a ww y hemes Unique ld 335544321 T T Translated Mail Task ld Trading Partners Networks amp the Daily Processing Inbound Outbound System E Unknown hostsort file Internet Documents Documents Management Type Folder Working Directory C Program Files Trading Partner User File Classical View Adjust the size of Toolbar and Forms Hide or display the command items 5 2 3 Tools Menu The Tools menu commands are listed below Audit Log Viewer Reconcilation Viewer Scheduler System Configuration User Editor Show Version Task Queue Audit Log Viewer displays all the task execution warnings errors and status messages that have occurred and allows generation and print audit reports Reconciliation Viewer displays outbound documents you have sent and the associated acknowledgment of receipt from your partner It also displays acknowledgments you have sent to your partner for documents you have received You can generate and print reports based on user defined specifications Scheduler sets schedule for automating your processing See Automating DiTra
61. standard a loop is equivalent to a repeating segment group or a transaction set If using the EDIFACT standards a loop is equivalent to a segment group or a message Loops in the Data Editor show the child records in the group indented with respect to the parent record in the Transaction Set Structure screen Parent Record The first record in a loop See Loop above Child Record The records following a parent record in a loop See Loop above 2 3 2 Using the Data Editor The following sections will help you in using the Data Editor Steps For Data Entry Using The Data Editor Menu Commands Using The Data Editor To View A Data File Running The Data Editor Outside Of DiTranslator 8 A Steps for Data Entry Use the following steps to manually enter data into a document using the Data Editor 1 Open the Data Editor x In the Tree View tab expand the node for network trading partner and transaction set that you wish to edit or enter data Select the Outbound Double click the Database icon NS_ AS 810 Ver3010 A a InBound ai 5 Generate EDI Mail from Trar Process Outbound Data z Put Import File into Database FS Put Import File to Translated Invoice Report z Raw Data Report Database ve Imported File se Translated File m Unknown Generate Data 140 The Data Editor is displayed and is ready for data entry for the selected transaction set and tr
62. stored Archive DiTranslator This sub directory holds all the archived trading partner mail 8 files slot files Archive Network The Network Archive sub directory contains archives of files IN NEW and OUT NEW data The format of the archived files is In_01 NEW for IN NEW and Out_01 NEW for OUT NEW The 01 value indicates that this is the first archive so 02 would indicate the next archive and so on The Favorites sub directory contains the shortcuts to other BS aapnatone tatou nave aster orenitare Code The Code sub directory contains executable files such as EXE files Again the number of the files depends on how many transaction sets and functions you have loaded into DiTranslator 8 The THEI lier Geet Hie iT O Hele Tite sub directory contains all the DiTranslator 8 Help files Nictinidantlaisladioiekelalencedaltadiecll NetSetup sub directory contains the setup program you would need to run to install a workstation This directory will only be available with DiTranslator 8 Workgroup Hub Hub custom report maps are stored in this directory report Hub custom report maps are stored in this directory are stored in this directory System The fiato ae apaa mgd files such as S ESP contain the system network trading partner and other fiato ae apaa mgd that you have The Maps sub directory contains the standards sub directory ANSI EDIFACT for the transaction set maps Most maps are labeled according
63. string value is specified as a series of text printable characters enclosed in quotes e g Each 4 10 Report Writer Command Reference The following sections detail each command available in Report Writer and are listed in alphabetical order CODE Syntax CODE Input value Output value Remarks Use CODE after an FD command to replace an input data value with your own output value CODE compares input value with the input data specified in the preceding FD command If the two values are the same output value will be printed on the report instead of input value Example FD 0 0 1 0013 10 3 UJBF 0 CODE GEN General Information Report Writer will extract three characters of input data beginning at position 10 of segment 0013 see command FD If those three characters are GEN they will be replaced by General Information when printed to your report CROSSREF FilePath SectionName KeyWord Treg Default Remarks This command will look in the table specified by FilePath in the section SectionName retrieve the value set equal to KeyWord and place that value in text register TReg FilePath SectionName KeyWord and Default can be either a quoted string or a text register number TReg must be a text register number If FilePath SectionName or KeyWord are not found then the Default value is placed in TReg If FilePath contains only a filename then it is assumed to exist in the current working directory The name
64. tasks you amp Raw Data Report wish to add to your amp 852 Report Trading Partner setup To Modify drag tasks to the desired list When done click Finish 12 To accept the default Task List construction which is adequate for most installations just click the Finish button To identify the other tasks you want to include in the Task List which is used for automated processing drag tasks from the Available Tasks box es and drop them in the Processing Task List box es When you are done click the Finish button 13 Repeat this step for each transaction set installed for this kit The Trading Partner Wizard is redisplayed 57 Trading Partner Wizard Trading Partner Name EDI Standard Walmart x1 2 ISAIEA Part Network 2005040 2 10 94 Done Cay EO Configuration fo Auto Configuration EE Transaction Sets i ne Trading Partner cannot be used until these items are Checked Cmos eo Your new trading partner must be configured before you can communicate with them You may either do so now or you may simply click the Finish button and configure the partner later If you click the Finish button without configuring a message box displays Click the Yes button to exit and configure the partner later Whether you configure now or later use the instructions in the section Configuring A Trading Partner in this chapter to assist you Once the installation is complete you will see the new trading par
65. that transaction set Select the partner the list of data files will be displayed at the Inbound Document Files section Any file containing data and the transaction set and trading partner these data files belong to will display in bold Right click on trading partners or files to display commands that can be executed in this screen Double clicking a trading partner will access the window containing all processing tasks as shown throughout this chapter Similarly outbound documents may be accessed The easiest way of all to process your data is to operate in unattended mode You can automate your DiTranslator 8 system by using the Scheduler to process the data without an operator present This feature is explained in detail in the Automating DiTranslator 8 chapter 1 Inbound Processing Important Before you can receive data see the Essentials Before Sending And Receiving Data section in the Getting Started chapter for a checklist of tasks to complete before processing data 128 This section includes An overview of inbound processing Steps to receive and process data See the Additional DiTranslator 8 Features section at the end of this chapter for information on optional features that can enhance your processing 1 1 Overview of Inbound Processing The following diagram is a representation of inbound processing for DiTranslator 8 Your Partner sends EDI data Run Receive Mail task Yy N
66. the Data Editor Then when you are ready to enter your Invoices information in many of the fields is already filled in 3 1 Before you begin Before you begin creating a Document Turn Around we assume you understand the following 2 oS The DiTranslator 8 flat file format The transaction set file layout XRF file The Report Writer language The specs provided by your trading partner to send and receive documents Creation of the icon in DiTranslator 8 3 2 Steps for Creating Document Turn Around Instructions 1 Create a report icon Access the window where you want the Document Turn Around task icon you are creating to display Select L New button on the toolbar Select New button in the Tasks tab of the DiTranslator Setup window The Task Wizard is displayed Click the Create a Custom Task option button and click the Next button In the Task Name field enter a name that will appear under the new task icon for the custom Document Turn Around task e g Convert P O to Invoice then select TPPC Report from the Task Types box and click the Next button Task Wizard Task Name Convert PO to Invoice User Tracked Task Select the type of User Un Tracked Task Task that you Mercator Task wish to create Communications Task File Utility Task Segment Teminator Task Send Email Task Unite Task Network Generator Netware Tranelatrr 205 The Report Write Task window is displayed Report Write Task D
67. the number of archived files you want to keep For example if you type 3 the system will archive all data files for 3 consecutive processing session and on the fourth session it will overwrite the oldest of the 3 existing files When you set an archive level at the System Configuration window you are setting the archive level system wide You may set different Archive Levels for a specific file by configuring that file See Adding And Configuring Files in this chapter for details See also Archiving And Unarchiving Files in the Daily Processing chapter Data Directory This field identifies the DOS directory path where your data files are found and cannot be changed Switch to the Registration tab The default values are displayed 44 System Configuration Server Freferences Database Maintenance Audit Log Settings Data File Settings Registration License Key Register Customer ID 998443 6 Change the settings as desired using the following table to assist you License Key Enter the License Key found in the mailbox whose address was entered in the download form This allows you to upgrade DiTranslator from a single trading partner access to multiple trading partners access or add more workstations to DiTranslator If you would like to make any of the above changes please contact your Sales Representative for the appropriate License Key oe e Customer ID Enter your Customer ID that was d
68. the screen and select Properties Segment Properties Name IDEN KEN Sequence 1 Required Cancel Count f Hidden i Peformat 9 Make any desired changes to the Segment Properties screen and click the OK button 10 To modify element properties select the segment on the left side of the DB Map Editor that contains the data element you want to modify This makes the segment you clicked active and displays all data elements within that segment on the right side of the DB Map Editor 11 Right click the data element name that you want to modify and select Properties to display the Element Properties screen Name Invoice Ho Type Alphanumeric Length 22 Cancel Element 76 d Required O Netes Justify 9 ath fo Hidden validation i Right Reformat None F Zero Fill 12 Make desired changes to the Element Properties screen and click the OK button 196 13 To add a note specific to an element click the Notes button on the Element Properties screen Element Hotes Ea Cancel 14 Enter the text you wish to display above the segment and click the OK button 15 To add custom validation select a segment whose type is Code The Validation button is now active Element Properties lene Code S Length 2 Cancel Element 640 wei Motes Hidden Validation W Reformat Zero Fill Name ransaction Type Code Default ae
69. trade with your partner See the Adding A Transaction Set For Your Partner and Configuring A Transaction Set sections for information If you installed your partner using a Trading Partner Kit you may skip this step since your transaction sets were added when you installed the Kit 6 Read this chapter Getting Started for helpful general information For general information about EDI see the Electronic Data Interchange chapter 7 Automate your system using the pre configured Task Lists and the Scheduler See the Automating DiTranslator 8 chapter for assistance 8 Read the Daily Processing chapter to learn the steps for inbound and outbound processing 9 Will you be using data entry or Document Turn Around to create documents to send your partner If so see the Daily Processing chapter for complete details 10 Will you be importing or exporting EDI data from or to another application outside of DiTranslator If so see the Interfacing With Other Applications chapter for complete details 3 Installing DiTranslator 8 3 1 Installing DiTranslator 8 Use the following instructions to install DiTranslator 8 After you have completed the installation you may be required to restart your computer before using the software You will have the option to restart your computer at the end of the installation process or to wait until later At any time during the installation process you may click th
70. transaction set or message that contains information related to receiving or sending a transmission Functional ID The identifying code for a Functional Group For example PO is the functional ID for the Functional Group that contains one or more Purchase Orders Global Applications such as a file editor tasks files and configurations that apply to the entire system Global Editor An editor that allows you to change system wide settings Hub Company A large company that has many different trading partners Hub Report A report generated by DiTranslator 8 PC that reflects a specific hub company s EDI segment technical specifications Icon A graphical representation of an item in a window such as a task application data file transaction set and report Import To receive data or to copy files from an application and or another computer to DiTranslator 8 PC You can import manually from diskette or from file transfer software Importing from a mainframe or midrange computer to a PC computer is the same as downloading Inbound Incoming Refers to incoming EDI mail or mail you receive from a trading partner Interchange Control Segment A segment that is used to convey control information Contrast with Data Segment Interpret Mail A DiTranslator 8 PC task which translates the data within an EDI transmission 272 Master User A DiTranslator 8 User that has access to all system configurations and oper
71. transaction set type such as 810 for an Invoice or 850 for a Purchase Order is displayed The default value is correct This value is placed in the STO1 field Version The version number of this transaction set is displayed The default value is correct This value is placed in the ISA12 field If your New Mail In data icon displays a version number with leading zeros leading zeros must be present before the version number in this text box for example 003010 If the version number ends in RETAIL then RETAIL must also be included in this text box Your EDI Information EDIFACT Identification Enter the ID which you and your trading partner have defined and agreed upon to uniquely identify your company This value is placed in field UNGO201 or UNG0301 depending on whether your company is sending or receiving Qualifier If the Identification field is coded enter a qualifier to specify the source of the codes used to identify your company This value is placed in the UNGO202 or UNGO302 field depending on whether your company is sending or receiving Your Partner s EDI Information EDIFACT Identification Enter the ID you and your trading partner have defined and agreed upon to uniquely identify your partner This value is placed in the UNGO201 or UNGO301 field depending on whether your partner is sending or receiving Qualifier If the Identification field is coded enter a qualifier to specify the source of the
72. your trading partner configuration 4 Inthe tree view tab right click the icon for the trading partner where the error occurred and select Properties 5 Click Configuration in the DiTranslator Setup window then click the Separators and Terminator tab 6 Depending on which error message you received check the Element or Sub Element line Compare the delimiters you recorded earlier If the delimiters do not match type in the delimiter decimal equivalent you recorded from your New Mail In data 7 Click the OK button and then click the Finish button Run the Interpret Sorted Mail task again 2 Data In Your Unknown Documents and Unknown TP Mail Files Definition of Terms Unknown Documents An Unknown Document means that DiTranslator 8 does not recognize a transaction set or message Unknown TP Mail TP refers to trading partner Unknown TP Mail means DiTranslator 8 does not recognize a trading partner 243 About the Unknown Message If you have your system Warning Level set at 10 or more a Message box will appear stating the inbound mail is for a trading partner and or a transaction set that does not exist Why the Message Occurs Unrecognized data is sent to the Unknown Documents and Unknown TP Mail files because inbound data envelopes do not match the system envelope configurations You will need to view your inbound mail data and check your system configuration information Probable Causes 1 During tra
73. 0 9950001 BEG 00 SA 002681 213163 20101213 REF R 3635500 REF DP 63 WINTERCO DEPARTMENT REF 19 NwW EASTERN REGION REF 227 36355 BUYER VENDOR NUMBER REF ZZ 00 BUYER VENDOR SUFFIX FOB PP 2Z27 WINTERCO WHOLESALE ITD OL FPF FF Fe LAPS eee pag 14 DIM 1 5 20101223 DTM 002 20101225 DTM 010 20101223 TOS5 VENDOR CHOICE NO HS LEGAL DISCLAIMER MSG This order incorporates the wholesale Standard Terms MSG as they may be amended from time to time and any applicable MSG signed agreements between us 4 mn 3 Determine which trading partner you need to re configure The ISA or UNB segment contains your trading partner s Interchange Sender ID If you cannot recognize which trading partner the Interchange Sender ID corresponds to you should contact the trading partners you trade with through this network For detailed instructions on how to read an ISA or UNB line see the Electronic Data Interchange chapter 4 Exit the Unknown TP Mail file by selecting Exit from the File menu 5 Inthe tree view tab right click on the desired trading partner and select Properties 6 Click Configuration In the Basic tab look at Your EDI Information and Your Partner s EDI Information Compare the ISA line you recorded with the one displayed in your dialog box For detailed instructions on how to read an ISA line see the chapter Electronic Data In
74. 000001 Creates the FOB segment in the invoice CanOls ies 3G 0007 10 2 Shipment Method of Payment PE ORO C 0014 10 2 Shipment Method of Payment ED 070 LL 0007 L072 LDJBE 0 pBxtracts Carca rrom FOBOL anc prints in POBOL POWLICH O Turns off temporary file number 10 and stores it ror ep later printings ENDIF Mais ws the matching Statement Cor IFEO above If segment 0007 didn t exist Report Writer would have skipped to this point before continuing ERO 0012 0 4 OO Onl pras 1s a condicional command that Checks the existence of segment 0012 If it exists it moves on to the next command If it does not exLsSt lrt earches a tine mile ie cimds an ENDILE statement and continues from there Powe CHL p Turne on temporary Cile number 11l and stores ic Tor placer printing TX 1 0 1 0012000001 Creates the ITD segment CENE OOL LO Lp N at pTtaLs Ls a CONndLEtone Command thet checks cCOo 568 if oul Oe is blank If it le NOL blank Report Writer carries out the following command ED 0 0 11 0012 L0 27 LJBE 0 Extracts che TTDOL from tche PO and printe ie im cne p ITDOL of tche LAvVoOoLCeS ENDIF This is the matching statement for IFNE above If element ITDO1 was blank Report Writer would have skipped to this point before continuing TENE OOI EE ore his 1s a ConcitLonal command that checks cCOo 666 1f were OZ ie blank I it 16 NOT blank Report Writer carries out the following command PD 0 0 13
75. 0012 12 2 LJBE O p Bxcracts the ITDO2 from the PO aned printe ic in tche p ITDO2 of the Lnyoice ENDIF This is the matching statement for TENE above If element ITDO2 was blank Report Writer would have skipped to this point before continuing VENER oO Wale ieee is ee Pihas Ls a Condicional command Ehet checks cO 566 1r We DOS 1S blank I irt 165 NOE blank Report Writer carries out the following command PD 0 0 15 0012 14 8 LJBE 0 p Bxcracts tche ITDOS from che PO and prints ie ia che p ITDO3 OF the LAVOLCS ENDIF This is the matching statement for IFNE above If element ITDO3 was blank Report Writer would have skipped to this point before continuing PAN Ey SO Alea alee ran tais is Conditional command that checks tO 66 if Me SRBC is blank If it i18 mOT 210 TD 0 0 29 00012 2874 el 0 ENDIF FSWLTCH 0 ENDIF SSS N1 Seg 0029 N1 Seg 0006 EILL Name TOORMONZO TX 0 0 1 w000 ED 00 370029 4 6p LJBE 0 2 NIOL C 0029 10 2 NIOL C 0006 10 ED 0 0 11 0029 10 2 LJBE 0 2 N1102 A 0029 12 2 N1102 A 0006 12 PANET ONO ZOTE baad ao ED 0 013 0029 12 35 LJBE 0 ENDIF 2 NIOS 0029 47 2 NIOS 0006 A7 PD 0 0 48 0029 47r 2p JBE 0 ANAL Ay C 0029 49 2 NLOA eG 0006 49 ED 0 0 50 0029 49 17 LJBE 0 N3 Seg 0031 N3 Seg 0008 g Address Info TOOR Osa K O O pele OOO A EPD 00 5 0031 4 6 LJBE 0 2 N3301 A 00SL 10 No OEA 0008 10 PD 0 0 11 0
76. 02 58 Ph 0 2011 0 2011 Dilranslator Wr O 2011 DiTranslator Wir O 2011 Dilranslator Dilranslator 0 2011 0 2011 te EDI Mail freo 2011 Program comple lator lator 1643 Your Application slator 1556 1000 1120 1119 1121 nnd Loading Map lator Program started lator te EDI Mail fr 072011 Started Task Starting Task Dilranslator Finished Task PO Report Denaram namakal D aes Fr 0 2011 0 2011 0 2011 0 2011 0 2011 0 2011 0 2011 mn 4 12 53 40 PM 12 50 32 PM 12 45 08 PH 12 45 07 PH 12 42 24 PH 12 32 00 PH 12 16 44 PH 12 16 43 PH 12 16 43 PH 12 16 43 PM 12 16 38 PM 12 16 38 PM 12 16 38 PH 12 16 37 PH 12 15 08 PH 17 15 nO Obl Uniqueld 0 Uniqueld 0 Uniqueld 0 Uniqueld 0 Uniqueld 0 Uniqueld 117 Uniqueld 117 Uniqueld 503 Uniqueld 100 Uniqueld 117 1 fatal error s 412 Transact 2 Inthe View menu as well as the toolbar you can select which message types you would like displayed Help 7 Status Messages Warnings w Errors Fatal Errors J 7 a Details Refresh Filter Fields Preferences j To Print Audit Log Reports The Audit Log Report can now be customized based on user defined specifications such as the message type Minimum Level and Date Range 1 Perform either option below to print Audit Log report a Select Print from the File menu b Select pi Print report icon on the toolbar The Print window is displayed 162
77. 031 10 35 LJBE 0 2 gt N3302 A 0031 45 2 gt N3302 A 00068 45 ENE OOS S ae EDO pO 467 0051 45 35 LJBE Oo eagles ENDLOOP Level 1 Level 1 JS 35 2 2 L7 L7 Level 2 Level 2 35 op 99 55 blank Report Writer carries out the following command Extracts the ITD04 from the PO and it in the ITDO4 of the invoice PIS is the Matching stacement Cor above If element ITD04 was blank Writer would have skipped to this before continuing Turns off temporary file number 11 Whatever info is generated between FOWLICH L0 anc p PFSWITCH O0 wwii be stored for later use This is the matching statement for IFEQ above If segment 0012 didn t exist Report Writer would have skipped to this point before continuing printe TRENIE Report Oomet we Allows for the existence of multiple occurrences of the Nl segment Creates the NI segment in the Invoice Extracts the sequence number from each occurrence of the NI in the Purchase order Entity Identifier Code Entity Identifier Code Extracts the N10L from tche PO anc prints Lt inm the N1011 of the invoice Name Name HDR HDE This is a conditional command that checks tO s66 irf N102 is blank I it i8 nor blank Report Writer carries out the following command Extracts the N1102 from che PO anc prints Lt in the NLO2 of the invoice This is the matching statement for IFNE above If element N102 was blank Report W
78. 1 S CN COSC kOe el Total Invoice Amount TX 0 0 1 00510000012 Creates the TDS segment in the Invoice j CTT Seg 4p 0089 Level 1 SS Se p CTT Seg p 0057 eyel SS SS J Teangaction A i r a a ae ee nae ne ae ne ee ee TX 0 0 m OMaa Creates the CTT segment in the Invoice PD 0 0 5 00897476 LIBE 0 Extracts the sequence number from the CTT segment in the purchase order PCTTOL N 0089 10 7 No of Line Items LOTRO 0057 10 7 No of Line Items PD 0 0 11 0089 10 7 LJBE Q pBExrtracts the CTTOL trom the PO and prints it in the pCTTOL or The 1AvoLCEeE 3 4 How to Read the File Layout XRF File An XRF file will look something like this 213 Interpreted Map for 8503010 Seg 0001 Level 0 BEG Purchase Order Name Type Seg Off Len Transaction Set Purpose Code PO Type Code PO Number Release Number IPOt Deter T2 Contract Number 0001 102 Acknowledgment Type Q gt O e gt OQO A The file layout contains an entry for each segment which could occur in that transaction set Each segment is defined by a four digit identifier known as the segment number which occurs in numeric order in the file layout Above is an example of the first segment of a Purchase Order 8503010 Each segment is then divided into elements Each element has six components Element Number Element Type tells if the element is Sequence number S Coded value C Alphanumeric A Date D Time T Nume
79. 1 0032 10 19 Ik Be a Extracts the N40L from the PO anc prints it ia the NAO of the invoce 2 NAO 5G 0032 29 2 Stace or Province Code 2 N4O2 0009 29 2 Stace or Province Code PD 0 0 30 0032 29 2 JBE 0 Extracts the NAO from che PO anci prints Lt in the p N4022 of the invoce a2 N4O3S C 0032 1 31 Postal Code 2 N4OS G 0009 31 Postal Code Extracts tne N4039 fren tche PO anc printes aot in the N403 of the invoice ED Op 0 32 00327317 9 LJBE Q ENDLOOP Closes the N4 loop ENDLOOP p Closes the NL loop Notice that the N1 loop encompasses the nl n2 n3 and n4 SCOMMESSE EOP p Prints Out tempo tay tile 11l the ITTO segment Since ITD is segment 12 in the LinyoLCe we Could not print pit until thig time Otherwise the segments would be out of sequence and would cause errors to be generated when posting into the database TX 0 0 1 00130000010119 Creates the DTM segment in the Invoice ECORV 10 p Prints Out temporary tile 10 tche FOB segment p pOL Seg 0041 Level s s ssssss 5 gt 7s gt srsn gt nsn gt nnrnnnnnnnnn p P O Baseline Item Data a a a p ITL Seg 0020 Level I SaaS a eS a er p Baseline Item Darca Layvolce 3 5 9355 35 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 SS SS SSS LOOP 0041 Allows for the existence of multiple occurrences of the POIL segment since you will likely get more than one line item TX CCOr E a Cie eee p Creates the IT1 segment in the Invoice FPD 0
80. 121 5163 20101213 REF VR 3635500 REF DP 63 WINTERCO DEPARTMENT REF 19 NwW EASTERN REGION REF 277 36355 BUYER VENDOR NUMBER REF 27 00 BUYER VENDOR SUFFIX FOB PP 2727 WINTERCO WHOLESALE DIM 1 7 5 20101223 DTM 002 20101225 DTM 010 20101223 TD5 VENDOR CHOICE NOS HS LEGAL DISCLAIMER MSG This order incorporates the wholesale Standard Terms MSG as they may be amended from time to time and any applicable MSG signed agreements between us N1 ST wWINTERCO RETAIL DEPT 9 1033918430268 There may be an extension at the end of the last line such as VICS 3 Determine which transaction set you need to re configure The GS or UNG segment and the ST or UNH segment in the Unknown Documents file indicates each transaction set you received as an Unknown If you cannot determine which transaction set or message you need to re configure contact your trading partner 4 Exit the Unknown Documents file by selecting Exit from the File menu 5 Inthe tree view tab double click the trading partner where the error occurred 6 Right click on the transaction set icon for the transaction set you need to configure and select Properties 7 Click Configuration 8 Inthe Basic tab compare the Application Codes with the data you recorded for the GS or UNG line For detailed instructions on how to read either the GS or UNG line see the Electronic Data Interchange chapter 9 Change your transaction set configurations ac
81. 24x768 display resolution or better Internet Connection Broadband is recommended CD ROM or better Support communication adapter 32 and 64 bit edition of Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Native Client Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Increasing processor speed and memory will significantly improve the performance The Audit Log and Reconciliation Viewer reports may require more memory Disk space requirement is an estimate and varies according to usage Installation requires Administrator privileges 2 Essentials before Sending and Receiving Data Use the following checklist for getting started with DiTranslator 8 Complete the tasks in the order listed Check List Of Things To Do Before Sending and Receiving Data 1 Mutually agree upon a method of communications with your partner Use a modem that is compatible with your network Install your modem using the modem s instruction manual Gather the following information having to do with your network Type of communications you are using asynchronous or bisynchronous Data communications speed e g 9600 bps If applicable network specific interconnects when the network you are using is connected to another network it is commonly referred to as a network interconnect 2 Inan EDI partnership you should consult with your trading partner and Choose an EDI standard e g ASC X12 including transact
82. 3 J Change the settings as desired using the following table to assist you 9 Warning Level Type an integer between 0 and 14 to set the error Warning Level The Warning Level specifies the conditions that will trigger a Message box to appear on screen For example if you type O data containing warnings will process through the system without displaying a Message box Type 1 to invoke a Message box for only the most severe errors Type 14 to invoke a Message box for all errors See Appendix G Data Errors for a complete list of tasks and their warning messages Switch to the Data File Settings tab The default values are displayed System Configuration Server Freferences Database Maintenance Audit Log Settings Data File Settings Editor EDI Editor TS Edit exe Archive Level 22484 Data Directory C PROGRA T DICENT 1 DITRAN 1 Edata Prompt before purging data Change the settings as desired using the following table to assist you b2sa Editor Type the executable file name for the editor you want to use to view the contents of DiTranslator 8 data files The default editor is Notepad exe that Microsoft provides with your Windows installation set EDI Editor Type the executable file name for the editor you want to use to view the contents of DiTranslator 8 EDI files The default editor is TSIEdit exe which allows you to view your EDI files in the DiTranslator 8 Data Editor Archive Level Type
83. 3010 eg B10 Ver3010 inbi 3 0 810 Ver3010 Out 8 EEE on A Fut Import File amp 10 Ver4010 50 Ver3010 997 VerALL Task Id 142 UniquelD 1174405142 5 The Generate EDI Mail Task Configuration tab below displays your configuration options with the default settings in place For additional information about the task click the Details tab Task Wizard Acceptance Level 20 Translator Map Name 81030104m T Use Set Control s from Input File EDI Standard Ans Use All Control s from Input File Output File Name I Input from RFM File I Disable Validation Wrap Output File Save Unwrapped File Wrapped Record Length 0 6 Change settings To save the settings click the OK button 8 Meaning of Settings Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings as desired Write Status Message select the checkbox to send messages to the Audit Log when this task is executed You must have the Audit Log option selected in the System Settings window to use this option Archive File select the checkbox to automatically archive the input data when this task is executed Space Compression select the checkbox to instruct the system to reduce disk space by stripping out all the space padding that may exist in the data Unique Outbound Group Control select the checkbox to instruct the system to increment the Unique Outbound Group Control of the functional group he
84. 4 IFTRNETR 3 4 TX 0 0 1 Register 3 does not equal register 4 ENDIF The TX command is executed because register 3 does not equal register 4 LOOP amp ENDLOOP Syntax LOOP Seg other commands including other LOOP commands ENDLOOP Remarks Use LOOP to execute commands based on data for a particular segment Seg specifies the segment to be tested for input data For each segment specified by the 232 Example NOFIELD Syntax Remarks Example PAGE Syntax Remarks Example REGADD Syntax Remarks Example REGCOPY Syntax Remarks number Seg that has data the commands between LOOP and ENDLOOP will be executed NN Taa Wp Oy ly LOOP 0013 FD Dy O 0 O13 10 3 L JBE CODE GEN General Information DEFAULT Other instructions ENDLOOP The FD command will be executed for each segment 13 in the input data file Message Type NOFIELD Output value Use NOFIELD after an FD command to replace an empty input value This command allows you to print out text in the case that the input data specified by the FD command is nonexistent FDO 0000 bo PU goof DEO NOFIELD No Data Sent If the preceding FD command s input has no data then No Data Sent will be printed on the report PAGE LinesToEnd Use PAGE to insert a page break If LinesToEnd is zero a page break is generated If the number of lines to the end of a page is less than or equ
85. AREE TUNA ee ee een ner ee eee eC eee ee 35 Ds FUNC ION el 7 yCK OW COINS I Sapte session sett tensa es cache cca beuewnaceGacencesenencaaeensenntveeis a eeeacesaeeuosssaeee cae 35 BO OI are create eee cst se E ES A AA EA EESE AE EE 35 5 2 Outbound Functional Acknowledgments sessseseseenssseeserrrresrrrsssrrressrerssrrresrreresrrresererereeresene 36 5 3 Inbound Functional Acknowledgments sessenseseensereenssrrresrresesrrresrreresrrresrrerssrrreserereseeressne 36 Chapter U Communicati iis sisisi ERE aE aE scestectueessdcesaestenetccestebent es 1 EDI and Data Communications sssssesssssseresssseeresssreresssserrssssseressssrrressserresssseressseeersssserressseeeeeese 37 2 The Value Added Network COncept cccccssccccssseccccssccecesececeeseccceesccesseseceseunecesseeeceeseesecesseneces 38 3 Data COMMUNMICALIONS TEFMINOIOZY rennin alec Seaneael dea ie adanaavsdee ess teacenees eee eee 39 5 LS COMMUMIC ALON TYDE Sara ana awaits tenancies N nue eeebannaies 40 De 2 IPN ANINS SOC sas sis aie wo totes care a N 40 3 9 Wala COMPIeSS Ollacuraiettentucsnclanendd tne T 40 3A Error Control cieatsssessvnccsnemadadeaunceceromasaueecnscaucotve sie coecopuendeasagec sues saved due epndoseeneeaneenicomenmaenes 41 35 FIG Trans er PROTOCOL orcs n tanned eadiseanunreaeeceuatasaatons 41 4 Data Communications StandardS s ssesesnesereeressnrereosererrcoerreressererresareeressarereeosreeressenrreesererrenne 41 5 DiTranslat
86. About The command button furthest to the right is for field help Click this button drag the question mark to a field and click to get field help Transaction Set Structure Pane This half of the screen is displayed the structure segments data elements and looping of the transaction set If you click and highlight a segment in the structure window that segment will be displayed and is ready for data entry editing or viewing in the Edit View pane Each data entry screen is associated with a segment of data Select Split from the View menu to reposition the vertical bar separating the Transaction Set Structure and Edit View panes Use the F6 key to toggle between the two side by side panes You may also toggle by single clicking an area within the pane with the mouse Status Bar This area displays information about your current location within the Data Editor Viewer Edit View Pane This half of the screen allows you to enter edit or view data in a user friendly format Select Split from the View menu to reposition the vertical bar separating the Transaction Set Structure and Edit View panes Use the F6 key to toggle between the two side by side panes You may also toggle by single clicking an area within the pane with the mouse Data Element Reference or Data Element Type These characters provide information about the data element field in which the cursor currently resides The information displayed is either the Data Element Reference
87. BP CODE GEN General Information CODE TRA Transportation Intormati n DEFAULT Other Instructions NOFIELD No Field Sent Report Writer will extract 3 characters of input data beginning at offset position 10 of segment 0013 If those three characters are GEN then after skipping 1 line General Information will be printed in the report beginning in column 2 left justified and blank filled and no line will be skipped after printing it If the characters equal TRA then Transportation Information will be printed If the characters exist but are not GEN or TRA then Other Instructions will be printed If the 3 characters are not found in the input data then No Field Sent will be printed FLOAT amp ENDFLOAT Syntax FLOAT Seg insert commands to format the segment specified 225 Remarks Example FSWITCH Syntax Remarks Example ENDFLOAT Use FLOAT to format and print the floating notes NTE that appear in the input data Seg specifies the segment number the input data is to be extracted from This command is stored in memory and will be executed whenever the input file has data for the segment specified as FLOAT s argument FLOAT 0002 PD Uy Op 00072 13 007 LJBE U ENDFLOAT Each time segment number 2 appears in the input file the FD statement is executed This FD statement will print 80 characters of data in segment 2 FSWITCH Temporary file number
88. Change the configuration settings as desired To save the settings click the OK button Meaning of Options Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings Write Status Message select the checkbox to send messages to the Audit Log when this task is executed You must have the Audit Log option selected in the System Settings window to use this option Archive File select the checkbox to automatically archive the input data when this task is executed Unique Outbound Group Control select the checkbox to instruct the system to increment the Unique Outbound Group Control of the Functional Group Header stored in this transaction set s configurations See Configuring A Transaction Set for details Clear the check if you want the system to increment the Common Outbound Group Control of the Functional Group Header stored in this trading partner s configuration See Configuring A Trading Partner for details Variable Records Every field from the input file Sorted Mail file will be left justified and space filled to the maximum length of the field in the output file Translated Mail file Select the checkbox to instruct the system to eliminate space padding after the last field containing data Disable Validation select the checkbox if you want to use the feature that activates Mercator mapper tasks from within DiTranslator 8 This feature will stop validation for this transaction set
89. DIFACT Segment EDIFACT Identifier is a unit of information consisting of a Segment Tag which may be followed by a list of numbers that control how many collections of segments appear in the data Element A unit of information within a segment Composite Data A collection of two or more data elements Element Data Element The smallest unit of information in a transaction set or message smallest unit of information in a transaction set or The smallest unit of information in a transaction set or message Data Element A character used to separate elements in a segment Separator Sub element A character used to separate the data elements of an ANSI ASC X12 Separator composite data element Currently sub element separators are reserved for future use Element Separator element of a composite element Segment Terminator A character used to indicate the end of a segment Usually not a printable character in ANSI ASC X12 and typically an apostrophe in EDIFACT Envelope The control information such as identifiers and addresses that surrounds data The data is bound together by header and trailer information For details see the ANSI ASC X12 or EDIFACT Interchange Control Structure section in this chapter 3 ANSI ASC X12 Interchange Control Structure This section eludes How to read an ISA line How to read a GS line Trading partners send data in a very specific format called the Interchange Con
90. Dleentrat t an Vor f B ftransiator version 8 0 m user manual Copyright and Legal Disclaimers User Manual for DiTranslator 8 Copyright 2011 by DiCentral Corporation All rights reserved This document and all content that is contained embedded and linked to this document and that is written by DiCentral Corporation or its partners or affiliates is copyright and bound by all copyright laws This document is the property of DiCentral Corporation and or its affiliates and contains public information about proprietary products and or services All information contained herein is the property and exclusive copyright of DiCentral Corporation No information within this document nor information about the products or services described in this document may be distributed or copied without the expressed written consent of DiCentral Corporation For further information contact DiCentral Corporation P Ilcentral Address 1199 NASA Parkway Houston TX 77058 Phone 1 281 480 1121 or 1 713 559 0580 Fax 1 281 480 1181 Website www dicentral com Table of Contents COpyricnt ang Legal DISCEAIIIGN S sursis aaan aaa aiaa asa aiana iaaa Chapter tT GoNE Slat E nna E E R 1 System REgUIrEMENTS watevessadsavccawsivwenvadheceasinnnycnsacvay A 10 2 Essentials before Sending and Receiving Data ccccccsssececcseccccessccecaesececeueceseeueceesausecesseneees 10 DAS CANS OV MANS lator Sarnin TN 11 Fo MMS CAMS
91. IN RFM is the output file created by the Put Translated to Export task 3 2 DiTranslator 8 Files Used for Importing If you want to import data download from another application such as a mainframe or mini computer to DiTranslator 8 the data must follow the DiTranslator 8 file format Each file must also have the correct file name There are three kinds of files you can use for importing MAIL_OUT CON Import Host Sort File MAIL_OUT RFM Imported File and MAIL_OUT TRN Translated File 173 Each file format uses a File Type Tag in the Envelope Header section of the file This tag identifies to the system the type of file you are importing The following describes the different kinds of file names and their corresponding File Type Tag MAIL_OUT RFM Reformatted MAIL _OUT TRN Interpreted You will want to use the Host File tag for data bound for multiple networks trading partners and transaction sets The RFM and TRN files are used for individual trading partners and transaction sets We recommend you use the Reformatted tag to import to the MAIL_OUT RFM file This way you can run the data through the translator Put Import File to Translated File task in order to ensure the data s EDI integrity 3 3 DiTranslator 8 File Locations The table below shows all the different types of DiTranslator 8 files their file extensions and their directory paths File Type File Directory Path Extension Reformatted Edata Network T
92. Mercator Type Tree Using the Mercator Tree Utility perform as follows 1 Inthe Desktop double click the DiTranslator icon 2 Inthe DiTranslator window double click the icon for the trading partner for whom you want create a Mercator type tree 3 Right click on the transaction set icon for which you want to create a Mercator type tree and select Properties 4 Select the Mercator Tree in the DiTranslator Setup window 168 Dilranslator Setup 810 Ver3010 210 Ver4010 ata Path C Program Files DlCentraDiTranslatorEdata NS A 850 Ver3010 lf 997 VerALL l a amp 3M 4010 4 T t Translate Map 4 tem is configured tem is not configured Transaction Sets cannot be used until configured The following screen is displayed Mercator Type Tree Curent Mercator Type Tree SS ooo o The Mercator Type Tree is used to integrate Trading Partner with Mercator This type tree can be used with Mercator to map to and from Trading Partner Import and Export files 5 Click the Create button to create a Mercator Tree Utility script The following screen will be displayed 169 Mercator Tree Utility Map Name Version Standard 8103010 003010 le o1 04010 004010 le 8403010 003010 mle 99 74LL ALL le Output Path C PROGRA 1 SDICENT TADITAAN 15E Wiriting Outbound 6 Once the Mercator Type Tree Maker completed successfully click the Close button to exit Mercator Type Tree
93. NDIF Remarks Use IFTREQTR to execute other commands if two text register values are equal If the value in the text register specified by Tregnum1 is equal to the value in the text register specified by Tregnum2 the commands between IFTREQTR and ENDIF are executed Example 231 TREGSET ABC Supply Co 5 TREGOET ABG Supply Co 6 TPIREOTR Dyo TX 0 0 1 Register 5 equals register 6 ENDIF Register 5 equals register 6 so the TX command is executed IFTRNE amp ENDIF Syntax IFTRNE Tregnum Text value other commands ENDIF Remarks Use IFTRNE to execute other commands based on a text register value not equal to another text value If the value in the text register specified by Tregnum is not equal to the value of the quoted string Text value the commands between IFTRNE and ENDIF are executed Example TREGSET This is a test 3 IFTRNE 3 This is NOT a test TX 0 0 1 The TX command 1s executed ENDIF The TX command is executed because text register 3 does not equal This is NOT a test IFTRNETR amp ENDIF Syntax IFTRNETR Tregnum1 Tregnum2 other commands ENDIF Remarks Use IFTRNETR to execute other commands if two text register values are not equal If the value in the text register specified by Tregnum1 is not equal to the value in the text register specified by Tregnum2 the commands between IFTRNETR and ENDIF are executed Example TREGSET ABC Supply Co 3 TREGSET ACME Corp
94. No of Units Shipped PES SO C 0058 22 Unit of Measurement Code RECPRINT O OO oA SE COR AN Seg 0057 Level 1 GIT Transaction Lotalls N 0059 10 7 No of Line Items TX 1 0 0 0057000001 RECERENT OO 0 7 0 1 B TS A E E E S E S S DS E TS DS E ET ES TS S E ES GS TS S S TOS TS S S TS OS TS IS S E E OS AS S S US USNS STS AS US US US SU 7 ND ET TX 1 0 0 END SET 810 VERSION 003010VICS GROUP IN OO p Module 4 rX Oy Oy eek Control SPECIAL 0 0 14 SETCONTROG TX 1 0 0 Gro Control SPECIAL 0 0 AEROUVRCONMRONE EONO E T O O EO Report Writer is the language used to create custom reports and Document Turn Arounds This section gives you the information you need to write these instructions and includes the following topics Report Writer Basics Report Writer Rules Adding Comments Report Writer Execution Output Commands Register Commands Conditional Commands Table Lookup Commands Report Writer Arguments Report Writer Command Reference 216 4 1 Report Writer Basics DiTranslator 8 Report Writer is a scripting language using the information in an EDI transaction set to create a user friendly readable report This script is contained in a Report Writer map The input file for the Report Writer map is a DiTranslator 8 flat file These are general types of maps All are similar in function and use Report Writer Report Maps Generated By The System The Report Map Generator is
95. Receive Mail will not run So when designing Task Lists consider the logical order of the tasks in the lists avoid building large lists and create Task Lists that execute other Task Lists For example let s suppose a Task List was made for each network mailbox and other Task Lists were made for each partner using the mailbox Suppose Network1 services CompanyA and Companys The Network1 Task List would simply execute the CompanyA Task List and then the CompanyB Task List If CompanyA has no data the CompanyA Task List is terminated but the Network1 Task List will then start the CompanyB Task List This way if one trading partner has no data the Task List for other trading partners will continue processing 182 Since the Task Lists are created automatically you only need to modify the existing Task Lists in your system if needed Of course you may create your own Task Lists as desired All system created Task Lists have icon titles of Process Inbound Data or Process Outbound Data Process Inbound Data Process Outbound Data To illustrate the modularity of the Task Lists created for you during installation see the following list of Task Lists shown at different levels within the system Task Lists at the Transaction Set Level Task Lists at the Trading Partner Level Network Level Task Lists System Wide Task Lists 1 1 1 Task Lists at the Transaction Set Level Each transaction set window contains a Process Inbound Da
96. Report Type Sort By Pririt f Full First when Deven C Full Detail Second User b Summary Third Autolndexs C Summary Detail Cancel Email Report Level Date Range iw Status C All warning f More Than 7T Days M Eror C LessThan 7 Days iw Fatal Error From 12001 7 to hangang E mail Attachment options Email Report Format Attach report if larger than 1000 bytes f Test Attach as Zip if larger than 100000 bytes C HTML Abort attachment if larger than Boog bytes Select the checkbox in front of the report level you would like to print 3 Select the Date Range you would like to print Click the appropriate button for the desired action to perform on this report Click the Print button to print the report Click the Preview button to preview the report Click the Summary button to print a table format summary report Enter an Email Address and click the Send button to send the Audit Log report Click the Cancel button to exit the Print window 4 3 1 Deleting Entries from the Audit Log Database To delete an individual transaction set from the list There are two ways to delete an individual transaction set m Click the a Delete button on the toolbar Click the Delete button in the File menu To delete multiple transaction sets from the list 1 Inthe Audit Log Viewer window select Delete from the File menu The Delete screen is displayed The default values are shown below 163 De
97. S SPECIAL 0 0O 0 TIME If the current time is eleven thirty and five seconds PM the following will print out 23 30 05 TREGCAT Syntax TREGCAT Data TReg Remarks This command will concatenate two strings TREGCAT will append the string contained in Data to the string in the text register TReg and place the result in text register TReg Data can be either a quoted string or text register number Example TREGSET The quick brown fox 6 TREGCAT jumped over the lazy dog 6 First the TREGSET command sets text register 6 equal to The quick brown fox Then the TREGCAT command takes the string jumped over the lazy dog and appends it to the end of the string in text register 6 The quick brown fox so that text register 6 is now equal to The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog TREGCOPY Syntax TREGCOPY Tregnum1 Tregnum2 Remarks Use TREGCOPY to copy the value in one text register to another text register TREGCOPY stores the text value of register Tregnum1 in register Tregnum2 Example TREGSET This is a test 4 TREGCOPY 4 2 Using the above commands text register 2 will contain This is a test TREGPRINT Syntax TREGPRINT SkipBefore SkipAfter RptCol Length Tregnum 238 Remarks Example1 Example 2 Use TREGPRINT to write the value in a text register to your report TREGPRINT prints the value in the text register specified by Tregnum skipping SkipBefore lines before printing SkipAfter
98. SA02 Authorization information This is the sender s password 00 ISA03 Security information qualifier This qualifies the next element In the example above 00 means ignore the next element 0000000000 ISA04 Security information This is the receiver s password ZZ ISAO5 Interchange ID qualifier This qualifies the next element 7083179000 ISA06 Interchange sender ID This is the sender s EDI address 12 ISAO7 Interchange ID qualifier This qualifies the next element 3122721850 ISA08 Interchange receiver s ID This is the receiver s EDI address 960717 ISA09 Interchange date This is the date of the interchange in YYMMDD format 1113 ISA10 Interchange time This is the time of the interchange Time is expressed ina 24 hour format U ISA11 Interchange standard ID This identifies the standard for this interchange The U is the ANSI ASC X12 standard identifier code 00304 ISA12 Interchange version ID This identifies the standard version release for this interchange 0000000 1 ISA13 Interchange control number A unique number used to track interchanges 0 ISA14 Functional Acknowledgment request flag The 0 signifies your trading partner does not need to receive an Interchange Acknowledgment TA1 segment T 1SA15 Test indicator The T signifies this interchange is test data as opposed to P for production gt ISA16 Sub element separator 3 2 Reading a GS Line You can view t
99. SSYSDIR is the directory path for DiTranslator 8 on the system regardless of where DiTranslator 8 was installed Example SSYSDIR reports codes could represent the path of C progra 1 tradin 1 reports codes Example TREGSET C TMP NAMES INI 1 TREGSET 1235 2 CROSSREF 1 Addresses 2 3 Unknown First the TREGSET commands make text register 1 equal to C TMP NAMES INI and text register 2 equal to 1235 Then the CROSSREF command looks in the Addresses section in the table specified by text register 1 C TMP NAMES INI and retrieves the value specified by text register 2 1235 and places it in text register 3 If the keyword 1235 the section Addresses or the file C TMP NAMES INI is not found Unknown will be placed in text register 3 CROSSWRITE Syntax CROSSWRITE FilePath SectionName KeyWord Data 222 Remarks Example This command will set the KeyWord that is found in the section SectionName and in the table specified by FilePath to be equal to the value in Data FilePath SectionName KeyWord and Data can be either a quoted string or text register number If FilePath SectionName or KeyWord are not found then each is created as needed If FilePath contains only a filename then it is assumed to exist in the current working directory The name SSYSDIR is the directory path for DiTranslator 8 on the system regardless of where DiTranslator 8 was installed For example SSYSDIR r
100. T T Curent Mercator Type Tree ype ree CAPROGRATSDICENT715DITRAN 15E data HS_AS 4 am4neo710 The Mercator Type Tree is used to integrate Trading Partner with Mercator This type tree can be used with Mercator to map to and from DARE Trading Partner Import and Export files 1 4 Exporting Files Using the Network Translator The DiTranslator 8 network translator utility merges the sort and interprets steps for EDI data coming in from all your trading partners on a single network The task processes the data to the file type of your choice for exporting to a host computer for subsequent processing The Network Translator utility must be installed at the network level See Network Translator Task Installation And Configuration in the Setting Up Your System chapter for instructions Once installed you must configure the Interpret Sorted Mail task at the network level as well as at the transaction set level For complete details about configuring these screens see the Interpret Sorted Mail Task Configuration and Network Translator Task Installation And Configuration sections in the Setting Up Your System chapter 170 File Type Sample Output File Location _CON C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator user MAIL IN CON T La C ProgramFiles DiCentral DiTranslator edata connection name MAI L IN EDI C ProgramFiles DiCentral DiTranslator edata connection name tra dingpartner name ansi 850 3010 MAIL IN REM TRN C
101. TR to write a numeric register value to your report that is right justified and blank filled and has decimal places REGPRINTR extracts the value from Regnum formats is according to length and decimal place and then prints it on the report The output data will have the number of characters specified in the Length parameter and the number of decimal places specified in the DecPlace parameter TX 0 0 1 Answer is REGSET 400 3 REGPRINTR 0 0 1 10 2 3 Using the above commands the following will print on the report Answer is 400 00 REGPRINTZ SkipBefore SkipAfter RptCol Length DecPlace Regnum Use REGPRINTZ to write a numeric register value to your report that is right justified and zero filled with decimal places REGPRINTZ extracts the value from Regnum formats it according to length and decimal place and then prints it to your report The output data will have Length number of characters with DecPlace decimal places TX OOo ky Answer ig 7 REGSET 400 3 REGPRINTZ 0 0 0 10 2 3 Using the above commands the following will print on the report Answer is 0000400 00 REGPRINTZNDP Syntax Remarks Example REGPRINTZNDP SkipBefore SkipAfter RptCol Length DecPlace Regnum Use REGPRINTZNDP to write a numeric register value to your report that is rounded to the nearest integer right justified and zero filled REGPRINTZNDP rounds the value from Regnum to the nearest integer formats it according to le
102. Translator 8 File Format or The Delimited File Format section in this chapter Copy the file to the following directory and file C ProgramFiles DiCentral DiTranslator Edata Network TradingPartner Standard Transactio n Set Version Filename Example Edata NS_AS2 3M Ansi 850 3010 MAIL_OUT RFM 2 4 Importing Data Using the Network Translator The DiTranslator 8 network translator allows you to run one validation task for EDI data going to all your trading partners on a single network The task passes the data to the file of your choice for downloading to DiTranslator 8 The Network Generator utility must be installed at the network 172 level See Network Generator Task Installation And Configuration in the Setting Up Your System chapter for installation instructions Once installed you must configure the Generate Mail task at the network level as well as the transaction set level For complete details about configuring these screens see the Generate EDI Mail From Translated Task Configuration and Network Generator Task Installation And Configuration sections in the Setting Up Your System chapter 1 Make sure the file has a DOS file structure 2 Format the file in a CON TRN or RFM format according to the instructions in the The DiTranslator 8 File Format or The Delimited File Format section later in this chapter 3 Copy the file if RFM or TRN to the following directory
103. Type the input file e g MAIL_IN TRN you want to use for this task Duplicate Records DiTranslator 8 distinguishes one transaction set from another in the Data Editor by forming a key for each posted transaction set The key can be a field of data such as a Purchase Order number depending on how DiTranslator 8 generates the key If you are posting a transaction set to the Data Editor whose key is a duplicate of another transaction set s key you can choose what DiTranslator 8 will do with the duplicate record Click Discard to reject new transaction set with duplicate key Click Append to duplicate with a unique number so that each duplicate file is unique and posted to the Data Editor Notes The changes you make to this task are valid only for the specific transaction set and partner identified at the beginning of the process 12 6 Putting Import File to Translated File Task Configuration When you are creating outbound data by importing data from another application the Put Import File to Translated File task creates a Translated file from the import data so the outbound EDI mail may be generated from it 1 In the Tree View expand the node for connection trading partner transaction whose tasks will be configured Expand the node for Outbound icon Right click on the Put Import File to Translated File icon and select Properties Select Configuration on the DiTranslator Setup window Dilranslator Setup
104. UM GAINS ACO Fo a E E nee venateecae ou 11 4 DiTranslator 8 Technical Support SErViCeS ccccceeseccceesecccceesececaesececeeecceeeeeecessuecessugeceesenseeetas 16 4 ADiMrans ator s User GUIGS cicsarcisicnessacrenned rE E 16 A2 POUCA tiOn ana MAMAS cecene EE E E E 17 A TEC CAME I 6 9 6 a A eee eee 17 Dy DiTranslator 8 OVEMMIOW eccicenesisasswecatwasgarosed E E SREE E E EEs 18 5 1 COMMON DITAN ltor e TENE serere an E N 18 AMEN ON a E E E E E 18 6 Tab View Description scesresene E A E TER 23 7 Common Processing TermS ssessessessessessessessessesseeserserssrsresresrrsresrrssroseorrorroseosessessessessesseesee 26 SBI IC OPETI IOS oee a a T E E E E E E E 26 Chapter I Electronic Data Mmterc hangt iisisiiasaiaanaa naiaiae aaan aiaiai Tg OMEN WN OTE D a E A en pet E E E A E NR 28 L EDITE MNOO E e E E ere renee ee eee eee eee 28 3 ANSI ASC X12 Interchange Control Structure eesssssssesssseesesreresrreresrrrssrreresereessreresererssrereserersseere 29 3 1 Reading an ISA LINE screena E EE 30 Wa c ALE ata ci tcc tae T E E A A ope ee 31 4 EDIFACT Interchange Control Structure cccccccssseccceseccccesececeesececeeneceeeeescceseuaeceseeneceeseeeeeenes 32 4 1 Reading the UNA and UNB LINES cccccceseccccessececeesececeeseceeceeeeceseusecessesecessuuceetsusecetsuneses 33 AZ Fee CU a ONG LINE opoed ocacceenassta cones ease panacevenessaansaaancesnannetemmnasucacosacumoatnecutac ned wasenasacacencseteaes 34
105. UR ADDRESS If the COMMID s anc PASSWORD are not usec ice will Look like this PARTNERS ADDRESS YOUR ADDRESS OO ENV CONTEO EA SERANO 0 ER CONTROL EX OO r r S SPECIAL 0 0 24 ENVDATE EX O Ok ee Or ay SRECI 0031 BNWT DME BAD Gree es Os Cea E EA TX 1 070 pve eel Oa we 7 TO ag Olav TX 1 0 0 START SET 810 VERSION 003010VICS GROUP IN TG le eee sModule Module is where you will enter the Trading Partners Module address and your Module address found within the Transaction Set configuration screen Xe les Ue Sear CONE rol SP EG AG Or Oko oh COn mor Oils JNO OO ae ene oa vere tana ares bes SPECIAL 0 0 14 GROUPCONTROL a OU Gam aera Tee ORO ie Geo kage PX 1 0707 a Ae ceo rr turnaround Gee oe SSC Sis MOINS Iie SI 0h GB IRGS SIS OTO ee ee easy 0001000001 Medea D 0001 10 6 Invoice Date DATEFORMAT YYMMDD SPECTAT OOF NDANE invoice Date Bicol BIGO2 A 0001 16 22 Invoice No UW ors Obs Oeil ages BIGO4 A OO0O0O1l 44 22 Pie tOk INO FD O70 pe eee 2 nw ge P O0 BEGO3 BIGO4 OOP 0 029 eG Oye 0006 ED OOo O02 8 a 6 la bE 2 NIOL C 0006 10 2 Entity Identifier Code Pa Oe Or ele OOo Oi LJIBBE 0 NO 2 NLOS C 0006 47 2 ID Code Qual ED 070 48 0029 4T 2r LJBE z0 p NLOS 2 NLOA C 0006 49 17 ID Code PD 0 0 50 0029 49 17 LJBE 0 N104 END OO Roca a a N Seg 0020 Vievel I ON Baseline Icem Data REGZERO 1 for IT1 Sequence N
106. User Network Configuration screen is displayed User Network Configurati Phone Humber Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Cancel 52 3 Use the following table to assist you in completing this screen To save your work click the OK button Phone Number Type the phone number used to access the network Enter the phone number without any dashes If your long distance carrier requires you to enter a 1 when dialing outside your area code type a 1 and then the area code and phone number without spaces If you are not using a direct phone line enter your access code using a comma to separate the access number and the phone number Parameters 1 5 Type in any other parameters needed to enter the particular network such as log in name password etc These parameters will be written out to a file called Acontrol TMP in the system data network Edata Network directory The Network Wizard is redisplayed After you have entered configuration information for your network you will see a check mark next to the Configuration button meaning that your network is ready for use 4 Adding a Trading Partner to Your System There are two methods for adding a trading partner to your system See any of these sections for instructions Add a trading partner using pre configured Trading Partner Kit Create a custom trading partner At any time during the installation pr
107. Warning Message Reference Mail present in input file for unknown module Invalid module definition in START wrapper 260 Appendix H Defining the Reformatted File Format The Put Translated to Export File task outputs to an RFM file You can define the format of the RFM file by editing the transaction set database map By editing the database map you can turn off records and fields within the reformat file change field lengths and character justification Changing the RFM file will affect how the output file will appear for the Put Translated to Export File task In addition the defined format will appear in any task such as the Put Import File to Translated File task that uses the resulting RFM file as input oe a Database Map In the Tree View tab select network trading partner and transaction whose map you would like to modify 2 Click the desired transaction set icon with the right mouse button and choose Properties Select Database Map button in the DiTranslator Setup window The Database Map window is displayed Database Map i Custom M Curent Active Database Map u om Map CAAPROGRATDICENT TDITRANTEdatasNs As 2 am ansise10 Edit The database map dictates how data will be stored in the Trading Partner Database and in tum what Helde will be displayed in the Data Editor Delete 4 Click the appropriate button for the database map If you are creating the database map for the first time click the Cre
108. ach transaction set If acknowledgments are disabled in this screen then no acknowledgments will be sent to any partner within this particular network Filter Input Data When the Filter Input Data checkbox is selected the translator will prior to any other operation filter the data by identifying any envelopes and placing a NL new line character in front of each replacing all segment terminators with lt CRLF gt and unwrapping any wrapped data Enable Sort to Mail_in TP Enter a check if you want DiTranslator 8 to create the Mail_In TP file in each edata network partner directory containing all the transaction sets for that trading partner Acceptance Level Type an integer between 0 and 20 to set the Acceptance Level for this task The default is 20 The Acceptance Level specifies how DiTranslator 8 marks data in the translated file Data is marked accept if the data has no associated error and it has an associated warning whose severity number is equal to or higher than the number you enter for Acceptance Level Otherwise the data is marked reject Data marked reject cannot be posted to the Data Editor or reformatted For example if the Acceptance Level is set to 0 all data will be accepted 96 Ifthe Acceptance Level is set to 10 data associated with a Warning Severity number of 10 and below will be rejected Data with an associated warning severity number of 6 will not be posted to the Data E
109. ader stored in this transaction set s configuration screen See Configuring A Transaction Set in this chapter for details Clear the check if you want the system to increment the Common Outbound Group Control of the Functional Group Header stored in this trading partner s configuration See Configuring A Trading Partner in this chapter for details Use Set Control s from Input File select the checkbox if you want DiTranslator to use the transaction set control numbers from the task s input file Use All Control s from Input File If this option is chosen the following occurs The outbound control number contained on the Env Control line of the EDI flat file will be used for the ISA and IEA interchange control numbers ISA13 and IEAQ2 ISA control numbers for the Functional Acknowledgments generated by DiTranslator will continue to use the internally generated control numbers The outbound control number contained on the Grp Control line of the EDI flat file will be used for the GS and GE group control numbers GSO6 and GEO2 The outbound control number contained on the Set Control line of the EDI flat file will be used for the ST and SE transaction set control numbers STO2 and SEO2 Choosing Use Set Control s from Input File causes this to occur as well Input from RFM File select the checkbox if you want to use the reformatted file as input for this task Deselect the checkbox if you want to use
110. ading partner A single database file can contain data for multiple transaction sets or messages of the same type i e you may enter multiple invoices for this partner into a single file Enter your data into the document Enter one segment of data at a time Use the TAB key to move down through fields and SHIFT TAB to move up through fields When you have finished entering data for a segment press Enter to save the data just entered and to go on to the next segment See the Using the Data Editor Menu Commands section in this chapter for details about available commands When you have finished entering data use the Reformat command in the Edit menu to write the document to an output file that will be sent to your partner See the Reformat Edit command in the Using the Data Editor Menu Commands section for details Then choose Exit from the File menu to save your document and exit the Data Editor Continue with the outbound process See the Outbound Processing section later in this chapter to assist you B Using the Data Editor Menu Commands The Data Editor File Edit View and Help menu commands allow you to Enable or disable the Status Bar and Toolbar Set options View control information Create and use templates using the Open and Save As commands in the File menu Access online help Move through data Edit data Save your work Delete documents Prepare outbound data to be sent Exit the Data Editor See the fo
111. ages While a task is running if the system detects data errors from the lists below the system first compares the severity number to the task s Warning Level and determines whether to invoke a Message box 257 Atask s Warning Level is set in the task s Configuration window To change a tasks Warning Level click the task icon with the right mouse button and choose Properties The Generate Mail Interpret Mail Sort Host File and Sort Mail tasks are all tasks that are responsible for data compliance They are the only tasks that can issue a Warning Message box Generate Mail and Interpret Mail Warning Message and Severity Number Warning Message Reference 2 48 Cannot locate non nested loop trigger segment per map spec 2 549 Cannot locate loop trigger segment at specified nest level 2 fle No data to generate transaction set y O pay py pay m e y N 417 Generated transaction set s not appended due to errors in input data 258 13058 Data stream exceeded 512 character limit Will truncate 13004 Too many digits exist in the numeric field 14 08 Invalid data detected Sort Mail Warning Messages and Severity Numbers Warning Warning Message Reference 1 273 Mail present in input transmission from unknown trading partner UW D U9 y WW 259 6 pu GS GE segment control number mismatch Sort Host File Warning Messages and Severity Numbers
112. al to another value If the value in the register specified by Regnum is not equal to the value of the quoted string Test value the commands between IFRNE and ENDIF are executed Example REGSET 20 3 IFRNE 3 25 TX U 0 dy Quantity not equal to 25 ENDIF The TX command will execute because register 3 is not equal to 25 IFRNER amp ENDIF Syntax IFRNER Regnum1 Regnum2 other commands ENDIF Remarks Use IFRNER to execute other commands if two register values are not equal If the value in the register specified by Regnum1 is not equal to the value in the register specified by Regnum2 the commands between IFREQR and ENDIF are executed Example REGSET 2 5 REGSET 1 6 REGSET 2 7 IFRNER 5 6 REGADD 7 5 ENDIF The REGADD command will be executed because the value in register 5 is not equal to the value in register 6 IFTREQ amp ENDIF Syntax IFTREQ Tregnum Text value other commands ENDIF Remarks Use IFTREQ to execute other commands based on a text register value If the value in the text register specified by Tregnum is equal to the value of the quoted string Text value the commands between IFTREQ and ENDIF are executed Example TREGSET This is a test 3 TFPTREQ 3 This 19 a test TX 0 0 1 The TX command 15 executed ENDIF The TX command is executed because text register 3 is equal to This is a test 230 IFTREQTR Syntax IFTREQTR Tregnum1 Tregnum2 other commands E
113. al to LinesToEnd and LinesToEnd is greater than zero a page break is generated PAGE 5 This would generate a page break at execution time if the number of lines to the end of the current page is 0 1 2 3 40r 5 REGADD Regnum1 Regnum2 Use REGADD to add two register values The value in register Regnum1 is added to the value in register Regnum2 and the result is stored in register Regnum2 REGSET 100 1 REGSET 2Z00 5 REGADD 5 1 These commands will give you a value of 300 stored in register 1 REGCOPY Regnum1 Regnum2 Use REGCOPY to copy the value of one register to another register REGCOPY stores the value of Regnum1 in Regnum2 233 Example REGSET 300 1 REGCOPY 1 2 These commands will give you a value 300 stored in register 2 REGDIV Syntax REGDIV Regnum1 Regnum2 Remarks Use REGDIV to divide the value of one register by the value in another register REGDIV divides the value of Regnum2 by the value of Regnum1 and stores the result in Regnum2 If the value of Regnum1 is zero the value of Regnumz2 is set zero Example REGSET 20 4 REGSET 100 5 REGDIV 4 5 These commands will give you a value of 5 stored in register 5 REGMPY Syntax REGMPY Regnum1 Regnum2 Remarks Use REGMPY to multiply the value of one register by the value in another register REGMPY multiplies the value of Regnum1 by the value of Regnum2 and stores the result in Regnum2 Example REGSET 20 4 REGSELT 100 5 REGMPY 4 5 These comma
114. along with other inbound documents can be done with the Consolidate the Export File task The Consolidate the Export File task appends each new export RFM file to a common consolidated file called the Export Consolidated File which may be further processed by another of your PC or mainframe applications The Export Consolidated File icon represents this file 1 2 Steps to Receive and Process EDI Data You can perform all the procedures described in this section with any inbound transaction set Steps for inbound processing include Receive EDI mail Sort EDI mail Interpret EDI mail Generate an inbound report Exporting data 1 2 1 Receive EDI Mail Receiving EDI mail is the first inbound processing task Different networks have different communication task names The names for the tasks described below may differ from those that appear in your network window 1 2 In the Tree View expand the network node Double click the Receive Mail icon 130 Process Inbound Data Process Outbound Data 60 Send And Receive B Send Mail Send Receive And Sort Sort Mail User Tracked Task A Status NEW file is created for each asynchronous communication For bisynchronous communications new information is appended to the existing Status NEW file This file contains accumulated communication network statistics from all network related tasks which you can use as a record of your work To free up hard disk space you shoul
115. and select Properties 2 Select the Configuration on the DiTranslator Setup window 111 Wi Networks Trading Partners Transaction Sets Tasks Task Lists Data Files System Management User Tracked Task C Program Files DICentral DiTranslator Edata NS_AY rr S User Tracked Task Task ld 332 UniquelD 1174405267 The Task Wizard is displayed the appropriate task configuration tab for your configuration options For additional information about the task click the Details tab Task Wizard Tracked Task Configuration Details Command Line i Treat exit codes at or above this value as an emor Zero disables checking 3 Change the configuration setting as desired To save the settings click the OK button 112 Meaning of Settings Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings Command Line Enter the full command line to use in the WinExec call windows which will start the non SYSTEM program The command line must include the program file name or full path and any arguments the program needs to have passed to it If a program file name is entered without a path the system will assume it is located in the Code directory where your DiTranslator 8 program files are installed Browse Click the Browse button to find the exact path and file name of the file you would like the task to execute Edit Click the Edit button to edit the file used to execute the t
116. ansaction set and where each piece of EDI information can be found in the flat file The following is part of the XRF file for an 850 Purchase Order version 003040 Seg 0044 Level 1 POl1 Baseline Item Data Name Type seg Off Len 0044 0044 Assigned ID 0044 Quantity Ordered 0044 Unit or Basis for Measurement Code 0044 Unit Price 0044 Basis of Unit Price Code 0044 Product Service ID Qualifier 0044 Product Service ID 0044 Product Service ID Qualifier 0044 Product Service ID S A N N C T A G A The above data describes the flat file record of the PO1 segment specifically the Baseline Item Data in a Purchase Order The PO102 is the second element in the PO1 segment This is the Quantity Ordered for this item The numbers across the PO102 line are useful in making a Report Writer map The segment Seg offset Off and length Len are used in many of the Report Writer commands 217 4 2 Report Writer Rules Report Writer commands make up the maps defining the output layout and content of your reports and must follow these rules Each Report Writer command is specified as a command name followed by a set of arguments all of which are mandatory The command name and arguments are separated by commas For example TX 0 0 0 Text Command names are case sensitive and must be keyed using all capital letters Each command must appear on one line and each new command starts on a different line T
117. anslator Setup Name My Trading Partner Part EDI Standard X12 ISA IEA iad Network INS AS Configuration Auto Configuration Cae ae Tasks and Transaction Sets Data fiez V ltem is configured tem is not configured Trading Partners cannot be used until configured UniquelD 671088643 Modify the trading partner name in the Trading Partner Name box as needed 3 The EDI Standard dropdown list may be changed here only if you are using the ASC X12 standard which gives you the choice of using the ISA IEA BG EG or ICS ICE envelope 4 Click the Configuration button The screen that follows differs depending on the EDI standard being used One of the following screens is displayed 61 The X12 ISA IEA Envelope Configuration screen which has the Basic Advanced Separators and Terminator and Auto Configure tabs The Basic tab is active The X12 BG EG Envelope Configuration screen which has the Basic Other and Auto Configure tabs The Basic tab is active The X12 ICS ICE Envelope Configuration screen which has the Basic Other and Auto Configure tabs The Basic tab is active The EDIFACT Envelope Configuration screen which has the Basic Advanced Control Characters and Auto Configure tabs The Basic tab is active The TRADACOMS Envelope Configuration screen which has the STX Details Other and Auto Configure tabs The STX Details tab is active 5 Complete the Basic screen by tabbing from fiel
118. ap Length box enter a value to determine the location at which to insert a new line If this value is 81 every eighty first character will be a new line If the value is 0 no new lines will be inserted The Acknowledgment Version field is only used to override the default version for X12 and determine version and release used for EDIFACT CONTRL messages generated for acknowledgments Only 1 or 2 should be entered for EDIFACT The DoD Type field determines the type of Acknowledgement changes that are generated for DoD acceptance 92 Output File Click one of the output file buttons to choose the type of output file for this task The default setting is TRN translated file Other choices are RFM reformatted file CON consolidated file EDI sorted EDI file suitable for input to a Mercator mapper task and NONE to produce no output file which assumes you will be uploading the raw EDI file received from your partner Notes The changes you make to this task are valid only for the specific transaction set and partner identified at the beginning of the process 12 4 Network Generator Task Installation and Configuration DiTranslator 8 offers an optional feature called the Network Level Translator This feature is designed for those of you who want to use DiTranslator 8 as a front end EDI processor To use this feature you must install the translator at the network level as opposed to the transaction set level that is stand
119. applications including the Microsoft Office Shortcut Bar before restarting your computer At any time during the update process you may click the Back button to display the previous screen or the Cancel button to stop the update To exit installation you must click the Exit button on the Install screen after you click the Cancel button 1 Double click the setup exe file The Welcome window is displayed 2 Select the type of installation you would prefer and click the Next button e Typical will install all of the DiTranslator 8 files including the on line help files and documentation files Typical is recommended for most users e Compact will install all of the DiTranslator 8 files except for the documentation files Appropriate files are then copied to your system 3 When the Setup Complete screen is displayed click the Finish button to complete the installation If you would like to review the Release Notes select the View Release Notes checkbox 4 You may start DiTranslator 8 by clicking the Start gt All Programs gt DiCentral gt DiTranslator 16 2 Updating Network Mailbox If you have received an update for a network perform the following procedure At any time during the installation process you may click the Back button to display the previous screen or the Cancel button to stop the installation 1 Inthe Tree View select the network you would like to update 124 2 Perform either option below to update networ
120. ard in DiTranslator 8 This allows you to run one validation task for EDI data going to all your trading partners on a single network The task passes the data to the file of your choice for downloading to DiTranslator 8 12 4 1 Installation If you do not already have the Network Generator task icon in your network window use the following installation instructions 1 Inthe Tree View select New from the File menu or right click in a blank area on the left hand side and select New 2 Select Tasks tab select the Network you would like to add the task select New button 3 Inthe Task Wizard window click the Create a Custom Task option button and click the Next button 4 In the Task Type box select Network Generator and click the Next button Task Wizard Select the type of User Un Tracked Task Task that you Mercator Task wish to create Communications Task File Utility Task Segment Teminator Task Send Email Task Unite Task Network Generator I Netwende Tranelatnar 5 When the system is done adding the task the configuration options for this task are displayed See step 5 in the following Network Generator Task Configuration section for assistance with configuring the task 6 Once done the Network Generator task icon will be displayed under the Network level My Trading Partner i 4 Network Generator Frocess Inbound Data Frocess Outbound Data Sort Mail J Mail Out Ready T New Mail
121. argument will be 374 If the code file does not exist the code value itself will simply be printed in the report If the code does exist in the code file the text to the right of the colon will be substituted in the report For example Date Time Qualifier 063 or Date Time Qualifier Do Not Deliver After Note If you wish to map EDI envelope fields in your custom report you must activate the Use Envelope as Data option in the Interpret Sorted Mail task on Properties screen See the Setting Up Your System chapter for details 202 2 2 Sample Custom Report Map for 850 Version 4010 Kroger Kroger PO Report 850 4010 For 03 25 2009 Pg 1 EDI Control Nos 000000217 27 0001 Purpose Original PO Number 5639100101 Type New Order PO Date 05 11 2004 Date Time Ref Delivery Requested 05 12 2004 Ref No Supplier OSKVENDOR Name Vendor NAME D U N S 4 DUNS No w Four Char Su 1234567891234 Bill to Party QUALITY FOOD CENTER D U N S 4 DUNS No w Four Char Su 0079088090000 NE 2001 STATE ROUTE 300 P BELFAIR WA98528 Ship To QFC DSD D U N S 4 DUNS No w Four Char Su 1234567891234 Store QUALITY FOOD CENTER Assigned by Buyer or Buyer s Agent 70500101 NE 2001 STATE ROUTE 300 P BELFAIR WA98528 QUANTITY UOM UPC EAN Case Code 2 5 5 Purchaser s Item Code 1 Case 040000012345 12345 UPC EAN Consumer Package Code 040000012345 Product Item Description Description TISSUE 2 PLY Item Physical Deta
122. ars in the System Wide Data Files window 1 2 Exporting a Transaction Set File You can use either the transaction set translated Mail_in TRN file or the export Mail_in RFM file for exporting data A translated file is transaction set data the system translated from a standard such as ANSI ASC X12 format An export file is transaction set data the system reformatted according to the transaction set s database map A transaction set database map determines which segments will appear and how they will appear in the file 167 To place mail in a translated file After mail is received and sorted run the Interpret Sorted Mail task The Interpret Sorted Mail task outputs a translated mail_in TRN file To place mail in an export file Use the Put Translated to Export File task to reformat a translated file Transaction Set File Location FileName Directory Location MAIL _OUT RFM C ProgramFiles DiCentral DiTranslator Edata netwo rk_name tradingpartner_name ansi transaction set version file name Translated MAIL_OUT TRN WwersionMl Example edata NS_AS2 3M ansi 850 3010 MAIL_OUT TRN 1 3 Exporting Files Using the Mercator Tree Utility The Mercator Tree Utility allows you to create Mercator inbound and outbound type trees based on your TRN file This will simplify your DiTranslator 8 and Mercator integration For more information on integration refer to the Mercator and DiTranslator 8 Integration Guide To create a
123. ask If the file is an exe or com file the Edit button will not be available Notes The changes you make to this task are valid only for this individual task If you want all your Mercator and other user tracked tasks configured in the same way you must set options for each individually 13 1 Installation To add a new data file to your DiTranslator 8 system use the following instructions 1 Select New from the File menu or select L icon on the toolbar Select New button in the Data Files tab The File Wizard is displayed 3 Click the Create a Custom File option button and click the Next button 4 Enter a name for the data file name that will display beneath the new file icon in the Display Name box Then enter a name for the DOS file associated with this icon in the File Name box 113 File Wizard Select the type of File that you wish to create 5 Select Data File in the File Types box and click the Next button The Data File Configuration screen is displayed 6 See step 3 in the next section for instructions for completing this screen Otherwise click Finish to exit You will see the new data file icon when you return to the Tree View tab la System Wide Data Files 1 Sort Host Data File Export consolidated file T Import hostsort file T Sorted Mail Translated Mail Unknown hostsort file E Sample Files 13 2 Configuration All data files are displayed on the right half of the window and ar
124. ate button and then click the Edit button 261 Editing the Reformatted File Format l l Reformat Record Switch Record Line Indicator Retormat Attrihites 2 Terms of Sale Deferded Terms ofSale 1 1 5 of Sale Deterrad Terms ofSale Seq 6 1 1 Type Code LJBF 2 336 1 1 Basis Date Cod e LJBF 2 333 1 1 Discount Parcent LJBF 6 33565 1 1 Discount Due Date LJIBF 6 370 1 1 Justification Reformat Field Switch Reformat Field Length Field Line Indicator Turning off a Record The Reformat Record Switch determines if the record is inclined in ahe romana REM file The following are the switch values O This record is turned off and will not appear in the reformatted file This record is turned on and will appear in the reformatted file The record is turned on and will appear in the reformatted file and data report Turning off a Field The Reformat Field Switch detennines if the field i is sincluded i in nihe relormatied n RFM file The following are the switch values This field is turned off and will not appear in the reformatted file This field is turned on and will appear in the reformatted file Note In order for this field to be on the Reformat Record Switch associated with this field must be set to 1 The record is turned on and will appear in the reformatted file and data report Note In order for this field to be on the Reformat Record Switch associated with this f
125. ations Maximize To enlarge a window to its maximum size Menu A list of related items usually commands Minimize To reduce a window to an icon Modem A device for transmitting data from computer to computer over a telephone line Multi Tasking Running two or more applications at once Network Connection Software that allows you to communicate with a VAN or communications network Network mailbox An object at the Main window that opens to the Network window The Network window leads to tasks and files that relate to a specific network Outbound Outgoing Refers to EDI mail you are sending Path name Indicates your location within the system See Selection path Priority Level A number associated with an item that determines access to that item Read Me File A file that contains updated or important product documentation or information Scroll Bars Located on the right hand side of a given window a Scroll bar allows you to scroll through the window Segment A collection of related data elements For example a Name segment is a collection of elements related to a company name Select To highlight an object by clicking on it once with the mouse or with a key combination Selecting does not initiate an action Selection Path Displays your location within the system in the title bar The selection path reflects the path within the system which you have gone through to reach a given location Session The t
126. aused by data that doesn t comply with either the EDI standard or DiTranslator 8 data requirements Data errors occur during interpreting or sorting mail Data errors are recorded in the Audit Log For details about the Audit Log see the Audit Log Viewer section of the Daily Processing chapter The system can respond to data errors by displaying a Message box or stamping data containing data errors as rejected By setting a task s Warning Level the system can invoke a warning message alerting you to the data error By setting a task s Acceptance Level the system can stamp data in the DiTranslator 8 TRN and RFM files as rejected or accepted There are 20 different severity numbers for data errors For an explanation of each severity numbers refer to the following Data Error Severity Numbers table Low numbers indicate severe data errors and higher numbers indicate less severe data errors Data Error Severity Numbers Category Severity Number Bad Relation Definition Warning No Mail to Generate Warning Set Control Number Warning Set Segment Count Warning Unknown Segment Warning Required Segment Missing Segment Sequence Warning Max Segment Count Warning Max Loop Count Warning Required Field Missing Relational Validation Failed Too Many Fields Warning Field Too Short Warning Field Too Long Warning Invalid Data Warning Reserved for future expansion 15 to 20 Data Errors and Warning Mess
127. ays your configuration options with the default settings in place Task Wizard Report Writer Task Configuration Details Report Writer Map Unique Print Utility Specific Reports E Eaa File Active Test Accept Lines Fage 0 for no page break 55 Definition File Name DPSCINV RPT Input File Name Mail ot TRN Repot Name ldpscinv pt o C e For additional information about the task click the Details tab The Report Writer Map tab allows you to edit the report map for customizing the report format see Creating Custom Reports in the Custom Data Entry Screens Reports And Document Turn Around chapter for complete instructions 4 Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings in the Report Writer Task Configuration tab Auto Print select the checkbox to instruct the system to automatically print the report once the report has been generated Archive Input File select the checkbox if you want the report to automatically archive the input file that is used to generate the report the TRN or RFM file Inbound Report select the checkbox if the report is generated by inbound mail Unique Print Utility Change the Unique Print Utility settings if you are using a special print utility for this report Select the Active checkbox to enable a print utility In the Name text box type the print utility executable file name 83 Specific Reports Click one o
128. be an ASCII string such as QQQQQ The delimited record format should be in a format similar to the following 0001 0000001 S01 970622 51234567S01 Where 0001 segment number 000001 sequence number any 6 digit number is acceptable 01 first element of the data for the segment 970622 second element of the data for the segment 1234567 third element of the data for the segment 180 01 fourth element of the data for the segment If the file is populated in the directory of the transaction set that is C Program Files DICentral DiTranslator Edata NS_AS2 TradingPartner Ansi 850 3060 Mail_out rfm then none of the other lines of information with semicolons need to appear The semicolon lines are used in the hostsort process for files that have many transaction sets trading partners in it and need to be sorted Example Mail_out rfm import files follow Delimiter dBASE E O g OOO Oa FP Os RE i a A A T E aes OOo EOOOA Ys OOOO ET eM 6S DODO OO OOOO Oo OOO 9 OOOO 56 5 0 2 EAA y EB soo 6 ou pe CP MAY 666666 666660 ET 200923 VOO4S 00000 ESITT OSSZ nnan 00675000001 5656S5122SEBS88 9B 9SCPSAYS 6666666666665FT 181 Chapter Vil Automating Ditransiator 8 Task Lists and the Scheduler are the two tools used to automate your DiTranslator 8 system By using these tools your EDI data can be processed without an operator present This chapter includes the following topics Task Lists Using Unatte
129. ch individual Message Configuration screen Messages installed after this is executed will not take on these values Standard ID Enter the Interchange Control Standards Identifier ISA11 for ISA or ICS03 for ICS used by your trading partner For example U for ASC X12 TDCC and UCS Standard Version Enter the Interchange Control Version Number ISA12 for ISA or ICS04 for ICS used for this partner For example 00302 Syntax ID Enter the Syntax Indentifier to identify the agency responsible for the syntax used and the level of the syntax in the interchange When using EDIFACT the value in this field will be placed in UNBO101 for TRADACOMS it will be placed in the STX field STDS Syntax Version Enter the syntax version to identify the agency controlling the syntax and syntax version When using EDIFACT the value in this field will be placed in UNBO102 for TRADACOMS it will be placed in the STX field STDS Terminator In the View As box click the Down arrow to select the format in which you will enter up to 3 segment terminators Separated by spaces and then enter the characters For example select Decimal in the View As box and enter 13 10 0 in the box to the left for a lt CR gt lt LF gt A value of 0 zero entered for the first or second terminators will result in the default values being used A value of O zero entered for the third terminator will stop a third terminator from being sent The default va
130. codes used to identify your partner This value is placed in the UNGO202 or UNGO302 field depending on whether your partner is sending or receiving 9 Deleting a Transaction Set _ L You may install transaction sets at the end of trading partner configuration in this case continue with Step 2 or at any other time by right clicking on the desired trading partner icon in the Trading Partners window and selecting Properties The DiTranslator Setup is displayed 76 810 Ver3010 850 Ver3010 Data Path C PROGRA 1 DICENT 1 DITRAN 1 Edata NS_A 397 VerALL Ta 3M 4010 m 4 gt Costco lt gt My Trading Partner Select Transaction Sets tab Select Trading Partner 3M expand the list by clicking sign Select the transaction set you would like to delete then click the Delete button a aE a Click the OK button to delete the selected transaction set Click the Cancel button to return to the Transaction Set window without deleting the selected transaction set Dilranslator Wizard WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING You are about to permanently remove object 610 Ver3010 from the system To continue with the removal of this object select OK If you only intended to purge this object s contents select CANCEL 77 10 Customizing Data Element Codes If your trading partner has special EDI field or data elemen
131. cording to the information you recorded 10 After making changes click the OK button and then click the OK button again Next perform the following steps to delete the data from the Unknown Documents file and recover the New Mail In data 246 In the Tree View tab in the desired network level double click the Unknown Documents icon Right click on the Unknown Documents file and select Purge Data Right click on the New Mail In icon and select Unarchive The UnArchive window is displayed Select the desired file and click UnArchive For detailed instructions on unarchiving files see Archiving And Unarchiving Files in the Daily Processing chapter for details 247 Appendix A ASCII Chart NUL SP s s o o 7 o m a gt pa s s o Jo a s o lt 2 os a 248 Appendix B System Defaults system Settings 3 Transaction Sets ___ Functional Group Header Functional Group information for that standard For example ANSI ASC X12 GS GE Defaults on a per transaction set basis Functional ID Agency Code Version Transaction Set ID Document Standard 249 Appendix C DiTranslator 8 Tasks Consolidate the Export File _ Write Status Message On Archive File On Data Report Auto Print Off Map Name Set to current transaction set or message DBM name Active Name No setting Generate EDI Mail from Translated Write Status Message Om Space Co
132. csssccccessececceecccceusececeueceseeeceeseneecessuecetseneess 103 12 9 Sorting Mail Task Configuratio avccasscasnvasicccsaansudnsnandecsdsiaceesosethodehstoceawanendaaebetedsanwaiedaaanoseensas 105 12 10 Communication Task Installation and Configuration esssssssesesseesesrerssrrrrssrrresrrererrrresene 107 12 11 Mercator Mapper and Tracked Task Installation and Configuration ccccccesseceeeeeeees 109 PSST ccc cc ccc ceccccceccesceeneensenenesnssnsensetententnseneenseneee 113 TL LSTA lat ONY E A AA 113 ils PS Onea 1 0 9 Renee ee eRe tee E BP ron are ee Bere nee eee 114 TA Adding SION CCUG secernitur ean ne a EE 116 RE SAU AE aa E E E E E E E 116 14 2 M intaining a SOL CCUG reena N 117 14 Creatine a Folder seisseen EE AA 118 14 4 Running a Shortcut Outside of DiTranslator 8 ssssssssseesssrrrserrererrrrrsrrrresrrresrrererrrressne 119 ihe ae Y ga S E AINEENA E Erne A A E E N A N EEEE eee A ETT 119 15 1Accessing the User VIEW gene eee en inna 119 152 Creating a GOUD sscenncointecnceuoenucnntevaucinaersucarhisisersdnssceuniasdnki sip eanchabiseteaseuaieieedseutinieonteinatoneds 120 ieg ae EEE e S E AE AAE A N AEE E AT A 121 CAME a U Er PO ee A E E E AER 122 15 9 Editing a User Profile secre teat dereosnevondaiarsecaslecemoed a eat EEE EN 123 SMSO CAE SDI aS FARO FG ear EA 124 16 1 Updating DiTrainsiator B ements etre enc a 124 16 2 Updating Network Mailbox cccccccessccccesseccccenecceeeesececseececeeescceseeeceseunece
133. cument F 204 Ver4010 Interpret Sorted Mail 210 Ver4010 gt Process Inbound Data 810 Ver3010 Put Translated to Export File 810 Ver40i0 Convert PO to INVOICE 820 Ver4010 824 Ver4010 Raw Data Report Export File J Sorted Mail 850 Ver4010 T Translated Mail 857 Ver4010 2 Unknown Translated File E eli EE 3 To print the report right click on the report icon e g P O Report icon and select Print 4 Toview the report double click the report icon The report is displayed in Microsoft Notepad Notes If you want your system to automatically print a report after generating it see the Configuring Raw Data Reports or Configuring Hub Reports sections in the Setting Up Your System chapter for instructions 1 2 5 Exporting Data This step is only for those of you who are exporting data you have received from your partner to an application outside of DiTranslator 8 133 1 To convert the Translated Mail file to an export file that can be used in an application outside of DiTranslator 8 double click the Put Translated to Export File icon F 204 Ver4010 interpret Sorted Mail 210 Ver4010 Process Inbound Data 810 Ver3010 SS Put Translated to Export File 810 Ver4010 Convert PO to INVOICE 820 Ver4010 P O Report 824 Verd010 Raw Data Report 850 Ver3010 T Export File Ae Ta Sorted Mail 850 Verd010 Translated Mail cel E 959 Verdi EG Unknown Translated File
134. d In addition the list will also include all inbound transaction sets you have received via any network from any partner whether you have acknowledged these documents and if so the acknowledgment status This function is detailed in this chapter in the next section Functional Acknowledgment Reconciliation The Task Queue In order for a task or Task List to execute it must first be placed in the task queue By double clicking on a task or Task List icon you are automatically placing it in the queue You can view the task queue to monitor the status of the selected tasks that are running This function is described later in this chapter in the The Task Queue section Audit Log Viewer The Audit Log Viewer displays a list of all the task execution warnings that occurred in the last attended or unattended session This function is described later in this chapter in the Audit Log Viewer section Archiving and Unarchiving Files You may need at some point to backup archive and or restore unarchive any of your data files This function is described later in this chapter in the Archiving And Unarchiving Files section 4 1 Functional Acknowledgment Reconciliation The Functional Acknowledgment Reconciliation feature enables you to easily determine whether your trading partner s have acknowledged the documents you ve sent and if so whether they were accepted accepted with errors or rejected and also the inbou
135. d delete Status NEW about once a week To delete the file click the Status NEW icon and choose Purge Data from the File menu 3 When you have received mail the New Mail In flag is in the up position If you want to view your EDI mail before processing it double click the New Mail In icon ela System Wide Data Files System Wide Tasks H cat test S NS_AS2 H a m Process Inbound Data Process Outbound Data send Mail Send Receive And Sort 1 Sort Mail Mail Out Ready New Mail In Status NEW 4 Ifyou have mail to process continue with the next step Sort EDI Mail 1 2 2 Sort EDI Mail 131 After you receive your EDI mail you need to sort the mail The Sort Mail task sorts the EDI mail by trading partner and transaction set You must complete this task in order to interpret and validate the transaction sets The New Mail In file will empty when the sorting is complete 1 Inthe Tree View double click the Sort Mail icon to initiate the sorting process 2 Thenext step after sorting is interpreting the mail continue with the next step Interpret EDI Mail 1 2 3 Interpret EDI Mail The next step after sorting is interpreting the mail The Interpret Sorted Mail task translates EDI mail into a format the system can understand and validates the EDI data Interpreting also automatically generates a Functional Acknowledgment Later in the outbound process you will send the Functional Acknowledgment to your partner
136. d the data contained in your mailbox The VAN will then send the EDI purchase orders from your mailbox in the VAN to your computer Note that your trading partner is not directly involved in the communications session between your computer and the VAN There are a number of questions that might arise at this point First How do know if there is mail in my mailbox before call The answer is you don t know Some VANSs provide mailbox contents 38 reports that you receive via a separate communications session Normally you simply check your mailbox at various points in time If you call the VAN and there is no mail in your mailbox the VAN will send a no mail indicator during the communications session and DiTranslator will report the no mail status to you You can configure DiTranslator to periodically call the VAN to check for mail while you are away from the computer See Chapter 7 Automating DiTranslator for details Another question that might arise is Will my mailbox only contain data from one trading partner If you are only dealing with one trading partner on the VAN your mailbox will contain only mail from that one trading partner If you are dealing with multiple trading partners on the VAN your mailbox may contain mail sent by one or more trading partners Remember that when you are dealing with a VAN your computer doesn t connect to your trading partner s computer So far we have considered t
137. d to field and using the following table for help with each individual field Then click the Next tab and enter the needed information and so on until you have entered information in each tab The information must be alphanumeric and must be in all capital letters Make sure you do not enter extra characters including trailing soaces entered with the Space Bar 6 To save these settings click the OK button The Trading Partner Wizard is redisplayed and you will see a green check mark il beside the trading partner name 7 If you added this partner using the Create a Custom Partner option you must install the transaction sets you will trade with this partner See the Adding A Transaction Set For Your Partner section for instructions If you added this partner using a DiTranslator Kit disk and you want to further configure your transaction sets see the Configuring A Transaction Set section in this chapter for instructions Meaning of the fields The following table includes fields for all envelope types and is in alphabetical order Reference only the fields you need The configuration information you enter applies only to the partner named in this configuration screen Control Numbers ISA13 ICS11 and BGO7 Exercise caution in changing this control setting Make sure you consult your trading partner since they use these numbers to track your transmissions Inbound The first time you receive a transmission from this
138. dard Then the seller may initiate an EDI Invoice to the buyer and perhaps the buyer will respond by acknowledging the Invoice and paying for the items with an EDI Payment Order Remittance Advice 2 EDI Terminology Interchange A group of data consisting of three components an Interchange Control 28 Header a series of functional groups and an Interchange Control Trailer The Interchange Control Header and Interchange Control Trailer enclose the series of functional groups An interchange can be thought of as a large envelope from your trading partner Inside that envelope are individual smaller EDI mail envelopes Transaction Set and The terms transaction set and message mean essentially the same thing Message The differences are found in the details of their structure Both transaction sets and messages can be defined as follows a collection of business related data called segments that is exchanged between two trading partners Each segment in a collection is followed by a segment terminator Segment A segment is a collection of elements that has a segment identifier followed by one or more data elements Between each data element is a data element separator Segment Identifier A code that uniquely identifies a segment as specified in the appropriate ANSI ASC X12 segment directory For example the ANSI ASC X12 Invoice Name and segment identifier is N1 Segment Tag Segment Identifiers are also used in EDIFACT An E
139. data element subgroups and then enter the character For example select ASCII in the View As box and enter a colon in the box to the left The value in this field will be placed in UNAO1 See the ASCII Chart appendix for a chart of ASCII decimal codes Separators ISA and ICS Element In the View As box click the Down arrow to select the format in which you will enter the data element separator and then enter the character For example select ASCII in the View As box and enter an asterisk in the box to the left The default value is specific to the network you installed for this partner Subelement In the View As box click the Down arrow to select the format in which you will enter the sub element separator for separating data element sub groups and then enter the character For example select ASCII in the View As box and enter a gt sign in the box to the left The default value is specific to the network you installed for this partner See the appendix ASCII Chart for a chart of ASCII decimal codes Set Group information for all Messages Enter a check in this box to forward the information entered in the Group Information fields to each individual Message Configuration screen Messages installed after this is executed will not take on these values Set Group information for all Transaction Sets Enter a check in this box to forward the information entered in the Group Information fields to ea
140. dem MOdulator DEModulator converts digital signals from your computer to analog signals on the telephone line and vice versa Data communications software and modems work as a unit to accomplish a successful communications session There are five major attributes which collectively specify a communications session They are Communication type Signaling speed Data compression Error control ee YS File transfer protocol 3 1 Communication Types DiTranslator 8 supports two types of data communications asynchronous and bisynchronous Asynchronous is the most popular data communications type The shift towards asynchronous communications in EDI has gained momentum Today just about all VANs Support asynchronous communications During an asynchronous communications session start and stop bits are used to frame the data characters This framing approach allows varying gaps of time to occur between each character sent The two end points do not need to be precisely synchronized when data is sent The receiving node can receive a character and then wait idly for the next character The start bit indicates the next character and the stop bit flags the end of the character This asynchronous approach does not require elaborate modem synchronization circuitry which is why asynchronous modems are significantly less expensive than bisynchronous modems 3 2 Signaling Speed Two modems must use the same signaling speed during a communications
141. derstand format and follows your Hub trading partner s segment specifications Hub reports are included in DiTranslator 8 PC Kits In order to create your own custom report for partners not in the Kit program you must first understand the following How to read the standard specification that your trading partner is using to transmit the data How to read a DiTranslator 8 cross reference XRF file The logic of a programming language such as BASIC The operation of an editor such as Microsoft WordPad in order to create the report map 2 1 Steps for Creating a Custom Report Format Following these steps is a complete sample of a customized report map for the 850 Purchase Order version 3040 Create a custom report task icon in the desired window In the Desktop window double click the DiTranslator 8 icon 3 Inthe Trading Partners window double click the icon for the partner for whom you are creating a custom report 4 In your partner window double click the icon for the transaction set for which you are creating a custom report 5 Double click the Process Inbound for custom reports for incoming data or the Process Outbound icon for custom reports for outgoing data 6 Right click on a blank area on the left half of the window and select New The Task Wizard is displayed 7 Click the Create a Custom Task option button and click the Next button 8 Inthe Task Name field enter a name for your custom report task then s
142. ding partner A second common approach is to use what is called point to point communication In point to point communication your computer establishes a direct connection to your trading partner s computer in order to exchange EDI files Under normal circumstances your trading partner will rarely call your computer in order to establish a communications link and exchange EDI files The most common occurrence is for DiTranslator 8 to initiate the communications session This is true for both VAN and point to point communication 3 Data Communications Terminology The data communications field is flooded with terms used to describe a wide variety of concepts Data communications technology is continually enabling faster data rates on normal dial lines and as aresult the complexity is increasing The data rate has roughly doubled every 3 years Fortunately you don t have to be a data communications expert to utilize data communications in EDI DiTranslator 8 does the hard work for you However it is a good idea for you to become 39 acquainted with fundamental data communications terminology This knowledge will enable you to make decisions when faced with multiple data communication options in dealing with EDI and trading partners A data communications session is accomplished via a combination of software and hardware installed in your computer The hardware consists of a modem interconnection cables as well as the telephone line A mo
143. ding to the new specifications The Begin Codes section continues through the TM map until it ends with End Codes further down in the file The first field is the data element reference number The next series of fields are the EDI codes for that data element Each code is separated by a For example valid entries for data element 640 are BB BH CA and so on Delete or add codes as desired 8 When you are finished select the Save button and then click Exit from the File menu 11 Configuring Reports There are two types of reports in the DiTranslator 8 system Raw Data and Hub or custom reports Topics in this section include Configuring Raw Data Reports Configuring Hub Reports 11 1 Configuring Raw Data Reports DiTranslator 8 creates two log reports documenting your transmissions and communications activity The Raw Data Report generates a report describing the EDI translated data for the particular inbound transaction set A raw data report will contain each segment and data element present in the translated file DiTranslator s Raw Data Report format lists one data element per line and is center aligned with the EDI standard data element name on the left and the value placed in that data element on the right Fields without data will not appear in the report 80 To access the appropriate Raw Data Report configuration screen 1 Inthe Tree View expand the node for connection trading partner transaction inbo
144. ditor or reformatted regardless of the acceptance level For a complete list of data errors and how they relate to Acceptance Levels see Appendix G Data Errors Output File Sort to Module Level select the checkbox to sort the output file to the network partner and transaction set version levels Name Enter a name for the file that is the output from the Network Level Translator The default is MAIL_IN TRN You may specify an alternate path and filename of up to 127 characters Only specify an alternate path if you do not desire any additional processing e g sorting to be done on the file Format Click TRN the default RFM CON EDI or NONE TRN will output to a translated file RFM will output to a reformatted file CON will output to the consolidated mail file EDI will output to a sorted EDI file suitable for input to a Mercator mapper task NONE will produce no output file which assumes that you will be uploading the raw EDI file received from your partner Notes The changes you make to this task are valid only for the specific network identified at the beginning of the process 12 5 Putting Import File into Database Task Configuration When you are creating data by importing from another application the Put Import File into Database task posts data from the Import file to the database so you may add to view or change the data 1 In
145. double click the System Management icon 2 Inthe System Management window double click the Scheduler icon The Scheduler window is displayed EA Scheduler IOl x File Event Help Task List Command Parameters T ask List File 3 To add anew item or modify an existing item to the list of scheduled events you must access the Scheduled Event window To add an item select Add from the Event menu The Scheduled Event window will be displayed To modify an item highlight the item and select Change from the Event menu The Scheduled Event window will be displayed Interpret Put Translated Convert P O Sorted Mail Translated Sorted Mail to Esport File to Invoice i gt oo ACME P O Consolidate Faw Data Export File Unknown Report the Export File Report Translated File Open Enter Properties Alt E nter Schedule Event The Scheduled Event window is displayed below 190 Scheduled Event Task List Title mee amp Specific Time Browse Task Lists Interval Time Task List File P BH or z fi B We hr bette __ Browse Parameters Schedule Command Day of Week Friday This screen varies slightly depending on whether the Schedule Task List or the Schedule Command option button has been selected The following screen displays when the Schedule Command option is selected Scheduled Event Schedule Task List Day of Week Friday Command Line pee ooo Com
146. dow 186 Using Help Help Use this command to open to the Windows Help facility for instructions about using Help About Tasklist Help Use this command to display the copyright notice and version number of your copy of the Task List Editor 1 3 Adding a New Task List If you should need to create a new Task List use the following instructions 1 Inthe Desktop window double click the Daily Processing icon In the Daily Processing window double click the Add New Task List icon The Tasklist Editor window is displayed 3 Use the instructions in the Editing a Task List section to build your Task List 4 When you have finished building your Task List select Save from the File menu The Save window is displayed Save Title of Tasklist Cancel Position System H E Networks amp the Internet H Trading Partners You may assign the SA Daily Processing Task List to another object within the system 5 Inthe Title of Tasklist field enter the name of the Task List you want to appear next to the Task List icon In the Position box expand the tree structure by clicking on the plus sign and select the desired window where you would like that Task List saved then click the OK button For example the Task List below is specifically for My DiTranslator 8 inbound and outbound Invoices as shown below Save Ea Title of Tasklist Invoice Processing ance Position Ei Trad
147. e Back button to display the previous screen or the Cancel button to stop the installation When installing and using DiTranslator 8 you must be logged in with a profile that has administrator privileges 1 First shut down all other applications including the Microsoft Office Shortcut Bar before installing DiTranslator 8 11 2 Locate and select setup exe under DiTranslator folder The InstallShield Wizard screen should be automatically displayed Preparing to Install DiTranslator Setup i preparing the InstallShield Wizard which Will guide you through the program setup process Please walt Preparing to Install u y 3 When the Software License Agreement window is displayed read the license agreement and click the Yes button to accept the terms of this agreement The Customer Information stage is displayed Customer Information e Please enter your information Dp Please enter your name company name License Rey from the back of the CD and CustomerID distributed with DiT ranslator User Name Sek Compary Mame License Key Customer ID Installshield N Cancel 12 4 Inthe Customer Information stage enter the following information then click the Next button User Name Company Name License Key is sent to the mailbox that you provided in the Download form Customer ID is sent to the mailbox that you provided in the Download form 5 Inthe Choose Destination windo
148. e Info EI INS Address Info Release No 328 CJ N4 Geographic Locatior Change Order Sequence Mo 327 L REF Ret Numbers Transaction Type Code gt JE40 Ga PER Administrative Com SD ITD yTeme of Sale Defered Transaction Set Purpose Code 353 L DTM Date Time Reference Action Code 306 Ly FOBIF 0 6 Related Instruct a m C FID Product ltern Descriptio CJ MEA Measurements CJ PWK Paperwork CJ PEG Marking Packaging Le Soa tL FIT ariff E ia ai borgarna z FEES AN NUM 195 The left panel lists the segments that make up this transaction set Segments that are required by the EDI standard are in bold and marked by a yellow triangle with an to the left of the segment name Click a sign to expand the list or on a sign to reduce it The segment that is highlighted on the left is detailed at the right Data elements contained within this segment are bold if they are required The number to the right of each element is the data element reference number which can be used to look up the data element in your EDI standards manual If there is a box around the data element reference number then the field will display in your data entry screen 6 To change the document title select Title from the Edit menu 7 Enter the title you wish to appear and click the OK button Document Title Title Jacme Invoice Cancel e 8 Right click on the segment that you want to modify in the left half of
149. e each time a new set is encountered SETCONTROL Retrieves the set control number from the envelope SETPAGE Resets the page number to 1 when a new set of data is encountered STATUS Retrieves the status information accepted rejected etc from the envelope tag TIME Retrieves the system s current time formatted as Retrieves your trading partner s name from the envelope Example HEADER TX 0 0 1 Today s Report Date SPECIAL O 0 0 DATE IX dg Oy Sy Company Name SPECIAL 0 0 0 COMPANY ENDHEADER NN 237 Using the above commands the following will print on the report Today s Report Date 10 31 95 Company Name ABC Co TIMEFORMAT Syntax TIMEFORMAT Time string Remarks Use TIMEFORMAT to insert a time in a report Time string is a value with the embedded reserved words HH MM and optionally SS The minimum size of time string is 4 characters the maximum size is 30 characters TIMEFORMAT inserts the date string in a report replacing the reserved word HH with the hour the word MM with the minutes and the word SS with the seconds associated with the time specified by a SPECIAL or FD command A SPECIAL or FD command must follow a TIMEFORMAT command When using the FD command the length specified must be 4 or 6 for HHMM or HHMMSS input format When using the SPECIAL command the SpecialCode is TIME current time or ENVTIME time taken from the envelope Example TIMEFORMAT HH MM S
150. e each time you receive an interchange from this trading partner A warning is issued if the inbound control number does not agree with DiTranslator s expectations Outbound This number is used if you have chosen the Unique Outbound Group Control option at the Generate EDI Mail From Translated task configuration window The number increments by one each time a Functional Group Header is generated for this transaction set and trading partner Edit this number only to re synchronize transmissions from your trading partner Group Information Your Application Code Enter your Application Sender Receiver Code GS02 03 that you and your trading partner have agreed upon This code identifies you in the trading partnership 74 Your Partner s Application Code Enter your trading partner s Application Sender Receiver Code GS02 03 that you and your trading partner have agreed upon This code identifies your partner in the trading partnership This value will likely be the same for each transaction set If you want to auto configure these values for all transaction sets you may do so in the Auto Configuration tab in the ISA Envelope Configuration window See step 2 in the Configuring A Trading Partner section for details about the Auto Configuration tab Message Identification EDIFACT Code Enter the Message Type Identifier which will be placed in the UNHO201 field Version Enter the Message Type Ver
151. e notation to the right identifies the current record and the total number of the particular type of segment in the loop For example if you are viewing an N1 segment and you see 2 of 3 it would mean you have entered three N1 segments within the current loop and you are viewing the second one The third box from the right provides information about the specific field the cursor is in such as an AN if itis an alphanumeric field a DT if it is a date field or a number indicating the X12 code element number Split View Use this command to reposition the vertical bar separating the Transaction Set Structure pane on the left from the Edit View pane on the right You may then use the mouse or the keyboard arrows to move the splitter bars When you are finished press the mouse button or enter to leave the splitter bars in their new location Help Topics Help Use this command to access online documentation for DiTranslator 8 About Data Editor Help Use this command to display the copyright notice and version number of your copy of the Data Editor C Using the Data Editor to View a Data File Other than data entry the Data Editor can be used to view any data file at any stage of processing after the file has been interpreted in your system You may find it useful to view inbound data that you have received To view a data file 1 Select the Inbound Documents tab to view an inbound data file or the Outbound Documents tab to view an
152. e represented by a mailbox icon When there is data in the file the red flag on the mailbox is up If there is no data in the file the red flag is down In the Tree View right click on the desired Sample Files icon and select Properties 1 2 Select the Configuration on the DiTranslator Setup window 114 System Wide Data Files G Export consolidated file T Import hostsort file Update Delete UniquelD 1677721746 The Task Wizard is displayed The Data File Configuration tab for your configuration options For additional information about the task click the Details and Status tabs File Wizard 3 Change the configuration settings as desired To save the settings click the OK button 115 Meaning of Settings Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings Unique Archive select the Active checkbox if you want to set an archive level for this data file If you entered a check in the Active check box type the desired archive level in the Level box The default is 0 which directs the system to use the system wide defaults Any other value overwrites the system archive level for this particular file For more information on archive levels see the Setting System Options section in this chapter and Archiving And Unarchiving Files in the Daily Processing chapter Unique Print Utility If you are using a special print utility change the Unique Print Utility
153. e transaction set icon and selecting Delete from the File menu 17 Maintaining DiTranslator 8 The DiTranslator 8 Setup Maintenance program allows you to update current components repair DiTranslator 8 database and add components that were not included in original installation On your Windows Desktop click the Start button Select Control Panel from the Settings menu In the Control Panel window double click the Programs and Features icon In the Programs and Features window scroll down and double click DiTranslator icon ae a a 126 The Welcome window is displayed Dilranslator Welcome Modify repair or remove the program Welcome to the DiTranslator Setup Maintenance program This program lets pou modify the current Installation Click one of the options below Select new program features to add or select curently installed features to remove Reinstall all program features installed by the previous setup Remove anig a 2 cE Remove all installed features InstallShield lt Back Next gt Cancel 5 Select the desired option and click the Next button e Modify allows you to install DiTranslator 8 components that were not installed during the original installation When the Select Components window displays select the desired components and click the Next button The appropriate files are copied to your system e Repair will reinstall all of the DiTranslator 8 files and repair the DiTransla
154. e working with such as a reformatted or consolidated file It must appear in the first record of your file Host File MAIL_OUT CON Consolidated MAIL_IN CON Reformatted MAIL_IN RFM Exporting Interpreted MAIL_OUT TRN Importing Interpreted MAIL_IN TRN Exporting Section 2 Envelope Header Information Reformatted MAIL_OUT RFM Importing Format ENVELOPE MAIL Receipt tag date time Network Network Name TP Trading Partner name outbound password your Communications ID trading partner s Interchange ID your Interchange ID Env Control outbound control number date time test Env Tagl free form comments Env Tag2 free form comments Example ENVELOPE MAIL Receipt Tag 20000212 1310 Network AnyNet TP ACME ACME 1234512345 3122721850 7083179000 Env Control 01 890310 0900 Env Tagl 810 for ACME Env Tag2 175 Remarks The date fields conform to the YYYYMMDD format where YYYY is the year MM is the month and DD is the day The time fields conform to the HHMM format where HH is the hour and MM is the minute Time is expressed in a 24 hour format For the Network record the network name located after the sign must appear exactly as it does in the Network mailbox In the TP record the trading partner name located after the sign must appear exactly as it does in the DiTranslator 8 mail slot The fields that follow the trading partner name must appear exactly as they do in the DiTranslator 8 Confi
155. eceived from Trading Partner C Outbound Sent to Trading Partner Both C Do not build a Task List cows Hep 10 Click the desired option button to describe whether you will be receiving this transaction set inbound sending the transaction set to your partner outbound or both and click the Finish button If you are unsure accept the default Both to accommodate all installations 11 If you selected the Show Task List contents during install option in the System Configuration window click the Next button from Task List Direction If this option is not selected continue with Step 11 For more information on Setting System options see Setting System Options at the beginning of this chapter The Transaction Sets or Messages window displays Your transaction set s is now displayed in this window Before using this transaction set s to communicate with a partner you must configure it See the next Configuring A Transaction Set section for instructions 8 Configuring a Transaction Set Before you can communicate with a trading partner you must enter the transaction set configuration information 1 Configuration can be done at the end of installation in this case continue with step 3 or at any other time by right clicking on the desired trading partner and selecting Properties The DiTranslator Setup is displayed 71 Tasks and Data Files 4 tem is configured tem is not configured
156. ection from the UNB OS uneeamavatendognecured UNBYourCommID Comm ID in the Your EDI Information section from the Een uneuneconevatondagstines UNBYourQualifier Qualifier in the Your EDI Information section from the SS oneunzcantevatonddognecured o UNBYourRoutingAddr Your Routing Address from the UNB UNZ Configuration rene secures me Compound Configuration Queries GS Queries ANSI X 12 There may be different GS information for each transaction set installed in DiTranslator 8 under a given trading partner Therefore GS information queries need to be prepended with the transaction set and version The three pieces of item information are separated with an exclamation point The topic string still specifies the trading partner we want information about There may not be any spaces in the item string when requesting trading partner configuration information For example to get your company s code for the 856 transaction set version 3010 the item string would be 856 3010 YourCode The keywords are shown in the table below For the following item strings 999 identifies a configured ANSI transaction set and XXXX identifies the standards version of that transaction in DiTranslator 8 267 999 XXXX YourCode Your Application Code from the ANSI X12 Configuration dialog is returned 999 XXXX PartnersCode Partner s Application Code from the ANSI X12 Configuration dialog is returned Compound Configuration Queries
157. ection from the UNB eens ontcogratondnogtrnet oo UNBElementCC Element in the Control Characters section from the UNB en UNZ Configuration dialog is returned UNBGenerateUNA Generate UNA from the UNB UNZ Configuration dialog is ee ened UNBOutboundPassword Outbound Password from the UNB UNZ Configuration en sseewnene UNBPartnersCode Code in the Your Partner s EDI Information section from ene tpeunsunecotgnaton dnd UNBPartnersCommID Comm ID in the Your Partner s EDI Information section cee am he UNB UNZ Contuso dag ete 266 UNBPartnersQualifier Qualifier in the Your Partner s EDI Information section NT er tne UNB UNZ Conngiroton dalog e retines UNBPartnersRoutingAddr Partner s Routing Address from the UNB UNZ Den conewstondsonsreet o UNBPasswordQualifier Password Qualifier from the UNB UNZ Configuration enn aicsereuned o ON UNBProcessPriority Process Priority from the UNB UNZ Configuration dialog is Da aeaa o re N E onan toe UNBReleaseCC Release in the Control Characters section from the UNB MMS tiecianatonasogneeured UNBStandardsVer Version from the UNB UNZ Configuration dialog is ee eine o Eae UNBSyntaxID Syntax ID from the UNB UNZ Configuration dialog is ee tee eee UNBTerminatorCC Terminator in the Control Characters section from the em uneunecineuaten geared UNBTestModelndicator Test Mode from the UNB UNZ Configuration dialog is bien Pe UNBYourCode Code in the Your EDI Information s
158. ed Click the Next button Click the Browse button locate where the file is in the directory Click the Next button Scroll down the Available box to find the transaction set s you want to install then drag and drop one or more into the To be Installed box and click the Next button Transaction Set Wizard Available 204 Ver4010 210 Yer4010 810 Ver4010 820 Ver4010 850 Yer4010 Drag items from the list above to the list below then click Next To be Installed a 204 Vers010 9 210 Ver4010 Accept or modify the transaction set name which will display underneath the transaction set icon and click the Next button The Folder name the name given to the DOS directory associated with this transaction set is displayed for your information but cannot be changed The Use Default button will restore the original default name if needed Files are then copied from the disk or CD ROM If you selected the Do not build Task Lists during install option in the System Configuration window click the Finish button from the Transaction Set Wizard and continue with Step 11 For more information on system options see the Setting System Options section at the beginning of the chapter The Task List Direction screen is displayed 70 Task List Direction 210 Ver4010 The Wizard will now create Task Lists containing the tasks required to process this document Please select the direction of the document C Inbound R
159. ed information between your computer and your trading partner s computer For example you may desire to obtain Purchase Orders from your customer using the EDI process 1 First your customer prepares the Purchase Order data following the language rules of EDI standards The Purchase Order data resides at a remote location 2 Youthen launch a data communications session using DiTranslator which connects your computer to this remote location During this data communications session a file transfer mechanism is used to move the Purchase Order data already in EDI format from the remote computer to your computer The data communications session is then terminated 3 Youare then able to process the Purchase Order data using DiTranslator You may need to send an Invoice to your trading partner In this case you prepare the Invoice using DiTranslator 8 4 Youthen launch a communications session which connects your computer to the remote destination The Invoice in EDI standard format is moved from your computer to the remote computer during this communications session Occasionally EDI standards define guidelines for data communications used in an EDI process These guidelines may include time constraints which help assure that responses to transaction sets received will be sent within a specific time period EDI standards also define how the sender s 37 address and receiver s address are encoded However EDI standards do not norma
160. eded 5 Ifa custom translate map already exists click the Edit button otherwise click the Create button and then click the Edit button The generic non customized translate map for an 810 Invoice is located at the path Home Directory Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator system maps Ansi 8103010 tm and is used by all trading partners during translation However once you click the Create button a copy of that generic map is copied to the path Home Directory Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator edata connection name tp name ansi 810 3010 8103010 tm and the partner named in the path will now use this new custom map during translation instead of the generic map The translate map is displayed in the Microsoft Notepad editor and is ready for modification 8104010 tm Notepad eo File Edit Format View Help TPPC Translator Engine Configuration File Type Ans71 004010 810 Invoice Begin States Heading Detail Summary End states Begin Loops None Heading Ni 7 Heading LM 25 Heading N9 27 Heading V1 29 Heading FAL1 32 Heading None Detail IT1 34 Detail PID 43 Detai SAC 57 Detai SLN 59 Detai N1 66 Detail LM 73 Detail V1 75 Detail FAL 78 Detail None Summary rn 79 6 To edit the EDI Codes for a transaction set map scroll down the Notepad window to the Begin Codes section File Edit Format View Help Begin Codes AN DT 18 19 20 0 9 0 9 0 1 9 1 0 2 57 0 1 9
161. efer to the instructions in the Importing Data To DiTranslator 8 section of the Interfacing With Other Applications chapter 2 2 Creating Outbound Data Using Document Turn Around A Document Turn Around is a Report Writer map which converts a specific inbound transaction set such as a Purchase Order to a specific outbound transaction set such as an Invoice based on the data you received A Document Turn Around can reduce the amount of time necessary for data entry If the Document Turn Around feature is included in a Trading Partner Kit you have you will use this feature to transfer applicable data from the transaction set received to the transaction set you will send in return Once Document Turn Around has been executed see the Creating EDI Mail Using the Data Editor section for help in keying in the remaining data or editing the existing data in the transaction set created You can create your own Document Turn Around in case you don t have turnaround in your trading partner kit See Creating Document Turn Around Instructions in the Custom Data Entry Screens Reports And Document Turn Around chapter for details The following instructions assume you have already received and processed an inbound document that you wish to turn around to an outbound document 1 First convert the incoming document to an outgoing document e g convert a Purchase Order to an Invoice e Inthe Tree View tab expand the node fo
162. efinition file name AFM Input file name Output tile name APT I Lines per page 5 Use the following table to assist you in filling out the above screen When you are through click the OK button Definition file name RPM Type a unique name up to 8 characters with the extension RPM for the report map that will be automatically generated For example if this is a map for an ACME Corp Purchase Order ANSI ASC 850 to Invoice ANSI ASC 810 Document Turn Around for version 003030 you could name it AC501030 RPM Input file name Use the default MAIL_IN TRN Output file name RFM Enter MAIL_OUT RFM This file contains the information that is output from the Document Turn Around task and input to the Data Editor Lines per page You must enter 0 zero for no page break The Report Writer Task Configuration screen then displays to allow you to set additional options See the section Configuring Hub Reports in the chapter Setting Up Your System for details about this screen Click the Finish button 6 Generate the file layout XRF file for both the inbound and outbound documents Shell out to a DOS prompt and go to the directory c ProgramFiles DiCentral DiTranslator System Maps Ansi Type fieldist xxxyyyy where x Transaction set number 850 810 etc where y version number 3030 3040 etc Press the Enter key and the file xxxyyyy XRF will be created For more information on XRF files see How to
163. elect TPPC Report from the Task Types box Click the Next button The Report Write Task window is displayed 199 Report Write Task Fa Definition file name APH Input file name Mai In TAN Output file name APT Lines per page E OF Cancel 9 Filling out the above screen When you are through click the OK button Use the following table to assist you in filling out the Report Write Task screen Definition file name RPM Type a unique name with the extension RPM for the report map that will be automatically generated For example if this is a report map for an ACME Corp invoice version 003010 you could name it ACME810 RPM or 810 RPM Input file name TRN Type the file this report task will use as input The default is MAIL_IN TRN Use MAIL_IN TRN for transactions you receive and MAIL_OUT TRN for file that you send to your trading partner Output file name RPT Type in a name for the file that will contain the report For example ACME850 RPT Lines per page Type the number of lines you want printed or displayed on a page Enter O zero for no page break 10 The Report Writer Task Configuration screen is then displayed to allow you to set additional options See the Configuring Hub Reports section in the Setting Up Your System chapter for details about this screen Click the Finish button 11 Generate a generic report map It is faster to customize an existing generic map than
164. eneceeseseeetas 208 3 4 How to Read the File Layout XRF File ccccccccssseccccceeeseccceeeeeseccesseeesecceesaeeeceeesaenaeeess 213 4 Report Writer ones ccsssssssssssnessssssessessssssessessscsscsseesessscaneesssseeaneessesseaseen 216 AL REDO VV Iter BASICS crrr EE OS 217 AL REDO NTE RU e E E ee eee ree 218 Ao Aadne CONE oaa EEE E EEE EE 218 AA REDON Writer EXCCULION ecne 218 A OUT CO NOR 0s aa A E T eee 218 4O Register COmMaNOE sachs endeccetartcaesasecenneneatcueananceucinaraatapsnncse upauaedeeeaadeccetarenueiosecemncoeaecueanansenes 219 4 7 Conditional COMMANAS sseeeececccccsseeesseecccccesaueusseecceceesseuesseeececeessuausseeececesssaeeaeeeeeeeeesaaas 219 4S Table Lookup Comman S meeee ne eee eens ee tenn went en eS rao ene eee eee 219 4 9 Report Writer Arguments ccccsccsscccseccseccseccseccseccseccseecseecseesseesseesseesseesseeteeeseeeseeeeeeeees 220 4 10 Report Writer Command Reference ccseccccsssececceseceecesscceceeseceeeueceeeeueceeseuecetsuneceesenes 222 Chapter IX Solving Common ProDlemsS issn neni 242 LENO VOSS CS ana rneaee oun ooun cacao tnw eases ne recs aoe uyew sa A 242 2 Data In Your Unknown Documents and Unknown TP Mail Fil S sssssssseeeeeeseeaeeseeeeeeees 243 3 Solving the Unknown TP Mail vcccesncnecesnnorsersrcctersesetevnabanercinennessnaeesiunceseimnadyosdeasmmassertuiwasssedaes 244 4 Solving the Unknown DOCUMENIS wovcisadsvccsccdgencavedessccncasawesee Seance cottuncnsetec
165. enerate view and print a Functional Acknowledgment report gt To sort Functional Acknowledgements to individual trading partners configure the Sort Mail task and choose the Sort Acknowledgments by Trading Partner option See Chapter 4 Setting Up Your System for more details on how to configure the Sort Mail task 36 Data communications is a very dynamic technology It is described by an ever growing list of terminology This terminology coupled with EDI terminology can be confusing and misleading The purpose of this chapter is to help eliminate the possible confusion This chapter provides an overview of data communications terminology normally encountered in the EDI process This chapter includes the following topics EDI And Data Communications The Value Added Network Concept Data Communications Terminology Data Communications Standards DiTranslator Nework Connections 1 EDI and Data Communications Data communications is an essential ingredient in the EDI process It is the conduit enabling you to exchange electronic business transactions with your trading partners In the EDI model data communications is used as a sub system to transfer information from a source computer to a target computer It is important to understand that EDI and data communications are two distinct technologies EDI defines an encoding standard for business information Data communications defines mechanisms to transfer this EDI encod
166. enerate ELI Put Import File to Translated Invoice Report es Raw Data Report Database Translated File Unknown Generate Data Information from your inbound transaction set applying to the related outbound transaction set is now located in the Data Editor accessed by double clicking the Database icon See the next section Creating Outbound Data Using the Data Editor in this chapter to assist you in adding the remaining data to the document The fields in boldface type are mandatory based upon the ASC X12 standards 136 however you should refer to the Kit Guide specific to your trading partner or your Hub specifications to determine which fields are mandatory for the particular kit you are using Notes If you have missed a mandatory field required for your kit you will receive an error message 2 3 Creating Outbound Data Using the Data Editor The first step in the outbound process is to create your outbound EDI mail Using the Data Editor you may manually key in your data This section discusses the Data Editor and how to use it The following sections provide useful information when using the Data Editor to create your outbound data Overview of data entry Using the Data Editor To create custom data entry screens see the Custom Data Entry Screens Reports And Document Turn Around chapter 2 3 1 Overview of Data Entry This section includes EDI Standards Information Features Of The Data Editor
167. enu commands may be used to Add an event by accessing the Scheduled Event window Modify a scheduled event in the list Delete a scheduled event from the list Access the DiTranslator 8 online documentation See the following table for details about each menu commands in the DiTranslator 8 Scheduler window The commands are listed by menu in the order they appear Meaning of commands menus Save File Use this command to save your work in the Scheduler Print File Use this command to print a list of all the scheduled tasks and commands in the Scheduler Exit File Use this command to exit the Scheduler You will be prompted to save the scheduled events if there are unsaved changes Add Event Use this command to add a new event to the list of events Change Event Use this command to modify the schedule of the event that is highlighted Delete Event Use this command to delete the event that is highlighted from the list of events Help Topics Help Use this command to open the DiTranslator 8 online documentation Help Topics window About Scheduler Help Use this command to display the copyright notice and version number of your copy of the Scheduler 192 Chapter Vill Custom Data Entry Screens Reports and Document Turn Around This chapter includes the following topics Creating Custom Data Entry Screens Creating Custom Reports Creating Document Turn Around Instructions The Report Writer
168. eports codes could represent the path of C progra 1 tradin 1 reports codes TREGSET C TMP NAMES INI 1 TREGSET 1235 2 CROSSWRITE 1 addresses 2 1415 Windsor St First the TREGSET commands make text register 1 equal to C TMP NAMES INI and text register 2 equal to 1235 Then the CROSSWRITE command finds the table specified by the file path contained in text register 1 C TMP NAMES INI then finds the keyword contained in text register 2 1235 in the section named addresses and sets keyword 1235 equal to 1415 Windsor St DATEFORMAT Syntax DATEFORMAT DateString For Use Without Century Dates Only Remarks Example Example Example Use DATEFORMAT to insert a date in a report DateString is a value with the embedded reserved words MM YY and DD The minimum length of date string is 6 the maximum is 30 DATEFORMAT inserts the date string in a report replacing YY with the year MM with the month and DD with the day of the date specified by a SPECIAL or FD command A SPECIAL or FD command must follow a DATEFORMAT command If you use an FD statement the FD argument input length is specified as 6 assumes a YYMMDD input format If you use a SPECIAL statement the argument SpecialCode is DATE current date in YYMMDD format or ENVDATE envelope date DATEFORMAT MM DD 19YY SPECIAL 0 0 0 DATE If the current date is October 31 1998 the follo
169. er 5 REGTOTREG Syntax REGTOTREG Reg TReg DecPlaces Remarks Use REGTOTREG to change the value contained in a numeric register to a string This command will change the value contained in numeric register Reg to a string and place the result in text register TReg using the number of decimal places specified in DecPlaces Example REGSET 1000 6 REGTOTREG 6 4 2 236 First the REGSET command sets register 6 equal to 1000 Then the REGTOTREG command takes the numeric value in register 6 1000 makes it a string puts it in text register 4 and uses the specified number of decimal places 2 so that text register 4 now equals 1000 00 REGZERO Syntax REGZERO Regnum Remarks Use REGZERO to clear a register REGZERO stores the number zero in the register specified by Regnum Example REGZERO 20 Using the above command register 20 will contain zero SPECIAL Syntax SPECIAL SkipBefore SkipAfter RptCol SpoecialCode Remarks Use SPECIAL to access envelope and system data SPECIAL uses one of the Special Code values listed below to extract envelope or system data and write it to your report COMPANY Retrieves your company name from the registation information entered during installation LOOPCOUNT Increments the loop count by one each time a new loop is encountered NETWORK Retrieves the network from the envelope RPTPAGE Increments the page number by one for each new page printed Increments the set count by on
170. er desires each functional group they send you to be acknowledged or whether they want every transaction set message within the group acknowledged Acknowledgment Version The Acknowledgment Version field is used to override the default version for X12 and determine version and release used for EDIFACT CONTRL messages generated for acknowledgments Only 1 or 2 should be entered for EDIFACT This field should only be used for DoD Certification Agency Code The transaction set agency code for this transaction set is displayed The default value is correct This value is placed in GSO7 Application Password Enter alphanumeric data that identifies the recipient s division department or sectional system if required by the recipient This value is placed in UNGO8 73 Application Reference Enter the Application Reference which will be placed in the field UNBO7 for EDIFACT or the APRF field of the STX segment for TRADACOM Common Access Ref Enter the Common Access Reference which will be placed in the UNHO3 field CONTRL Version Select the EDIFACT standard to be used CONTRL 11 or CONTRL 22 for the CONTRL Acknowledgment sent to your partner EDI Standard Select the EDI standard to be used for this transaction set ANSI or UCS For EDIFACT and TRADACOMS this field cannot be changed First and Last Transfer Optionally enter the First Last Sequence Message Transfer Indicator which will be placed in the UNH0402 field Functi
171. er in detail how to write or edit a report map After writing the report map save the map name with an RPM 201 extension to the DiTranslator 8 Reports directory When you execute the report task Report Writer will go to this directory to find all report maps 17 Add ASC X12 code files as necessary The EDI X12 transmission from your partner contains a number of X12 codes that you may wish to change to a more human readable format Each code needs to be defined in its own cross reference file For example the code of 374 is a date time qualifier The format of this file would be like this This Filename is oraa CODI 374 001 Cancel After 002 Delivery Requested 010 Requested Ship 011 Shipped O15 Promotion Start Ol6 Promotion End 017 Estimated Delivery 0O37 Ship Not Before O38 Ship No Later O63 Do Not Deliver After O64 Do Not Deliver Before ZZZ4 Mutually Defined For each code that your partner uses you can make a file with the codes and the associated meanings These files in the format shown above e g 128 cod 374 cod 98 cod need to be populated in the directory c ProgramFiles DiCentral DiTranslator Reports codes In the RPM file the CROSSREF commands will do the look up in these code files The first argument of the CROSSREF command is the filename the second argument is the code For the example 374 code the first argument of the CROSSREF will be SoYSDIR reports codes 3 4 cod and the second
172. esented by TReg to a numeric and place the result in numeric register Reg Example TREGSET 1000 00 6 TREGTOREG 6 2 First the TREGSET command makes text register 6 equal to 1000 00 Then the TREGTOREG command takes the string in text register 6 1000 00 makes it a numeric by identifying all the significant digits and places it in register 2 so that register 2 now equals 1000 TX Syntax TX SkipBefore SkipAfter RptCol Text value Remarks Use TX to write literal string text to your report SkipBefore SkipAfter and RptCol specify the number of lines skipped before and after printing and the column placement for Text value If you print thext that contains escape codes the way it appears in your report can be affected The following escape codes are recognized in the text n Will be replaced by a new line LF N Will produce a carriage return line feed CRLF t Will be replaced by a lt Tab gt b Will be replaced by a backspace r Will be replaced by a carriage return CR 240 d dd or ddd Where d is either an octal digit from 0 to 7 and will be replaced by the character represented by value of the octal digit or where d is a not an octal digit and will be replaced by the non digit character itself Example is a backslash f Will be replaced by a form feed f is not the same as a PAGE command as it forces a form feed character but does not reset lines per page or force a new
173. ess Inbound Data A My ais Me Hilal OVer3070 Inbo AB Process Outbound Data Mu Ne Ls 240 Yer3070 Inbo a g S10 Yer3070 Jelete lE 610 VYer3070 Inbound E Interpret Sorted Mail fee P bly Report n E a Put Translated to Export File m Consolidate the Esport File heis ae Raw Data Report fl Propenes Attente a a B Pt Ree o i AA Invoice piece sd Now that we have added the Interpret Sorted Mail task and the Raw Data Report task to the list we will finish up by saving the Task List 3 If this is a new Task List you are adding see the Adding A New Task List section to save and name the list and specify the window where you want the list to reside If this is an existing Task List simply select Save from File menu and then select Exit 189 2 Using Unattended Mode Unattended mode allows you to run Task Lists and commands DOS or Windows without the presence of an operator In order to schedule a task to run it must first be placed in a Task List You may schedule Task Lists and commands to run at intervals or at specified times for each day of the week using the DiTranslator 8 Scheduler If you are running Windows NT there is an NT Service version of Xevent This will allow scheduled tasks to be start via an NT Service rather than having Xevent in the startup folder start scheduled tasks 2 1 Scheduling Task Lists and Commands Perform as follows to open the Scheduler 1 Inthe Desktop window
174. et The default is calculated from WORK SYSTEM Path In this option Path specifies the location of DiTranslator 8 system information normally C PROGRA 1 TRADIN 1 The default is calculated from the directory location of your DiTranslator 8 system WORK Path In this option Path specifies the location of the working directory for this transaction set The default is the current working directory The most common way of running the Data Editor outside of the DiTranslator 8 system would be to create a shortcut on your desktop The following steps will walk you through this process 1 On your Windows desktop right click on and select New 2 Select Shortcut from the New menu The Create Shortcut dialog box is displayed 144 a Create Shortcut What item would you like to create a shortcut for This wizard helps you to create shortcuts to local or network programs files folders computers or Internet addresses Type the location of the item C Program Files DICentral DiT ranslator Code Tsiedit exe Click Next to continue 3 Enter the command line the following command line if you have installed DiTranslator 8 in the default directory C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator Code Tsiedit exe If you have installed DiTranslator 8 to a different directory click the Browse button to select the appropriate command line Click the Next button 5 Enteraname for this shortcut 145 a Create
175. ew Mail In file is created Run Sort Mail task Yy Sort Mail file is created Run Interpret Sorted Mail task v Translated Mail file is created Run Put Translated to Export file task Export File file is created Run Consolidated the Export file task Run desired report Data or Hub report created Export Consolidated file is created to upload data to another application The following is an explanation of the previous diagram The first file DiTranslator sees is the New Mail In file received from your Value Added Network or directly from your partner This file is in raw EDI format and is found in the New Mail In icon 129 The Sort Mail task operates on the New Mail In file and produces Sorted Mail files one for each transaction set type from each trading partner who sent you data This data is found in the Sorted Mail icon Running the Interpret Sorted Mail task creates the Translated Mail file and will generate a Functional Acknowledgment for the data just interpreted if the Interpret Sorted Mail task is configured to do so The Translated Mail file is often the last file that needs to be produced From this Translated Mail file run either Hub custom reports or Raw Data reports To further process your data or export it to another application run the Put Translated to Export File task Exporting the data
176. ew the UNG line when you open the New Mail In file in WordPad or the text editor you are using The following is a sample of the UNG after the UNA and UNB segments and before the UNH and BGM segments UWA UNB UNOA 14 TSI12013 014 TSITEST 921216 100045 UNG LUSDEC TSIINTL TP 921216 1O00 54 0N 2 9124123545PA55 UNH 45 CUSDEC 2 912 0H BOM 4AB 111 TH 8500000052 Find UNG third line down far left This marks the beginning of the UNG segment Find the fields within the UNG listed in order and described below CUSDEC Functional ID code Indicates the message type for the messages in this functional group In the example above the code is CUSDEC for a Customs Declaration message TSIINTL Application sender s ID TP Application receiver s ID 921216 Date of preparation The date this functional group was prepared in YYMMDD format 34 1000 Time of preparation The time this functional group was prepared Time is expressed in a 24 hour format 5 Functional group reference number UN Controlling agency The agency responsible for this functional group The EDIFACT controlling agency code is UN for the United Nations 2 Message type version number 912 Message type release number The UN EDIFACT standards release number for this functional group 12345PASS Application password Your trading partner s password 4 3 Reading a UNH Line You can view the UNH line when you open t
177. executed You must have the Audit Log option selected in the System Settings window to use this option Archive File select the checkbox to automatically archive the input data when this task is executed Map Name Type the database map name for the transaction set in use The default is the database map name for the transaction set in use The database file name is the transaction set and version number followed by a DBM file extension For example 8103010 DBM for an 810 Invoice version 003010 transactions set Input File Name Type the input file you want to use for this task For example MAIL_IN DB Output File Name Type the output file name you want this task to generate For example MAIL _OUT RFM Input File Type Identify the file type of the input file for this task Flat File This format is used for TRN and RFM files and contains no delimiters Click Discard to reject new transaction set with duplicate key Delimited This file can be either user delimited where data elements are separated by a user defined character with pad characters suppressed or it can be database delimited where data elements are enclosed in double quotes and separated by commas with pad characters suppressed Database This is a DiTranslator 8 database file Output File Type Choose a file type that this task will output Flat File This format is used for TRN and RFM files and contains no delimiters Delimi
178. f the Specific Reports checkboxes if you want to filter out transaction sets for a specific functional group when the report is generated These options allow you to filter transaction sets by a specific stamp on the transaction set s input file For example click the Accept checkbox if you want only transaction sets that are stamped Accept for this functional group Lines Page 0 for no page break Type the number of lines you want printed or displayed per page Enter O zero for no page break Definition File Name Type the name of the report map with the RPM extension used as the command script for this report This file should be located in the Reports directory where your DiTranslator program files are installed Input File Name Type the name of the file the system will use to generate the report For inbound reports choose either the inbound translated MAIL_IN TRN or reformatted MAIL_IN RFM file For outbound reports choose either the outbound translated MAIL_OUT TRN or reformatted MAIL_OUT RFM file Report Name Enter the desired output file name Once created you will find this file at the path Home Directory edata network partner rpt 5 Click the OK button to save the settings 12 Adding and Configuring Tasks DiTranslator 8 is delivered with many processing tasks and a few that can be installed if desired Each task can be configured though this is optional The default settings may be adequa
179. file to your partner 1 Switch to the Details View tab and click the Manage Networks button 2 On the Manage Networks pane select the icon for the network which you will use to communicate with the partner who is to receive this data 3 Double click on the Send Mail icon 4 After completing the Send Mail task the system archives the Mail Out Ready data and you may exit the system or continue with other EDI tasks 152 Networks Tasks and Files Process Inbound Data Process Outbound Data jo Receive Mail a send And Receive Send Receive And Sort Sort Mail New Mail In Status NEW Unknown Documents Unknown TP Mail Mail Out Ready The Mail Out Ready file has data i e the envelope is on the mailbox that was created when you generated the EDI mail If the Mail Out Ready file doesn t contain data examine the Audit Log iail icon to determine why you didn t generate EDI mail Note If you need to resend data refer to section Resending data of the User Guide for details 3 1 6 Sending Functional Acknowledgments An ANSI ASC X12 Functional Acknowledgment 997 an Acceptance Rejection Advice 999 and an EDIFACT Acknowledgment CONTRL all tell your partner you have successfully received their mail When you complete the nterpret Sorted Mail task of the inbound process an acknowledgment is automatically generated and placed in the Mail Out Ready file When the Send Mail step of the outbound process i
180. for temporary storage You refer to a particular register by its number RptCol A number specifying the starting column for output data The actual placement of the output in a report depends on where Report Writer is positioned prior to the execution of the command that contains a RptCol argument The output position is the result of Report Writer s starting position and the RptCol value The rules are as follows When the value is greater than Report Writer s position Report Writer will output to the same line in the specified column For example if Report Writer s starting position is column 10 and the value is 20 then Report Writer will output to column 20 on the same line When the value is less than Report Writer s position Report Writer will output to the next line in the specified column For example if Report Writer s starting position is column 10 and the value is 5 then output will be in column 5 on the next line When the value is zero 0 Report Writer will output to the first column on the next line Seg The segment number of the TRN input file Leading zeros are not required SkipAfter A number specifying the ending line for output data SkipBefore A number specifying the starting line for output data Tregnum A number associated with a text register storage location There are 100 text registers 221 Value A number ora string A number is specified as an unsigned integer e g 3 A
181. formation at the group transaction set segment and or data element level To delete this transaction set from the Reconciliation database click the Delete button Toreturn to the Reconciliation Viewer click the Close button To Print Reconciliation Reports The Reconciliation Report can now be customized to include information based on user defined specifications such as direction of the Functional Acknowledgments and whether they have errors or if they are unacknowledged 1 Inthe Reconciliation Viewer window select Print from the File menu The Print window is displayed Select what you would like to report on and the direction 3 Click the appropriate button for the desired action to perform on this report Click the Print button to print the report Click the Preview button to view the report Click the Summary button to print a table format summary report Click the Cancel button to exit the Reconciliation Report window 4 1 7 Deleting Transaction Sets from the Reconciliation Database Once you have transaction sets in the reconciliation database that have been acknowledged and have any problems resolved you may want to delete them from the list Deleting will remove information about the transaction set and its reconciled acknowledgment from the database To delete an individual transaction set from the list There are two ways to delete an individual transaction set Click the x Delete button on the toolbar
182. from the ISA IEA ee eontgraindageremds ISAOutboundPassword Outbound in the Passwords section from the ISA IEA eee contain dager o o ISAPartnersAuthorization Authorization in Your Partner s EDI Information section ee m te SA EA congatindagcured o ISAPartnersCode Code in Your Partner s EDI Information section from the Beene eteacotgratn dog eet oo ISAPartnersQualifier Qualifier in Your Partner s EDI Information section from eee e AMEA coniguatn degree o ISASegmentTerminator Terminator in Terminator section from the ISA IEA ee contain dager o ISAStandardsID Standards ID from the ISA IEA Configuration dialog is im S ISAStandardsVer Standards Version from the ISA IEA Configuration dialog is ISASubElementSeparator Sub Element in the Separators section from the ISA IEA nr Configuration dialog is returned ISATestModelndicator Test Mode from the ISA IEA Configuration dialog is heel bi ISAYourAuthorization Authorization in Your EDI Information section from the ENN aea cornete dalag sretne oo ISAYourCode Code in Your EDI Information section from the ISA IEA he Ee ISAYourQualifier Qualifier in Your EDI Information section from the ISA IEA NT contain dagen UNBComponentCC Component in the Control Characters section from the UNB UNZ Configuration dialog is returned UNBControlReference Control Reference from the UNB UNZ Configuration nen amorrat oa nn UNBDecimalCC Decimal in the Control Characters s
183. gth in the input data the system will truncate the data on the RFM file as specified by the Justification value If the length specified here is greater than the field length in the input data then the system will pad the data on the RFM file as specified by the Justification value 263 Appendix I DiTranslator 8 DDE Server Overview DiTranslator 8 provides DDE server functionality for trading partner configuration queries and control functions The DDE client may execute any task or task list by specifying its task number There are also symbolic titles for commands that are common between all DiTranslator 8 installations like TERMINATE or MINIMIZE DiTranslator 8 provides query functionality for ANSI and EDIFACT configuration parameters fields are available from ISA BG GS UNB and UNG transaction types DiCentral has chosen to implement this functionality via the Microsoft DDE Manager Library DLL DDEML to provide the maximum DDE compatibility with client applications It is strongly recommended that any client applications i e front end applications written in C or C use the Microsoft DDE Manager Library DLL to assure maximal DDE compatibility with DiTranslator 8 All server functions require synchronous transaction requests from the client application There are three strings used to tell DiTranslator 8 what you want it to do There is a Server string which is TPPC for all DiTranslator 8 services for both queries and cont
184. guration dialog box In cases where there are no passwords leave the field blank and separate them by commas For example 3122721850 7083179000 For the ENV Tag records free form comments are for your internal purposes only Section 3 Start Set Format START SET transaction set VERSION version GROUP FunctionalGroup ID Module trading partner s Application Code your Application Code toet Control transaction set control number Gro Control runctional Group control number date time Grp Tagl free form comments Grp Tag2 free form comments ACCeDLT Example START SET 810 VERSION 003010 GROUP IN Module 5550002222 3334441111 set Control 1 Grp Control 1 920512 1450 Grp Tagl 810 version 3010 for ACME Grp Tag2 PReCCcepUr Remarks This information should match the Functional ID and version fields in the Transaction Set Configuration dialog box In the first record of the example above the transaction set is an 810 version 3010 and the Functional ID is IN The Set Control record defines the control number The Grp Control record includes a control number followed by optional date and time fields The date field conforms to the YYMMDD format where YY is the year MM is the month and DD is the day The time field conforms to the HHMM format where HH is the hour and MM is the minute Time is expressed in a 24 hour format For the Grp Tag1 and Grp Tag2 records optional free form information may be ty
185. he GS line when you open the New Mail In file in WordPad or the text editor you are using The following is an example GS segment between the ISA and ST segments 31 Receipt Tag 960717 1601 ISA 00 0000000000 00 0000000000 2Z2 7083179000 12 3122721850 960717 1113 U 00304 00000001 0 T gt GS PO 70831 79000 3132721850 96071 7 1113 1 X 003040 3 1 850 000000001 Find GS fourth line down far left This marks the beginning of the GS segment Find the fields contained within the GS listed in order and described below The asterisk is an example ANSI ASC X12 data element separator character You will see this character throughout the GS segment used for separating the fields PO GS01 Functional ID code Indicates the transaction set type for the transaction sets in this functional group In the example above the code is PO for a purchase order 7083179000 GSO2 Application sender s code 3132721850 GSO3 Application receiver s code 960717 GS04 Group date The date this functional group was sent in YYMMDD format 1113 GS05 Group time The time this functional group was sent Time is expressed in a 24 hour format 1 GS06 Group control number A number that is different for each functional group enveloped by an ISA segment X GS07 Responsible agency code The agency responsible for this functional group This code for ANSI ASC X12 is X 003040 GSO8 Version Release i
186. he New Mail In file in WordPad or the text editor you are using The following is an example of the UNH segment following the UNA UNB and UNG segments UHA UNB 0UNO4 1 TS112013 01 TSITEST 921216 1000 5 UNG CUSDEC TSIINTL TP 921216 1O00 54 0N 2 912412545PA55 UNH 45 CUSDEC 2 912 0H BOM 4B 111 TH 500000052 Find UNH fourth line down far left This marks the beginning of the UNH segment Find the fields contained within the UNH listed in order and described below 45 Message reference number CUSDEC Message type ID Identifies the type of this message For example CUSDEC for Customs Declaration message 2 Message type version 912 Message type release number UN Controlling agency The controlling agency responsible for this message The UN EDIFACT controlling agency code is UN for the United Nations 5 Functional Acknowledgments 5 1 Overview The Functional Acknowledgment ANSI ASC X12 997 transaction set acknowledges the receipt of functional groups The Functional Acknowledgment is sent to report the system s syntactical analysis of received functional groups The system analyzes the data based on the ANSI ASC X12 EDI standards Like all other transaction sets a 997 Functional Acknowledgment can be sent or received by a trading partner For example if you send an ANSI ASC X12 810 Invoice your trading partner may send you a Functional Acknowledgment in reply The Functional Acknowledg
187. he bottom of the screen which describes the action to be executed by the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button A check mark appears next to the menu item when the status bar is displayed New Window Window Use this command to open a new window with the same contents as the active window You can open multiple Task List windows to display different parts or views of a Task List at the same time If you change the contents in one window all other windows containing the same document reflect those changes When you open a new window it becomes the active window and is displayed on top of all other open windows Cascade Window Use this command to arrange multiple opened windows in an overlapped fashion Tile Window Use this command to horizontally arrange multiple opened windows ina non overlapped fashion Arrange Icons Window Use this command to arrange the icons for minimized windows at the bottom of the main window If there is an open document window at the bottom of the main window then some or all of the icons may not be visible because they will be underneath this document window 1 2 Window A list of currently open document windows is displayed at the bottom of the Window menu Acheck mark appears in front of the document name of the active window Select a document from this list to make its window active Index Help Use this command to open the DiTranslator 8 online documentation Help Topics win
188. he case in which you receive mail sent by your trading partner through a VAN Now let s consider the case in which you send mail such as Invoices to your trading partner through a VAN It is once again a two stage process First you use DiTranslator 8 to start a communications session between your computer and the VAN DiTranslator 8 will then send the Invoices to the VAN The communications session between DiTranslator 8 and the VAN is terminated The VAN processes the envelope and determines to whom you are sending the mail The VAN then deposits the mail in your trading partner s mailbox At some later point in time your trading partner picks up its mail from its mailbox Note that when you call the VAN you can send mail to multiple mailboxes belonging to your trading partners but you can only receive mail from your mailbox Similarly your trading partner and other users of the VAN services cannot extract mail from your mailbox In certain cases a situation might arise in which you prefer to use a particular VAN and a trading partner prefers to use a different VAN DiTranslator 8 can connect you to multiple VANs Or if you prefer some VANs perform transparent interconnection between each other You deal directly with your VAN and your trading partner deals directly with the other VAN The two VANSs take care of the rest This is commonly known as a VAN interconnects VAN communication is very common when exchanging EDI data with your tra
189. he pop up menu The DiTranslator toolbar also has a shortcut button for this command The Archive command backs up the data in the selected file See Archiving And Unarchiving Files in the Daily Processing chapter for details This command can also be activated by right clicking on a file icon and selecting Archive from the pop up menu The DiTranslator 8 toolbar also has a shortcut button for this command The UnArchive command allows you to retrieve archived files See Archiving And Unarchiving Files in the Daily Processing chapter for details This command can also be activated by right clicking on a file icon and selecting UnArchive from the pop up menu 19 The Purge Data command deletes the data in the selected data file or report icon This command can also be activated by right clicking on a file icon and selecting Purge Data from the pop up menu The DiTranslator 8 toolbar also has a shortcut button for this command The Print command allows you to print the selected data file or report This command can also be activated by right clicking on a file icon and selecting Print from the pop up menu The DiTranslator toolbar also has a shortcut button for this command The Print Setup command opens the Windows Printer Setup window to set printer configurations See your Windows User s Guide for more information on printer options The Update Wizard is for use when updating Value Added Networks kits and transaction sets This command can al
190. he trading partnership This value will be placed in the GSO2 or GSO3 field depending on whether your partner is sending or receiving Interchange Control Reference UNBOS Exercise caution in changing this control setting Make sure you consult your trading partner since they use these numbers to track your transmissions Inbound The first time you receive a transmission from this trading partner your DiTranslator 8 system expects to get a value of 1 for this control number You may overwrite this default by entering the control number you and your partner agreed to DiTranslator 8 expects the number to increase by one each time you receive an interchange from this trading partner A warning is issued if the inbound control number does not agree with DiTranslator s expectations Outbound The setting is initially O zero The number automatically increases by one each time you send an interchange to this trading partner Separators EDIFACT and TRADACOMS Data Element In the View As box click the Down arrow to select the format in which you will enter the data element separator and then enter the character For example select ASCII in the View As box and enter a sign in the box to the left The value in this field will be placed in UNAO2 63 Component Data Element In the View As box click the Down arrow to select the format in which you will enter the component data element separator for separating
191. iated warning whose severity number is equal to or higher than the number you enter for Acceptance Level Otherwise the data is marked reject Data marked reject cannot be posted to the Data Editor or reformatted For example if the Acceptance Level is set to 0 all data will be accepted If the Acceptance Level is set to 10 data associated with a Warning Severity number of 10 and below will be rejected Data with an associated warning severity number of 6 will not be posted to the Data Editor or reformatted regardless of the Acceptance Level For a complete list of data errors and how they relate to acceptance levels see Appendix G Data Errors Translator Map Name If you have customized the translator map file name for the transaction set in use type the customized map file name The default is the translator map name for the transaction set in use The translator file name is the transaction set and version number followed by a TM file extension For example 8103040 TM for an 810 Invoice version 3040 transaction set EDI Standard Type the standard name for the current transaction set The default is the standard name for the current transaction set in use For example ANSI Output File Name If you are using DiTranslator network connections leave this blank If you are using your own network connection software type the desired file name here Notes The changes you make to this task are valid only for
192. iation Viewer enables you to easily determine whether these documents have been acknowledged and if so whether they were accepted accepted with errors or rejected 4 1 5 Opening the Reconciliation Viewer Perform either option below to access Reconciliation Viewer window 1 Goto Tools gt Reconciliation Viewer 2 Select ura Reconciliation Viewer icon in the toolbar The Reconciliation Viewer screen is displayed x Reconciliation Viewer File View Help Partner Envelope H Group Acked All inbound and outbound transaction sets are listed in the reconciliation system and are identified by Partner Partner s Name Key Document Number eg Purchase Order Number Set The document ID e g 850 for an ASC X12 Purchase Order Sent The date the transaction set was sent Group The group and transaction set TS control numbers Acked The acknowledgment code if an acknowledgment has been sent or received for that transaction set See the Detail screen to find out what these codes mean A new field has been added to the Reconciliation database called Key The Key field is a user defined field based on the information contained in the transaction set Once the Keys field is set you can sort your documents by this field For more information on setting the key see the following section 157 4 1 6 Setting the Reconciliation Key 1 Inthe View menu select Keys The Keys window is displayed Partner Set H Vers
193. ield must be set to 1 262 Editing Text Alignment To edit text alignment you will edit the Justification value Justification specifies the text alignment and fill character to use for this field in the reformatted RFM file when the Put Translated to Export File is executed The four valid types of justification are LJBF Left Justified Blank Filled this is the default justification LJZF Left Justified Zero Filled RIBE O Right Justified Blank Filled RIZE Right Justified Zero Filled Editing Character Attributes To edit character attributes you will edit the Reformat Attributes value The Reformat Attributes specifies which characters in the field the reformatted file RFM will include and in what order For example 1 3 8 5 This string denotes that the first three characters of the original field will be mapped to the first three characters of the destination field Then the eighth character of the original field is mapped to the fourth character of the destination field Finally the fifth character of the original field is mapped to the fifth character of the destination field The character delimits characters The character indicates a range Editing Field Length To edit the field length you will edit the Reformat Field Length value The Reformat Field Length determines the length of the field after executing the Put Translated to Export File task If the length specified here is less than the field len
194. ify the Network Name which will display underneath the network icon The Folder box the name given to the DOS directory associated with this network is displayed for your information but cannot be changed The Use Default button will restore the network name back to the original default if desired b Click the Next button Network Wizard Enter the name to Display Name INS_AS2 Folder INS_AS2 Uss Dajal Appropriate files are copied to your system The Network Wizard is redisplayed 48 Network Wizard Network Name NS_AS Part 04 06 2011 Done Coy Configuration Hemio Help Tasks And Trading Partners irae Fie Network cannot be used until this item is Checked ee ee a o 8 You must configure the network you just installed before you can use it to send and receive data You may either do so now or you may simply click the Finish button and configure the network later If you click the Finish button without configuring a message box displays Click the Yes button to exit and configure the network later Whether you configure now or later use the instructions in the section Configure A Network Installed Using The Asynchronous Network Collection later in this chapter to assist you in configuring the network you installed Once the installation is complete you will see the new network icon in the Networks amp the Internet window Notes You can now install more than one instance
195. iguration settings Write Status Message select the checkbox to send messages to the Audit Log when this task is executed You must have the Audit Log option selected in the System Settings window to use this option Archive File select the checkbox to automatically archive the input data when this task is executed 12 9 Sorting Mail Task Configuration The Sort Mail task operates on the New Mail In file and produces Sorted Mail files for each trading partner who sent you data 1 Inthe Tree View expand the node Network icon 2 Right click on the Sort Mail icon and select Properties 3 Select Configuration in the DiTranslator Setup window Name Sort Mail Data Path C Program Files DICentral DiTranslator Edata NS_At Task Id 135 o UniquelD 1174405136 4 Your configuration options are displayed with the Sort Mail Task Configuration tab active For additional information about the task click the Details tab 105 Task Wizard i Archive File Unwrap Input File f Save if Sort Acknowledgments by Trading Partner M Ignore Envelope Padding Stin i Filter Input File Enable Sort to Mail_in TP 5 Change the configuration settings as desired To save the settings click the OK button Meaning of Settings Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings Write Status Message select the checkbox to send messages to the Aud
196. ile Costco W G Translated File 920 Verdig G Unknown Generate Data 3 1 2 Reformatting the Outbound Data Once you have created transactions using the Data Editor including Document Turn Around or by importing from another application the transactions must be reformatted When Using the Data Editor This method should be used whether your data was created using Document Turnaround or manually entered in the Data Editor 1 On the Transactions Tasks and Files pane double click the Database icon to access the Data Editor 150 2 Select Reformat from the Edit menu The Reformat screen is displayed Invoice Ho 123456 Delete after Reformat 3 Select the checkboxes of all transaction sets you want to mark to send to your trading partner Make sure the data you want to send is marked or it will not be processed 4 To delete the transaction set after sending it to your partner select the Delete after Reformat checkbox 5 Select the TRN File option as the output and click OK You will then see data when you return to DiTranslator in the Translated File ie the mailbox has an envelope icon When Importing Data This method should be used if you are importing data from an application outside of DiTranslator 8 If you are importing data from another application you will have created data in the Imported File i e the mailbox flag is up in the Outbound window To reformat the data simply double click the Put I
197. ils Pack 6 203 QUANTITY UOM UPC EAN Case Code 2 5 5 Purchaser s Item Code Case 040000012346 12346 UPC EAN Consumer Package Code 040000012346 Kroger Kroger PO Report 850 4010 For 03 25 2009 Pg 2 EDI Control Nos 000000217 27 0001 Product Item Description Description WHT TOWEL Item Physical Details _ Pack 6 QUANTITY UOM UPC EAN Case Code 2 5 5 Purchaser s Item Code Case 040000012347 12347 UPC EAN Consumer Package Code 040000012347 Product Item Description Description ROLL TOWEL Item Physical Details Pack 6 Transaction Totals No of Line Items 20 Hash Total 27 3 Creating Document Turn Around Instructions Document Turn Around instructions are provided for Trading Partner Kits but you can create your own Document Turn Around instructions for trading partners not in the Kit program using the same Report Writer commands used in creating a custom hub report For complete details about these commands see the Report Writer section in this chapter The Document Turn Around instructions take an inbound transaction set such as a Purchase Order and transfer applicable data from the Purchase Order to an outgoing transaction set such as an Invoice The benefit here is in pre entering data into the Invoice to make data entry easier The Document Turn Around instructions will write data taken from the Purchase Order which needs to 204 appear in the Invoice to a file that is used as input to
198. ime between turning on or logging in to DiTranslator 8 PC and turning off or logging out of DiTranslator 8 PC Setup The installation and configuration of your system Sort Mail A DiTranslator 8 PC task that sorts received mail by trading partner and transaction set TRADACOMS An EDI Standard used in the United Kingdom TRADACOMS stands for Trading Data Communications Trading Partner A company with whom you trade via EDI DiTranslator 8 mail slot An item at the Main window that opens to the DiTranslator 8 window The DiTranslator 8 window leads to tasks and files that relate to a specific trading partner 273 Transaction Set A collection of business related data called segments that is exchanged between two trading partners Translator Software that applies rules to inbound data to validate conformance to EDI standard format and generates outbound data to comply to EDI standard format Unarchive To retrieve an archived file Upload See Export Value Added Network VAN A third party communications network that performs electronic mailboxing functions X12 The specific committee chapter of the Accredited Standards Committee ASC that governs EDI standards 274
199. inbound to outbound segments and elements to include you can begin writing the map One thing to keep in mind is that unlike creating a report you are actually creating another file in the DiTranslator 8 flat file format This means that you need to create the header information as well as the segment and element information Below is sample code that you can use to create all the header and trailer information DOCUMENT TURN AROUND CONV RE oo Ose ORR Sa O Nae siping KKKKKKKKKKKK xx xx x The Segment Number Listing Goes from 850 to 810 AS TAE IE S TNIE FA IAS eee D E E E E THE RFM HEADER INFO kkxkxkxkxkxkx xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxxkxx THIS IS A CHECK TO MAKE SURE THERE IS ONLY ONE Reformatted HEADER ON a Holm PILE o 7 OE NA En EE PELS LS NEEDED LN CASE WEHR Lo MOR WPAN ONE PO JN IMHE WHEN REG 10 IS GREATER THEN 1 Reformatted IS LEFT OFF P DE DE E E S IE S DE D AE IA E IAE BS S D AS A S AE S DS E AS A S FAE BS S E AS I E AE S E E AS A E FAS S DE S AS A AE AS DS E D AS S AS AE S DS E AS D AE AS DS S DS S REGSET 1 9 REGADD 9 10 ERROR ee e000 her OrmatEeG Lee lease P S A A AE TAS BE S 3S AS S AAS SE AS SAS AS AE A AS SE S AS E AE AEA SEAS S S S AE AS SE S DS A AS AEA EAS S S AE A A E AS OS AEA AES E S O AE A AE AS S AS OS AE S AET S S OS A The Network is where you will enter the name of the communication 3 network you are using DE Or Or Ee yn The
200. ing Partners a BA My Trading Partner oS Process Inbound Data View pew aes Ae Task List to another object within the system Gl 10 Ver3070 Inbound gt 810 Ver3070 Outbound MEG 850 Ver3070 EG 998 Ver3030 2 ee 1 4 Opening an Existing Task List 187 There are two different ways to open an existing Task List depending on whether you are currently in the Desktop or in the Task List Editor To open an existing Task List in the Desktop To open an existing Task List for editing while in the Desktop follow these simple steps 3 Go to the window that contains the Task List you want to modify Right click on the Task List icon you want to modify and select Properties The Task List window is displayed Use the instructions in the next section Editing a Task List to modify your Task List To open an existing Task List in the Task List Editor To open an existing Task List while in the Task List Editor follow these simple steps 1 Select Open from the File menu The Open Task List window is displayed Use your mouse to expand and contract the list of available tasks in the left half of the screen That is if you click a sign next to Value Added Networks then all networks installed in your system will appear in the list If you continue and click the sign next to a network then all the tasks available within the network will appear in the list as well Likewise you may contract the list by clicking signs t
201. ing With Other Applications chapter Separators Enter a comma or period to be used to indicate decimal places in your outbound transmissions When using EDIFACT the value in this field will be placed in UNAO3 Auto Configure Group Information ISA BG and ICS These values can be different for each transaction set installed for this partner but most likely they will be the same For this reason we are giving you the opportunity to auto configure your Application Codes only for transaction sets already installed for this partner by entering them only once at the partner level Ifyou created a custom partner entering information here now will not have any effect on transaction sets not yet installed Come back to this screen once all your transaction sets have been installed To make Application Codes different for each transaction set edit them on the Transaction Set Configuration screen See Configuring A Transaction Set in this chapter for details Your Application Code Enter your Application Sender Receiver Code that you and your trading partner have agreed upon This code identifies you in the trading partnership This value will be placed in field GSO2 or GSO3 depending on whether your company is sending or receiving Your Partner s Application Code Enter your trading partner s Application Sender Receiver Code that you and your trading partner have agreed upon This code identifies your partner in t
202. invoice for example that combines the two messages TAXCON and INVOIC click the Add button and then click the Add button again Fill out the Message Entry dialog box see Message Identification in this table for the INVOIC message and click the OK button Now click the INVOIC entry to highlight it and click the Add button Fill out the Message Entry dialog box for the TAXCON message and click the OK button You will now see the two entries linked by the sign Click the OK button again to save To modify a MSGLINK entry click the entry and click the Update button Repeat this step and then modify the Message Entry dialog box see Message Identification in this table When you are done click the OK button and then click the OK button again DiTranslator provides a default message entry for all messages If you are using a single message not combined with any others to form a transmission the default provided will likely be adequate for your needs 75 Reference Number TRADACOMS Enter the Batch Number which will be placed in the BATN field of the BAT segment Reference Number EDIFACT Enter the Functional Group Reference Number which will be placed in the field UNGOS Sequence of Transfer Enter the Sequence Message Transfer Number which will be placed in the EDIFACT field UNHO401 TAXCON Message select the checkbox if you wish to use the TAXCON message for tax information Transaction Set ID The ID for this
203. ion Segment Element Costcow 004010 004010 004010 003010 004010 004010 004010 003010 004010 004010 004010 J D D D D DDD DD Dim 2 Select the transaction set for the trading partner you would like to add a key and click the Edit button The Edit Key window is displayed Edit Key Partner Costco Set 204 Version 004010 Segment Element fr 3 Inthe Segment field enter the segment whose information you would like displayed 4 Inthe Element field enter the element number or click the up and down arrows to the right of the field to select the element number of information you would like displayed Example If you would like Invoice number to be the Key for the Invoice 810 transaction set for My DiTranslator 8 you would enter BIG in the Segment field and 02 in the Element field 5 Click the OK button to save your changes and return to the Keys window Click the Close button to return to the Reconciliation Viewer To View Details To view detailed information about a Functional Acknowledgment 997 for a specific transaction set perform either of the following e Double click the desired transaction set e Select the desired transaction set and select Details from the View menu The Reconciliation Details screen is displayed This Details window provides the following information and functions 158 Detailed information identifying the transaction set that is being acknowledged Acknowledgment in
204. ion sets and versions e g 850 Purchase Order version 3040 that will be used to exchange EDI information Discuss electronic addresses and mutually agree upon values for codes qualifiers and IDs to be used to identify you and your partner within the EDI data to establish the following Interchange ID Qualifier and Sender ID ISAO5 and ISA06 to identify the sender of the interchange Interchange ID Qualifier and Receiver ID ISAO7 and ISA08 to identify the receiver of the interchange Application Sender s Receiver s Code GSO2 and GSO3 to identify the sender and receiver of the group Optional Authorization Information Qualifier and ID ISAO1 and ISA02 to identify the sender of the interchange Optional Security Information Qualifier and ID ISA03 and ISA04 to identify the sender and satisfy security requirements of the receiver 3 Establish a communications link between you and your partner by adding and configuring a network mailbox See the sections Adding A Network Mailbox To Your System and Configuring A Network for information Also read the Communications chapter for general information 4 Add one or more trading partners to your system using a Trading Partner Kit or entering the information manually and configuring them See the sections Adding A Trading Partner To Your System and Configuring A Trading Partner for information 5 Install and configure all transaction sets you intend to
205. is transaction set s configurations See Configuring A Transaction Set for details Clear the check if you want the system to increment the Common Outbound Group Control of the Functional Group Header stored in this trading partner s configuration See Configuring A Trading Partner for details Variable Records Every field from the input file Sorted Mail file will be left justified and space filled to the maximum length of the field in the output file Translated Mail file Enter a check to instruct the system to eliminate space padding after the last field containing data Disable Validation select the checkbox if you want to use the feature that activates Mercator mapper tasks from within DiTranslator 8 This feature will produce a Functional Acknowledgment to confirm receipt of the document without commenting on any errors that may have occurred When using this option it is assumed that all validation and translation will occur in the Mercator mapper as opposed to DiTranslator 8 Use Envelope as Data select the checkbox if you want the output file to contain envelope control information in the first record Disable Acknowledgments select the checkbox to disable the generation of acknowledgments in the interpret step If acknowledgments are not disabled at the network level in this screen then DiTranslator 8 will default to the setting found in the Interpret Sorted Mail task configuration screen at the level of e
206. istributed with your DiTranslator 8 SZS 2S Register Once you have entered the License Key and your Customer ID click the Register button 7 Switch to the Preferences tab The default values are displayed System Configuration Database Maintenance W Reload window details on startup Hide Trading Partner Documents Show Task List contents during install Do not build Task Lists during install Allow multiple queuing of the same scheduled task Seconds of delay after each task execution 0 8 Change the settings as desired using the following table to assist you 45 Single click to open checkbox enables single click to open which means when you single click an icon the appropriate window will open If this the Single click to open option is selected as a default for your desktop it will be the default in DiTranslator 8 as well Reload window details on startup checkbox reloads the window and sub windows size and positions every time you start up DiTranslator 8 Hide Trading Partner Documents checkbox brings the transaction set icons up one level in your DiTranslator 8 window Show Task List contents during install checkbox displays the task list contents during install You will need to click the Next button during the install to accept the default task list Do not build Task List during install checkbox allows DiTranslator 8 not to build the default task lists during transaction set installation
207. it Log when this task is executed You must have the Audit Log option selected in the System Settings window to use this option Archive File select the checkbox to automatically archive the input data when this task is executed Unwrap Input File select the checkbox only if your trading partner sends you wrapped mail This option will unwrap the input data you received from your trading partner and allow it to process through the system Save select the checkbox if you want to automatically save the unwrapped file used for this task The file is saved as MAIL_IN TP This option is used in conjunction with the Unwrap Input File option Sort Acknowledgments by DiTranslator 8 select the checkbox if you want Functional Acknowledgments to sort to the Functional Acknowledgment transaction set for the appropriate trading partner Clear the check if you want Functional Acknowledgments to be consolidated in the MAIL_IN SRT The default setting is no check Ignore Envelope Padding select the checkbox if you want the system to strip space padding sent by a network when this task is executed String If the system finds an error in your inbound mail it may be due to transmission formatting from your network Extra characters may be embedded in the EDI transmission If such an error occurs you can type a text string in the text box that will cause the system to ignore the extra characters Filter Input File select the checkbox if you want
208. it contains all the transaction set level Task Lists for this partner 1 1 3 Network Level Task Lists Each network window contains a Process Inbound Data and a Process Outbound Data Task List icon to process data for all trading partners using that network Process Inbound Data Process Outbound Data Receive Mail Send And Receive Send Mail Send Receive And Sort Sort Mail Status NEW Unknown Documents Unknown TP Mail When you open the Process Inbound Data Task List at this level you can see it contains all the trading partner level Task Lists for partners you communicate with via this network 1 1 4 System Wide Task Lists The DiTranslator 8 Daily Processing window accessed via the Daily Processing icon in the Desktop window contains a Process Inbound Data and a Process Outbound Data Task List icon for processing on all networks for all partners and for all transaction sets System Wide Data Files System Wide Tasks Process Inbound Data Process Outbound Data When you open the Process Inbound Data Task List at this level you can see it executes all the Task Lists at the network level 1 2 The Task List Editor The Task List Editor allows you to edit any Task List Use the editor to Create a Task List Change the order of tasks in a Task List Add new tasks to a Task List 185 Delete tasks from a Task List Meaning of Commands Menus See the following table for details about available menu
209. item will appear in this field Run Minimized Check this box if you want the Task List to run with the window minimized If this option is not selected the Running dialog box will display on your entire screen when the scheduled Task List is run Day of Week Click the arrow to the right of the Day of Week field and select the day s of the week you wish the Task List or command to run You may select a specific day of the 191 Notes week Everyday Sunday through Saturday Weekdays Monday through Friday or Weekends Saturday and Sunday only Specific Time Interval Time Click the Specific Time option button to run the Task List at a specific time of the day Click the Interval Time option button to schedule the Task List to run every X minutes throughout the day Hours Min AM PM If you selected Specific Time enter the hour minutes and click AM or PM to indicate the time of day you want the Task List or command to run Ifyou selected Interval Time enter the number of hours and minutes you want to pass between runs AM and PM do not apply If you are entering the Scheduler for the first time there will be no scheduled events in the list You may also access the Scheduled Event window by going to the DiTranslator 8 window where the desired task or Task List is displayed right click on the task or Task List icon and select Schedule Event 2 2 Dilranslator 8 Scheduler Menu Commands The DiTranslator 8 Scheduler m
210. k Help sine AB Send Receive And Sort a E Send And Receive Send Mail A Receive Mail e Receive Prior Mail E Network Reports 3 vn AS Process Inbound Data a AS Process Outbound Data ei Reconcile Mail E Trading Partners E RA Daily Processing You may change the order of the tasks in the list by dragging and dropping as well To delete a task from the list right click the desired task and select Delete We started with Receive Mail and Sort Mail in the AnyNet window Now you may want to go to a specific trading partner window to process a particular transaction set say all invoices received So let s close up the network portion of the list by clicking on the minus sign to the left of the AnyNet icon and expand the trading partners by clicking on the plus sign to the left of the DiTranslator 8 icon Opening up the partner ACME 810 Invoice and then Process Inbound you can now see all the tasks available in the ACME 810 Invoice Process Inbound window Again drag from the left side of the screen and drop the desired tasks on the right side in the order you want them executed If you want to change the order of the tasks in the list simply drag and drop to change the location in the list To delete a task from the list right click the desired task and select Delete W Untitled 1 Ehi Trading Partners t My Network Receive Mail Eia My Trading Partner Sif My Networks Sort Mail mAB Proc
211. k mailbox a Select h Update Wizard on the toolbar b Select Update Wizard from the File menu 3 Inthe Networks amp the Internet window right click on the network you want to update and select Update Wizard The Network Wizard screen is displayed Click the Next button 5 Click the Browse button to specify a the location of the network file Click the OK button and click the Next button Appropriate files are copied to your system The Network Wizard is redisplayed Network Wizard Network Name IN 5 AS2 Part 04 06 2011 Done 4 Coy Configuration Ej Henson Hep Trading Partners eee Network cannot be used until this item is Checked cons Heb 6 If you are prompted to configure the network see the Configuring a Network Installed Using The Asynchronous Network Collection section in this chapter for instructions Otherwise just click the Finish button 16 3 Updating Trading Partner Kit 1 Expand the network node and select trading partner whose kit you would like to update 2 Perform either option below to update a Select h Update Wizard on the toolbar b Select Update Wizard from the File menu 3 When the Trading Partner Wizard screen is displayed click the Next button 4 Click the Browse button to specify the drive where the Trading Partner Kit locates Click the OK button and click the Next button Files are then copied from the disk and will take a short time to finish The Trading
212. kvevadhawesvalbnesstadseesacedesevens 246 PRPS NCEA AAS GTC aw sic csecc scl oo wa ces cts cee ecc a 248 Appendix B System Defaults a ccscehi esas ie cersccisseraacecs used dockets cessed vaca venstesssetdecbuestvesocsadvececenseectusedsestiesvecevies 249 Systemi SEINES erain E E A 249 Irans ac cton SOUS nes a E a a AARE 249 Appendix C DiFranslator 8 Tash oie aaae a Ee a 250 Con oldate the EXDOrTF lEknonunen nnn a a AA 250 PERED Ol Gaa T rosea cdanceriesels ere decurcer tas 250 Generate EDI Mail from Translated cccccssssssscccccccseeesseeccccccssaeeesseececeesseueseeececeessueasseeeseeeneaaas 250 interpret Sorted Wall bacsatacu stats nsieicioesvatattadonsebanuctasid ease lnecectalled obs domnctusld cae nciasbebh dana toenamanstesneies 250 PUUIMPOMEFIIG Into Database asise sete peceucsdaneaceicmreneasaatec asia wisauotsubease a ueouuendawscnnees 251 PUL IMPOLE FIIGLO Translated Elle a5 ctcauecree temic a etd Palesiteie tite eine ta 251 POU Translated TO F XDOM EN cat scahece orteecg aces ercacctah anche tncdecinnndeeeensesetadandteautewieaaangsdaeeeedeeohanthens 251 Appendix D DiTranslator 8 File Example s ssussussunnnnnnnunnnnnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 252 Appendix E DiTranslator 8 Directory StructurTe sssssussunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnunnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 253 Appendix F File Names and Icon NamMeS ssssussusnnnnnnunnnnnunnnnnunnnnnnnunnnnnunnunnunnnnnnn
213. l DiTranslator Edata AnyNet ACME ANSI 810 4010 3 Inthe Tree View tab double click the desired trading partner icon Double click the desired transaction set 5 Double click the Inbound icon 171 6 Right click on the Put Translated to Export task and select Properties Select Configuration in the DiTranslator Setup window The Task Wizard window is displayed Task Wizard Put Translated to Export Task Configuration Details 10 11 12 13 Input File Type W Write Status Message Ast Fle I Archive File 103010 dbm Output Fie Type mail_in TRN At Ale mail_in RFM C XML File IN C Delimited C Std dBase In the Input File Type group box select the Delimited In the Output File Type group box select Flat File In the Output File Name box change the file name to MAIL_OUT RFM In the Output Delimiter box enter the delimited you would like used in your output file Click the OK button to save your configuration changes Double click the Put Translated to Export task Double click the Outbound icon Double click the Put Import File to Translated File task Your delimited file should now be in your database 2 3 Importing Individual Transaction Sets To import mail files that contains only one type of transaction set e g all 810 Invoices fora single partner Make sure the file has a DOS file structure Format the file in a TRN or RFM format according to the instructions in the The Di
214. l a e Mie IN CIOINIRVAN BR oe 270 Appendix J Glossary of Terms ANSI American National Standards Institute ASC X12 American National Standards Institute Accredited Standards Committee X12 The X12 committee was charted by ANSI in 1978 to develop a uniform EDI standard Today the X12 standards are the American national EDI standards Archive A copy of a specific file saved for backup purposes Argument Input to an application Asynchronous Communications A type of data communication in which characters are not required to be sent at evenly spaced time periods Bisynchronous Communications A type of data communication in which characters are required to be sent at evenly spaced time intervals Cascading Menu A menu that opens from a command on another menu Choose To use a mouse or key combination that initiates an action in Windows or a Windows application Click To press and release a mouse button COMM ID Communications ID Command A word or phrase that you can choose to carry out an action Commands are usually found in menus Configuration Special settings that tell the system how to operate or organize information for a specific object such as a system or communication task Data Element The smallest unit of information in a transaction set or message Data File A file that contains data A Data file can contain data from various transmissions Data Icon A graphical representation of a data file
215. l group Functional group segments are optional If there are no functional groups the interchange envelope surrounds a series of messages of the same type For example the messages must all be Purchase Order messages or they must all be Invoice messages A message consists of three parts a UNH Header segment a collection of related segments and a UNT Trailer segment The Header and Trailer segments envelope the collection of related segments Message Header and Trailer segments are mandatory Segments are used as required UNA Service String Advice Conditional UNB Interchange Control Header Mandatory UNG Functional Group Header Conditional UNH Message Header Mandatory PO 1 Segments UNT Message Trailer Mandatory UNH Message Header Mandatory PO 2 Segments UNT Message Trailer Mandatory UNE Functional Group Trailer Conditional UNG Functional Group Header Conditional UNH Message Header Mandatory INV 1 Segments UNT Message Trailer Conditional UNH Message Header Mandatory INV 2 Segments UNT Message Trailer Mandatory UNH Message Header Mandatory INV 3 Segments UNT Message Trailer Mandatory UNE Functional Group Trailer Conditional UNZ Interchange Control Trailer Mandatory The EDIFACT Envelope Structure 4 1 Reading the UNA and UNB Lines You ca
216. lD 1174405139 The Consolidate Task Configuration tab displays your configuration options with the default settings shown below For additional information about the task click the Details tab Task Wizard 85 5 Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings as desired To save the settings click the OK button Write Status Message select the checkbox to send messages to the Audit Log when this task is executed Archive File select the checkbox to automatically archive the input data when this task is executed You must have the Audit Log option selected in the System Settings window to use this option Notes The changes you make to this task are valid only for the specific transaction set and trading partner identified at the beginning of the process 12 2 Generating EDI Mail from Translated Task Configuration Once your outbound EDI data has been translated to standard EDI format the Generate EDI Mail from Translated task creates the actual outbound data that will be sent to your partner 1 Inthe Tree View expand the node for connection trading partner transaction whose tasks will be configured 2 Expand the node for Outbound icon 3 Right click on the Generate EDI Mail from Translated icon and select Properties 4 Select Configuration on the DiTranslator Setup window Dilranslator Setup C Program Files DlCentral Di Translator Edata WS_ A i I 810 Ver
217. lete Deletion Criteria Delete ALL Over 7 Days Old Cancel 2 Click the Down arrow to the right of the Delete field to select the message type you would like to delete 3 Enter the number of days you would like to delete the selected messages after in the Over Days Old field 4 Click the OK button 4 3 2 Auditing Log Viewer Preferences 1 Inthe Audit Log Viewer window select Preferences from the View menu The Preferences window is displayed The default values are shown below Preferences Startup Warning Level Delete messages ower 30 daps old on startup 2 Enter the number of days you would like all messages to delete after on startup and click the OK button 4 4 Archiving and Unarchiving Files Archiving creates backups of the files used in EDI processing When an EDI task is performed the task uses a specific file as input and creates output in another file The input file is automatically stored or archived as a backup For example when you perform the Interpret Sorted Mail task the system changes the data from Sorted Mail file format to Translated File format The Sorted Mail file represents the input file and the Translated Mail file represents the output file Your system 164 automatically archives a copy of the Sorted File when the task is performed Unarchiving restores an archived file into a format that DiTranslator 8 can use for further processing 4 4 1 Archive Levels
218. lines after printing beginning in column RtpCol for a Length of up to 80 characters The result is always left justified and blank filled If you print a register that contains escape codes the way it apprears in your report can be affected The following escape codes are recognized in the text n Will be replaced by a new line LF N Will produce a carriage return line feed CRLF t Will be replaced by a lt Tab gt b Will be replaced by a backspace Ar Will be replaced by a carriage return CR d dd or ddd Where d is either an octal digit from 0 to 7 and will be replaced by the character represented by value of the octal digit or where d is a not an octal digit and will be replaced by the non digit character itself Example is a backslash f Will be replaced by a form feed f is not the same as a PAGE command as it forces a form feed character but does not reset lines per page or force a new page header TX 0 0 1 Name TREGSET Acme Corp 3 TREGPRINT 0 0 1 20 3 Using the above commands the following will print to the report Name Acme Corp TREGSET This is t a test 1 TREGSET This 1S n a test 2 TREGPRINT 0O 1 1 20 1 TREGPRINT 0 1 1 20 2 Using the above commands the following will print to the report This is a test THIS 15 a test Note Since the Report Writer appends text on a line this escape code may not have an effect TREGPRINTR Syntax TREGPRINTR SkipBef
219. llowing table for details about available menu commands Meaning of commands menus Open File Use this command to open an existing template before you begin your data entry A template stores data that is used repeatedly from one document to the next to reduce the amount of re keying When you open a template you will find data pre entered in the document as you do your data entry You may need multiple templates to accommodate all your data entry needs See also the Save As File command for creating a template A template may not be used in conjunction with Document Turn Around Save File Use this command to save the data in the active document Save As File Use this command to save data to create a new template A template stores data used repeatedly from one document to the next to reduce the amount of re keying When you use a template you will find data pre entered in the document Create as many templates as necessary to accommodate all your data entry needs by entering only the repeating information and choosing Save As to save and name your template See also the Open File command for using a template A template may not be used in conjunction with Document Turn Around 141 Read Only File When you edit a TRN or RFM file the Data Editor defaults to Read Only mode This means you may view the data but not change it If however you do want to make modifications to the data click the Read Only in the File menu to rem
220. lly define the communications which actually cause the data to move from source to destination A variety of data communications modules are supported by DiTranslator 8 You simply use the module required to link to the desired remote location This topic is discussed in more detail later 2 The Value Added Network Concept When you send a paper business correspondence to a trading partner you normally use the services of a post office or a private carrier The Value Added Network VAN concept is fundamentally the same as an electronic post office VAN services are provided by third party organizations Using paper correspondence either you or the recipient pays for the postage The same model applies with VAN services Normally each sender pays the VAN a service charge based on the number of characters sent typically kilo characters Don t be misled by the term network This term does not imply a local area network LAN nor wide area network WAN A VAN simply contains a network of electronic mailboxes When you are dealing with a trading partner through a single VAN then both you and your trading partner will have private mailboxes in the VAN Overall the VAN may contain thousands of mailboxes The only ones that you will be interested in are your mailbox and your trading partner s mailbox The VAN conceptual model is very simple Again let s consider the example in which you want to obtain Purchase Orders from your trading partne
221. lues are specific to the network you installed for this partner Check with your network for mandatory or suggested segment terminators For bisynchronous operation all O zero See the ASCII Chart Appendix for a chart of ASCII decimal codes Test Indicator Enter a check in this box to indicate the interchange is a test When in test mode a value of 1 will be placed in UNB11 Remove the check if you are in production mode 64 Test Mode Enter a check in the Test Mode check box if you are sending a test transmission When in test mode field ISA15 will contain a T test Remove the check if you are in production mode which will place a P production in ISA15 Use Envelope Information for Group Information Enter a check in this box to forward the information entered in the Code field of the Your EDI Information and Your Partner s EDI Information group boxes to each individual Transaction Set Configuration screen Transaction sets installed after this is executed will not take on these values Your EDI information ISA 9 Qualifier Enter the Interchange ID Qualifier ISA05 07 you and your trading partner have defined and agreed upon to define the type of Interchange Sender Receiver ID code to be used For example if you are entering a DUNS number in the Code field then you would enter the 01 code for DUNS number Code Enter your Interchange Sender Receiver ID ISA06 08 you and your trading
222. m Tray and selecting the desired task 7 Common Processing Terms The terms below are common EDI processing terms Trading Partner the company with whom you exchange EDI EDI Electronic Data Interchange the exchange of standard business transaction sets or messages from computer to computer Standards a set of EDI guidelines The ASC X12 committee develops industry wide EDI standards accepted and used by a wide range of U S national industries DiTranslator 8 supports the ASC X12 public standards as well as the widely accepted international standards EDIFACT and TRADACOMS Transaction Set Electronic X12 EDIFACT or TRADACOMS formatted data representing the equivalent of a business document such as a Purchase Order or Invoice Report EDI transmission data translated into an easy to understand business report format Interchange a group of transaction sets sent electronically by a trading partner Transmission a set of interchanges sent electronically by one network Translation a task that validates a transmission The Interpret Sorted Mail task and Generate EDI Mail from Translated task are two DiTranslator tasks that translate EDI data and verify it against EDI standards Interpreting is an inbound translation and Generating is an outbound translation 8 Basic Operations The tasks below are common in DiTranslator Receive Mail instructs the system to receive a transmission through a specific
223. mand Parameters Cancel f Specific Time Browse Commands i Interval Time pmo aa a BE Minimized Browse Parameters F 4 Complete this screen to add or change a scheduled event When you are done click the OK button When the Scheduler window is redisplayed you will see your scheduled event in the list When you are done adding changing or deleting scheduled events select Save from the File menu then select Exit to exit the Scheduler Meaning of fields Schedule Task List Click the Schedule Task List option button to schedule a Task List Schedule Command Click the Schedule Command option button to schedule the execution of a program outside of DiTranslator 8 Task List Title When you are modifying a Task List schedule leave the title as is When you are adding a new Task List click the Browse Task Lists button to find the name of the Task List you wish to schedule Task List File If you are scheduling a Task List the system assigned number displays in this field to identify the Task List and should not be changed Command Line Enter the command line necessary to execute the command you are scheduling Click the Browse Commands button to assist you in locating the executable file Command Parameters Enter any command parameters Click the Browse Parameters button for assistance When the Browse Parameters dialog box is displayed click the item you wish to schedule and then click the OK button The selected
224. ment will indicate whether or not the transaction set had the correct syntax looping and structure The Functional Acknowledgment does not indicate that the business data within the transaction sets is acceptable to your trading partner 35 5 2 Outbound Functional Acknowledgments You can send Functional Acknowledgments after receiving sorting and interpreting an EDI transmission Interpreting transmission data means the system translates the transmission data and checks the data s integrity against X12 standards The Functional Acknowledgment is a report on that translation The Interpret Sorted Mail task can be configured to automatically generate the Functional Acknowledgment s To send a trading partner Functional Acknowledgments you only have to execute the Send Mail task See Chapter 4 Setting Up Your System for instructions on how to configure the Interpret Sorted Mail task See Chapter 5 Daily Processing for instructions on how to send EDI mail 5 3 Inbound Functional Acknowledgments When you sort EDI mail containing Functional Acknowledgments the system sorts the Functional Acknowledgments to the Sorted Mail icon This is the system default If you want the Functional Acknowledgment to sort to individual trading partners like other transaction sets you will need to configure the Sort Mail task accordingly Configuring the system to sort Functional Acknowledgments to trading partners is useful if you want to g
225. mm PO Date Eb INT Name PO No i N2 Addl Name Info s N3 Address Info Release Mo M4 Geographic Locatia Change Order Sequence Mo REF JRef Nos ks PER Administrative Cor ITO T erms of Sale Deterrec DTM Date Time Ref F Top screen New of 0 AN NUM re Transaction Type Code Now suppose that you have a few changes you want to make to this screen Change the name of this segment to Invoice BIG You no longer want the Change Order Seq No or Release Number to display in the screen for data entry Change the name of the data element Purchase Order Number to ACME PO Number and make it a required field All your Invoice Numbers start with 1998 and you want this information to display in this field to reduce data entry You also want the Invoice Number to contain numbers only After making the above changes in the DB Map Editor your Data Editor would look like this Er Mal out Invorce Data Editor File Edit View Help waa Salm aa axel ee BIG invoice NTE Moter Special Instru CUR Currency REF Ref Nos z FER Administrative Coron N1 Mame i N2Add Name Into i N3JAddress Info M4 Geographic Loca REF JRef Nos PER JAdministrative C ITD T erms of Sale Defen DTM D ate Time Ret gt F Top screen Invoice Ho taa Invoice Date Purchae Order Date ACME PO Number Cw Transaction Type Code H
226. mmunications will be used e g asynchronous communications via a Value Added Network or bisynchronous direct communications The EDI Standard data format can be thought of as a common language that allows all companies to communicate with each other That is if all companies were able to accept or send data not only in their company s internal format s but also in an EDI standard format ANSI ASC X12 EDIFACT or TRADACOMS then all companies would have one data format in common for trading EDI mail DiTranslator translates the data coming into and going out of your PC so you and your trading partner will be able understand each other s data An example of an EDI exchange could involve a buyer and a seller Suppose the buyer identified an inventory need A purchase order is produced by manual data entry or from data within the buyer s business application DiTranslator 8 will take this data and translate it into EDI standard format The EDI data then passes through communications software that routes it over an electronic communications link to the seller When the seller receives the transmission the data is converted into a format that can be passed to the seller s order entry system or printed using their EDI software Once the seller has received the data a Functional Acknowledgment should be sent to the buyer indicating the transmission was received and detailing any errors found when the transmission was validated against the EDI stan
227. mport File to Translated File icon You will then see data in the Translated File i e the mailbox flag is up OutBound Document Files Generate EDI Mail from Tran 204 Ver4010 7 Frocess Outbound Data 210 Ver4010 Put Import File into Database 910 Ver3010 S Put Import File to Translated F 810 Ver4010 Raw Data Report Database 3M 4010 Imported File CosteoW Translated File 20 Ver4010 a Unknown Generate Data 824 Ver4010 For complete details about importing your data from an application outside of DiTranslator 8 refer to the instructions in the Interfacing With Other Applications chapter 151 3 1 3 Generating an Outbound Report Now that you have a translated file you may generate a report of the outgoing document s Once you generate a report you can view or print it The Raw Data Report icon generates a report that describes the EDI translated data for the particular outbound transaction set A raw data report will contain each segment and data element present in the translated file DiTranslator s raw data report format lists one data element per line and is center aligned with the EDI standard data element name on the left and the value placed in that data element on the right Fields without data will not appear in the report You may have a Hub or custom report icon e g 3M Invoice Report that you wish to use Hub reports are included with custom Trading Partner Kits or have been customized yourself
228. mpression On Unique Outbound Group Control Use Set Control s from Input File Input from RFM File Wrap Output File On On Save Unwrapped File Off 20 O 5 Acceptance Level Translator Map Name Set to current TM for selected transaction EDI Standard Set to current standard for selected Interpret Sorted Mail Write Status Message O 5 5 Archive File Unique Outbound Group Control Variable Records sh Use Envelope as Data 250 Translator Map Name Set to currently selected transaction set or a a EDI Standard Set to currently selected transaction set or nn eee Put Import File into Database Archive File File bia Name Set to re selected transaction set or message DBM name Input File MAIL_OUT REM Put Import File to Translated File Map Name Set to the currently selected transaction set or message DBM name Input File Name MAIL _OUT RFM Output File Name MAIL_OUT TRN Put as to Export gt Archive File File aae eee Name Set to a currently selected transaction set or message DBM name Input File Name MAIL_IN TRN Output File Name MAIL_IN RFM 251 Appendix D DiTranslator 8 File Example The following is an example of a TRN file Other DiTranslator 8 files are structured in a similar way For information about DiTranslator 8 file layout see the chapter Interfacing With Other Applications Interpreted r ENVELOPE MAILD Recept Tag
229. n Around will transfer applicable information from an inbound transaction set received to an outbound transaction set A common example of this is transferring data from a received Purchase Order to an outgoing Invoice Run the desired Convert task for example Convert PO to Invoice to create an imported file which is represented by the Imported File icon Convert the data to a format suitable for the Data Editor by running the Put Import File into Database task The data can then be viewed by double clicking the Database icon Add and or modify data in the file using the Data Editor Much of the information will already be entered as it was transferred from the related inbound transaction set Once your data has been saved the Database file is created To create a translated file from the data in the Data Editor choose Reformat from the Edit menu Then selecting files for reformatting and clicking the OK button creates the translated file From the Translated File you can generate enveloped EDI transaction sets using the Generate EDI Mail from Translated task All EDI data is appended into a single outbound file called Mail Out Ready The Mail Out Ready file is represented by the Mail Out Ready icon You can perform this task for each trading partner to whom you will send EDI mail The Send Mail task uses the data file associated with the Mail Out Ready icon to send the EDI mail to your network or directly to your partner If you are creati
230. n the system is done adding the task and the Tracked Task Configuration window displays click the Finish button 155 Tracked Task Configuration Command Line Recon exe Exit Code Treat exit codes at or above this value as an emor 0 Zero disables checking 8 Inthe network window you will now see the Reconcile Mail icon PE Send Mea Send Receive And Sort Sort Mail Gl Mail Out Ready 4 1 2 Reconciling Mail Activate the Reconcile Mail task just before each time you send mail and just after each time you receive mail All transaction sets contained in the New Mail In or Mail Out Ready file will then be logged into the reconciliation system and any Functional Acknowledgments 997s or Acceptance Rejection Advice 999s will be matched with a document s in the reconciliation list If you use DiTranslator 8 in unattended mode remember to add the Reconcile Mail task to your Task Lists to activate just before sending and just after receiving EDI mail 4 1 3 Activating the Reconcile Mail task 1 Inthe Tree View tab expand the node in front of the network for which you will reconcile mail 156 2 Double click the Reconcile Mail task icon The system will take a few moments to log transaction sets and reconcile mail 4 1 4 Reconciliation Viewer The Reconciliation Viewer allows you to access a list of all outgoing transaction sets you have sent and all inbound transaction sets you have received The Reconcil
231. n view the UNA and UNB lines when you open the New Mail In file in WordPad or the text editor you are using The following is an example of both the UNA and UNB segments 33 UWA UNB UHOA 1 TS112013 01 TSITEST 921216 1000 5 UNG CUSDEC TSIIHNTL TP 921216 1000 5 0H 2 912 12345P455 UNH 45 CUSDEC 2 912 UH BOM 4B 111 TH 8500000052 Find UNA first line far left This marks the beginning of the UNA segment Find the fields contained within the UNA listed in order and described below Component data element separator used in this interchange Element separator used in this interchange Decimal notation A comma or period is used Release indicator A symbol that allows you to use the character delimiter as data Blank Reserved symbol Place reserved for future use Segment terminator Find UNB second line down far left This marks the beginning of the UNB segment Find the fields contained within the UNB listed in order and described below UNOA Syntax identifier 1 Syntax version 7S112013 Sender ID Your trading partner s EDI address 01 Sender ID code qualifier This qualifies the element TSITEST Recipient ID Your EDI address 921216 Date of preparation The date this interchange was prepared 1000 Time of preparation The time this interchange was prepared 5 Recipients ref pass Your password 4 2 Reading a UNG Line You can vi
232. nally enter a name or code that identifies the type of agreement under which the interchange takes place e g Customs or ECE agreement This value will be placed in UNB10 Your Partner s EDI Information BG b2sa Code Enter your Application Sender s Receiver s Code BG03 04 you and your trading partner have defined and agreed upon to uniquely identifying your partner ID Optionally enter your partner s Communications ID BGO1 you and your trading partner have defined and agreed upon to uniquely identify your partner when sending data Your Partner s EDI Information TRADACOMS 65 Code Enter the Identification of Transmission Sender Recipient Code to identify your partner This value will be placed in the STX fields FROM or UNTO depending on whether your partner is sending or receiving the data Name Enter the Identification of Transmission Sender Recipient Name to identify your partner If the Code is not used the Name is mandatory This value will be placed in the STX fields FROM or UNTO depending on whether your partner is sending or receiving the data Reference Enter the Sender s Recipient s Transmission Reference to identify your partner in the transmission This value will be placed in the STX fields SNRF or RCRF depending on whether your partner is sending or receiving the data Your Partner s Group Information EDIFACT Identification Enter an ID or coded representation
233. nces View On Direction i Errors f Both Cancel W Undcknowledged f Inbound Only iw Acknowledged f Qutbound Only Date Sent Sort By ie All First Partner f More Than T Dap Second Key C Less Than 7 Dans Third Set C Erom 1272072011 te 12 20 201 2 Use the following table to assist you with your changes Meaning of fields Direction The Reconciliation Viewer can display a list which includes all transaction sets just inbound transaction sets or just outbound transaction sets Click the desired option to activate it Don t Show Accepted Transactions Enter a check to display only those transaction sets containing something other than an A for Accepted in the Ack Code field Sort By These fields are for customizing the way the transaction sets in the Reconciliation List are sorted To see your list of choices click the down arrow to the right of each field The choices include each of the columns of information appearing in the Reconciliation Viewer list Enter your primary sort in the First field your secondary sort in the Second field and so on 4 2 The Task Queue Tasks and Task Lists that are currently executing are listed in the task queue in the order they will activate Double clicking a task icon will automatically place the task in the queue Double clicking a Task List icon automatically places all tasks within the Task List in the queue You can use the task queue to monitor the p
234. nd transaction sets you have received whether or not you have acknowledged these documents and if so the acknowledgment status This section includes the following topics Installing the Reconcile Mail task Reconciling mail Reconciliation viewer Reconciliation Viewer Preferences 4 1 1 Installing the Reconcile Mail Task The Reconcile Mail task must be installed in your network window s before you can use the Reconciliation system Use the following instructions to install the Reconcile Mail task in your network window 1 Inthe Tree View tab select the Network you would like the Reconcile Mail task to be located 2 Perform either option below to access the DiTranslator Setup window a Select File gt New b Select Ll New icon from the toolbar 3 Inthe DiTranslator Setup window select New in the Tasks tab The Task Wizard is displayed 154 Task Wizard How do you wish to add a task Lal Install Task from a Trading Partner Install Disk Create a custom Task 4 Select the Create a custom Task option and click the Next button 5 Inthe Task Type box select Reconcile Mail and click the Next button 6 Inthe Task Name box type the name you would like to display for the Reconcile Mail task Task Wizard User Un Tracked Task Select the type of Task that you wish to create Segment Terminator Task Network Generator Network Translator 7 Whe
235. nded Mode 1 Task Lists This section includes the following topics An overview of Task Lists The Task List Editor adding a new Task List Opening an existing Task List Editing a Task List 1 1 Overview of Task Lists DiTranslator 8 allows you to assemble a series of individual tasks you use to process your data into a single Task List A task is either a user defined or system defined program that processes data or starts another program DiTranslator 8 has pre defined tasks that process your EDI data The system also recognizes tasks that are Windows programs DOS batch files or DOS executable programs By executing a Task List all the tasks in the list will automatically execute in sequential order Task lists are useful for automating a sequence of frequently performed tasks They are also useful for running in unattended mode which allows you to process EDI data without the presence of an operator See the Using Unattended Mode section in this chapter for details When you install your DiTranslator 8 system networks and kits Task Lists are automatically created at the transaction set trading partner network and system wide levels in a hierarchical or modular structure Tasks in a Task List will run in the order they appear on the list unless a fatal data error occurs For example this means that if Receive Mail is executed in a Task List and there is no mail an error occurs and all other tasks in the list after
236. ndicator The agency version release of the transaction sets in this functional group 4 EDIFACT Interchange Control Structure This section includes How to read a UNA and UNB line How to read a UNG line How to read a UNH line Trading partners send data in a very specific format called the Interchange Control Structure The EDIFACT Interchange Control Structure consists of an optional Service String Advice followed by three basic levels of EDIFACT envelopes the Interchange envelope the Functional Group envelope and the Message envelope The Service String Advice UNA is a character string at the beginning of an interchange defining the syntactical characters used in the interchange The Service String Advice character string is optional The Interchange Envelope consists of three components a UNB Header segment a series of functional groups or a series of messages and a UNZ Trailer segment The UNB header segment and a UNZ trailer segment contain sender and receiver addresses The UNB and UNZ segments are mandatory 32 A functional group consists of three components a UNG Header segment a series of similar messages and a UNE Trailer segment The Header and Trailer segments envelope the series of similar messages For example if a trading partner sends a transmission containing 50 purchase orders and 30 invoices all the purchase orders belong to the same functional group and all the invoices belong to another functiona
237. nds will give you a value of 2000 stored in register 5 REGPRINT Syntax REGPRINT SkipBefore SkipAfter RptCol Length DecPlace Regnum Remarks Use REGPRINT to write a numeric register value to your report that is left justified and blank filled and has decimal places REGPRINT extracts the value from Regnum formats it according to Length and DecPlace and then prints it on the report The output data will have Length number of characters with DecPlace decimal places Example TX 0y0 1 Answer is REGSET 400 3 REGPRINT 00110723 Using the above commands the following will be printed on your report Answer is 400 00 REGPRINTNDP Syntax REGPRINTNDP SkipBefore SkipAfter RptCol Length DecPlace Regnum Remarks Use REPRINTNDP to write a numeric register value to your report that is rounded to the nearest integer right justified and blank filed with no decimal places REGPRINTNDP rounds the value from Regnum to the nearest integer formats it 234 Example REGPRINTR Syntax Remarks Example REGPRINTZ Syntax Remarks Example according to Length and then prints it on the report The output data will have Length number of characters ignoring the DecPlace argument TX U O 1 Answer is REGSET 400 3 REGPRINTNDP 0 0 O 10 2 3 Using the above commands the following will print on the report Answer is 400 REGPRINTR SkipBefore SkipAfter RptCol Length DecPlace Regnum Use REGPRIN
238. network name is case sensitive and should be 7 entered as it appears within the system AS E E AE E E S E S DE A S S E AS S T AS A E S AE S TE AS E S E AE S T AE A E S A S D AS A S E E S E AE A S S E S TS AS AE E AS E S E AS AS E A A S TE AS AE S E A S Pe oOo a EN ELORE MATE IRo Cape a TOMO E e aa A ET O O O NE ORK I S S I AE I aS S AE S IE AS I aE AS BAE S I AS I S AS EAS S IE AS I AS A AS S IE AS AS S AS S I AS A AS S AS S IE S A S T E S IE S A aS A E S IE S E AE A E S IE S S S S DS 207 The TP is where the Trading Partner Name should be entered TP is case sensitive so you must enter the name as it appears within the system This will reflect the addresses contained within the Trading Partner configuration screen COMM ID PASSWORD PARTNERS ADRRESS YOUR ADDRESS If the COMMID and PASSWORD are not used it will look like this PARTNERS ADDRESS YOUR ADDRESS SSS D S DS SSIS SSIS ISIS AS IIS IS BLAS DES ISIS IS BE ASSIS IE IS OS DAS E ISS IS SDSS E IS ASUS AS ASUS STS SAS IS NSIS SIS AS US SATS TSS AS ST EO Srna Conctrol SPECIAL 0 0 1 47 CONTROL GO Obes Sip sen SPECIAL 0 0 24 ENVDATE eer Or oO am seen SPHCIAL 0 0 31 ENVIIME X 0 0 1 Yorn Pagid COO ee Minty Tagz2 OR OP Guess ENDIF x 00 omae Sar S10 a a O S010 e ea T 0 0 71 Mod lea P S E E E IE DE AE S E W E IE DE IS S E AT E E DE TS S S A S SESS S E D S E DE IS SEIS S SES E S E E S A DE E S E E S IA DS ISS E E S A DE E S E E S A S S DS S Module is whe
239. nfigured with the same name The DDE configuration query will still execute but your response will be based on the first trading partner record that matches the specified name in the internal configuration file S ESP 2 Changing standards for a trading partner is not supported You may safely edit trading partner configurations while or in the same general time frame a DDE configuration query executes The DDE query manager will simply return the current value at the exact time the query executes However if you change a trading partner from ANSI to EDIFACT or visa versa you must restart DiTranslator 8 before configuration queries can be made of that trading partner Example Client Application Code 1 Initialize the DDE Manager Library in the create message of client top app window case WM CREATE J one a ne tne DEM 7 lpfnDDEProc MakeProcInstance FARPROC DdeCallback hInst 1f Ddelniilalize lt dwDDEInNSt FENCALLEACF sao rnp DEE tcoc EREC MOE CTETTONCI ON MessageBox hind DDEML 10i lalization railed n szAppName MB ICONSTOP cecurcn ls break E e Sueesss return 0 break 269 2 Connect with DiTranslator 8 via the DdeConnect API start the DDE conversation with the server hezoerver WdeCreavtesrringhandke dwDDhInsty EPPO CP WINANST ipveta IO ONe Dick wise isis noan endan DEET m e e a Op ey 1G 12 EEN VAIN IE hCom UdeCounecr dwWDE List hozo erver Ws zhOoomc WP CON VC ONE
240. nformation about Simple Configuration Queries ISA BG and UNB Queries ANSI and EDIFACT The Item string may contain ISA BG or UNB level information as shown in the following table ISA BG and UNB fields are unique between trading partners in DiTranslator 8 Therefore all DiTranslator 8 needs to process ISA BG and UNB fields are the server and topic strings fem Result Comment BGInboundPassword Inbound Password from the BG EG Configuration dialog is ee ein BGOutboundPassword Outbound Password from the BG EG Configuration dialog eae wind BGPartnersCommID Partner s Communication ID from the BG EG Configuration le dialog is returned BGPartnersEDICode Partner s EDI Code from the BG EG Configuration dialog is ee atime BGYourCommID Partner s Communication ID from the BG EG Configuration M dialog is returned BGYourEDICode Your EDI Code from the BG EG Configuration dialog is ee atti CustomTag Custom Tag from the Message Configuration dialog is ISAAuthInfoQualifier Authorization Information Qualifier from the ISA IEA ee cotgratondaepttnel o o ISAElementSeparator Element in the Separators section from the ISA IEA a Configuration dialog is returned ISAEnvelopeTag1 Tag1 in the Custom Envelope Tags section from the ISA aie ISAEnvelopeTag2 Tag2 in the Custom Envelope Tags section from the ISA Roane eA cannaurason ganone renet o 265 ISAlnboundPassword Inbound in the Passwords section
241. ng outbound data by manually entering it using the Data Editor 149 To create a translated file from the data in the Data Editor select Reformat from the Edit menu Then select files for reformatting and click the OK button to create the translated file From the Translated File you can generate enveloped EDI transaction sets using the Generate EDI Mail from Translated task All EDI data is appended into a single outbound file called Mail Out Ready The Mail Out Ready file is represented by the Mail Out Ready icon You can perform this task for each trading partner to whom you will send EDI mail The Send Mail task uses the data file associated with the Mail Out Ready icon to send the EDI mail to your network or directly to your partner 3 1 Steps to Process and Send EDI Data Steps for outbound processing are Access the Outbound Documents Reformat the Outbound data Generate an Outbound report Generate EDI mail Send EDI mail Send Functional Acknowledgments ee a e 3 1 1 Accessing the Outbound Documents 1 Switch to the Outbound Documents tab 2 Expand the node in front of transaction that you would like to operate 3 Select the trading partner of your desire Jutbound Documents Cae Mead from Trans H4 Verd010 Process Outbound Data 210 Ver4010 Put Import File into Database 10 Ver3010 Ss Put Import File to Translated F 10 Ver4010 Raw Data Report a 2 Database 3M 4010 i Imported F
242. ngth and then prints it to your report The output data will have Length number of characters and ignore the DecPlace argument Tx 001l Answer is REGSET 400 3 REGPRINIZNDP 0 0 07105272 235 Using the above commands the following will print out on the report Answer is 0000000400 REGSAVE Syntax REGSAVE Seg Position Length DecPlace Regnum Remarks Use REGSAVE to save rounded input numbers to a register Seg Position and Length specify the segment from which the input data is to be extracted its offset position within the segment and its length beginning at the starting position respectively REGSAVE rounds the number to DecPlace decimal places and stores the result in the register specified by Regnum Example REGSAVE 18 10 9 2 1 Using the above commands register 1 will contain 9 characters starting at position 10 of segment 18 rounded to 2 decimal places REGSET Syntax REGSET Value Regnum Remarks Use REGSET to save a value to a register REGSET stores the Value in the register specified by Regnum Example REGSET 1000 4 Using the above command register 4 will contain 1000 REGSUB Syntax REGSUB Regnum1 Regnum2 Remarks Use REGSUB to subtract one register value from another REGSUB subtracts the value in Regnum1 from the value in Regnum2 and stores the result in Regnum2 Example REGSET 100 1 REGoEL 2U0 5 REGSUB 1 5 Using the above commands you will get the value 100 stored in regist
243. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 256 Appendix G Data EFrOnS ciitciiccsciccstececsccccaceianca a 257 Appendix H Defining the Reformatted File ForMat s ssususnununnunnnnnnnnnunnununnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 261 Opening q Database MaDe a E a he tariaatwear 261 Editing the Relormatted File Formatuen a N E 262 TUG oma RECO d menan a a a ON 262 TUAINE O EO cade cece eset T E NE E E A E A ee 262 Editne Tex AENM OnctecovitacccSoabssccesennccesuasstccavibardatienusamatnsaennansica AE NAA 263 Editing Character Attributes a nroa a A S 263 Editing Field Leng Uiacsicancrraccousttends a tet tonnes eadeee sa ee nestdess 263 Appendix I DiTranslator 8 DDE SerfVe f wiscissesieciccisccdccctacetiecssscedecscestecstecddesascecveretidedsceucnstecctscdcscersnc enterds 264 OVE EW gocs a cae cee ashen ace aes bea osetia O catueteseeecueee 264 DiTGansiator s COMMANndS Vid DDE ways sicteciec aus seecnticn seeks e senraueie eeatetia de 264 DiTranslator 8 Configuration Query via DDE cccecccccesssccccesececeeececceeecceeensecessenecesseeceeseneeeetas 265 Simple Configuration Queries ISA BG and UNB Queries ANSI and EDIFACT nccc 265 Compound Configuration Queries GS Queries ANSI X 12 oo ccccccceeecsseeeesceeeeeeseseeeesseeeeeeeeas 267 Compound Configuration Queries UNG Queries EDIFACT ccccccccsssseceeeeeesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeas 268 PRES UICU IO IVS ien secninedienetss tence E E T EE 269 Example Client Application
244. nsition from testing to production either trading partner configuration information was incorrectly entered into the system or your trading partner changed your IDs In either case you will need to get the correct information and check your configurations 2 During daily processing if you were processing EDI mail successfully and the Unknown error s occurs then your trading partner probably changed your IDs or may be sending you a new transaction set that needs to be installed and or configured Note If you receive Unknown TP Mail you will always have Unknown Documents as well In this case solve the Unknown TP Mail first Also note the Unknown Documents error can occur without Unknown TP Mail 3 Solving the Unknown TP Mail Perform the following steps to compare the ISA for ANSI ASC X12 or UNB for EDIFACT segment sent by your trading partner with your trading partner settings 1 Inthe Tree View tab in the desired network level double click the Unknown TP Mailicon Files must remain in a text format in order to process through the system If you are using an editor such as Microsoft Word be sure to save the file in text format 2 Copy the ISA for ANSI ASC X12 or UNB for EDIFACT line on a piece of paper The following is an example ISA line 244 File Edit Format View Help ISA 00 O00 O1 IT SA06SENDERIDXX 01 ISAOSRECEIVE GS PO TSAQ6SENDERIDXX ISAOSRECEIVERID 2010121 3 1406 995 x 004010 J ST 85
245. nslator chapter for details System Configuration sets system configuration options User Editor sets users and their access to any item s within DiTranslator system Task Queue monitors the status of tasks currently running and those waiting to run 21 5 2 4 Help Menu The Help menu commands are listed below DiTranslator Home Page About User Guide provides you quick access to DiTranslator user guide DiTranslator Home Page brings you to DiTranslator website immediately About command displays copyright information your Customer ID and the version number of your DiTranslator system 22 6 Tab View Description 6 1 Tree View Tree View Structure Ee NS AS Network Ge 3m Trading Partner 810 Ver3010 Transaction iw Consolidate the Export File bi Sorted Mail Task Lists that were T e built within the Put Translated to Export File Trading Partner Kit Raw Data Report Data files generated Translated Mail from Task Lists above G Unknown Translated File H E OutBound J 850 Ver3010 Do 997 VerALL ransacton Process Inbound Data g Task Lists that were built by DiTranslator during installation process Process ALL data Process Outbound Data for ALL trading partners for ALL networks Receive Mail send And Receive Task Lists that are available Send Mail in the network kit Send Receive And Sort Sort Mail ______ Task that allocates file from netwo
246. numeric and must be in all capital letters Make sure you do not enter extra characters including trailing spaces entered with the Space Bar 4 Tosave these settings click the OK button The Transaction Sets or Messages for EDIFACT window is redisplayed To configure another transaction set repeat step 3 Click the Close button when you are done with your configurations Meaning of fields The following table includes fields for all envelope types and is in alphabetical order Reference only the fields you need The configuration information you enter applies only to the partner named in this configuration screen Acknowledgments to be sent when errors are encountered Click the Down arrow for this field to see that your options are Transaction Set or Message Level Acknowledgments Segment Acknowledgments and Element Acknowledgments Select the desired option depending on the level of error detail your partner wants you to send when errors are encountered in documents you have received from them The transaction set message level has the least specific error detail and the element acknowledgment has the most specific error detail Acknowledgments to be sent when no errors are encountered Click the Down arrow for this field to see that your options are Functional Group Level Acknowledgments and Transaction Set or Message Level Acknowledgments Select the desired option depending on whether your partn
247. ny file containing data will display in bold so will the trading partner that these data files belong to Double clicking on a trading partner in this screen will display all EDI processing tasks Task Lists data files and reports for that partner and transaction set 6 4 Outbound Documents 210 Ver4010 810 Ver3010 610 Ver4010 20 Ver4010 624 Ver4010 690 Ver3010 690 Ver4010 52 Ver4010 600 Ver4010 606 Ver4010 60 Ver4010 64 Ver4010 Invoice Report Raw Data Report E Database T Imported File G Translated File Unknown Generate Data This view lists all the outbound transactions that exist in DiTranslator Expand the transaction by clicking the icons in front of the transactions Any file containing data will display in bold so will the trading partner that these data files belong to Double clicking on a trading partner in this screen will display all EDI processing tasks Task Lists data files and reports for that partner and transaction set 25 6 5 Favorites Tree view Detail view Favorites inbound Documents Favorites view allows you to add shortcuts to frequently used tasks within DiTranslator and external programs This allows you to effortlessly navigate to and perform day to day tasks by accessing one view in DiTranslator 8 You can also run a specified task task list or program from Favorites view without starting DiTranslator 8 by right clicking on the DiTranslator icon in the Syste
248. o close up that portion of the list Find the Task List you want to edit and double click it Use the instructions in the Editing a Task List section to modify your Task List 1 5 Editing a Task List When the Task List window is displayed if it is a new Task List like the one below you will not see any tasks on the right half of the screen as you would for an existing Task List Untitled 2 E tical Trading Partners AA Daily Processing Networks amp the Internet Use your mouse to expand and contract the list of available tasks in the left half of the screen That is if you click a sign next to Value Added Networks then all networks installed in your system will appear in the list If you continue and click the sign next to a network then all the tasks available within the network will appear in the list as well Likewise you may contract the list by clicking signs to close up that portion of the list Once you have the tasks you want to put in your Task List displayed in this list drag the tasks from the left half of the screen and drop them on the right side This may also be done by double clicking a task from the left side to be put in the list The order which they appear on the right side of the screen is the order in which they will be executed when the Task List is run 188 ES Untitled 1 System AnyNet Receve Mail vt Networks amp the Internet EE tt Anyhlet lt a Sort Mail Networ
249. o make a report map easier to read you can use comments spaces tabs and blank lines to separate report map commands Report Writer commands include output commands register commands conditional commands and table lookup commands 4 3 Adding Comments You can use comments within a report map A comment is preceded by a semi colon For example This is an example of a comment Comments that require more than one line must have a semi colon on each line For example This is a comment that extends over a line A comment may appear on the same line as a command as long as it appears after the last argument For example xy OU Uy by Text This 1s a Comment for the TX command 4 4 Report Writer Execution A report map operates sequentially on the data in the input file For example if a command operates on the second segment the next command can operate on the third segment in the input file That next command cannot operate on the first segment in the input file 4 5 Output Commands Output commands either extract data from the input file from a temporary file used for intermediate storage or from the system and place the data in a temporary file or the output report file Report Writer has the following output commands Each of these commands is explained in detail in the Report Writer Command Reference section CODE HEADER DATEFORMAT FSWITCH DEFAULT PAGE ENDHEADER SPECIAL FCOPY TIMEFORMAT FD X 218
250. ocess you may click the Back button to display the previous screen the Cancel button to stop the installation or the Help button to access a help screen DiCentral provides you with a quick and easy way to access the DiTranslator website from your DiTranslator There you will be able to take complete advantage of its simplicity and accuracy by downloading and installing trading partner kits or individual transactions directly into your DiTranslator Trading partner kits and transactions are updated frequently so you will always have access to the latest kits and transactions Trading partners kits and transactions are available to purchase and download from DiTranslator website Follow either of these two ways below to access DiTranslator website 1 From DiCentral home page www dicentral com a Hover the mouse to Support select Web Portal select DiTranslator under System Integration section System Integration Dilntegrator c Select DiTranslator d Select Trading Partner Kit amp Partial Kit under Purchase Now section 2 From DiTranslator go to Help gt DiTranslator Home Page 53 User Guide Dilranslator Home Page 4 1 Adding a trading partner using pre configured Trading Partner Kit Follow the steps below to add a trading partner to DiTranslator 8 1 Perform either of the steps below to open DiTranslator Setup window a Goto File gt New b Select New Lion in the toolbar 2 Select the Trading Partners tab
251. of a network by modifying the network name Each network you install must have a unique name 2 2 Creating a Custom Network Follow the steps below to add a network to DiTranslator 8 1 Perform either of the steps below to open DiTranslator Setup window a Goto File gt New b Select New Lon in the toolbar 2 Select the Networks tab 3 Select New at the bottom of the screen The Network Wizard window displays 4 Select the Create a custom Network option and click the Next button 5 Enter a name for this network which will display underneath the network icon in the Name field and click the Next button The Folder the name given to the DOS directory associated with this network is displayed for your information but cannot be changed Appropriate files are copied to your system The Network Wizard is redisplayed Network Name Part Done Coy Configuration Hemio Help Trading Partners eae Network cannot be used until this item is Checked coos tte _ 6 You must configure the network you just installed before you can use it to send and receive data You may either do so now or you may simply click the Finish button and configure the network later If you click the Finish button without configuring a message box is displayed Click the Yes button to exit and configure the network later Whether you configure now or later use the instructions in the Configure A Custom Network section later in
252. omer number a Record Sequence REFO2 REFO3 ID Number 1 Inthe example above the first 4 characters 0004 indicate the Record ID Record ID 0004 refers to the REF segment 2 The following 6 characters indicate the sequence number According to the sequence number above this is the first occurrence of this segment 3 REFO1 refers to the Ref No Qual code This code begins at the 11th position and is 2 characters in length The code IT indicates Internal Customer Number 4 REFO2 refers to the Ref No The Ref No begins at the 13th position and is 30 characters in length The Ref No is the Internal Customer Number followed by the required blank spaces 5 REFO3 refers to the Desc The Desc begins at the 43rd position and is 80 characters in length This is a free form description followed by the required blank spaces Example 2 REFO1 0004 000001 IA 4949494949 Record Sequence REFO2 REFO3 ID Number 179 1 Inthe above example the first 4 characters 0004 indicate the Record ID Record ID 0004 refers to the REF segment 2 The following 6 characters indicate the sequence number According to the segment sequence number above this is the second occurrence of this segment 3 REFO1 refers to the Ref No Qual code The code begins at the 11th position and is 2 characters in length The code IA indicates Internal Vendor Number
253. on Enter the user s Windows logon ID First Name Enter the user s first name Last Name Enter the user s last name Work Phone Enter the user s work phone number E Mail Address Enter the user s e mail address Location Enter the user s location Queue Priority Enter the user s queue priority The Queue Priority is the order in which the tasks are performed on the server The highest queue priority is 1 and the lowest is 99 Notes Enter any additional information 123 Group Select the group the user belongs to by clicking the down arrow to the right of the field 4 Once you have changed the necessary information click the OK button to save your changes and return to the User Viewer 5 Select Exit from the File menu to return to the Desktop 16 Updating DiTranslator 8 This section includes the following topics Updating DiTranslator 8 Updating Network Mailbox Updating Trading Partner Kit Updating Transaction Set Version 16 1 Updating DiTranslator 8 This procedure is for updating existing DiTranslator to DiTranslator 8 0 The update program will not delete network connections trading partners transaction sets or configurations Always backup your system before updating it Do not uninstall your system or delete any of your current files or directories before updating your system After you have completed the update if you are prompted to do so restart your computer Close all of your
254. on of the ottaan EDIFACT Configuration dialog is returned XXXXXX 99 GenerateUNGind Generate UNG from the EDIFACT Configuration eee seeped XXXXXX 99 YourApp iD Your Application ID from the EDIFACT ee estewatonaogneeuret XXXXXX 99 PartnersAppID Partner s Application ID from the EDIFACT er contevstonagtreie XXXXXX 99 AppPassword Application Password from the EDIFACT Peer eotewatondnegeteds 268 XXXXXX 99 CommondAccessRef Common Access Reference from the EDIFACT eee coenatondnegsretrn o XXXXXX 99 YourlIDQualifier Your ID Qualifier from the EDIFACT Configuration Perens moggen o EE XXXXXX 99 PartnersiDQualifier Partner s ID Qualifier from the EDIFACT Ai eoewatondnegseue XXXXXX 99 EDIStandard EDI Standard from the EDIFACT Configuration pees dieireunet XXXXXX 99 SequenceOfTransfer Sequence of Transfers from the EDIFACT eee a XXXXXX 99 FirstLastFlag First Last Transfer Flag from the EDIFACT Saen eetewatondnogsetimeds o XXXXXX 99 FunctionalGroupRef Functional Group Reference from the EDIFACT Saan eotewatondagsetness o XXXXXX 99 MessageRefNum Message Reference Number from the EDIFACT pe ctersiondaspccumed o Restrictions 1 Multiple trading partners with a common name are not supported The DiTranslator 8 DDE Server interface uses the trading partner name for configuration query transactions Therefore DiTranslator 8 DDE Server query functions are not supported if there are two or more trading partners co
255. onal ID The Functional ID code for this transaction set is displayed The default value is correct This value is placed in the GSO1 field Generate Acceptance Rejection Advice select the checkbox if you want the system to automatically generate an Acceptance Rejection Advice 999 once inbound mail has been interpreted Generate Control Acknowledgments select the checkbox if you want the system to automatically generate an EDIFACT CONTRL Acknowledgment once inbound mail has been interpreted Generate BAT Segment select the checkbox to indicate whether or not you would like DiTranslator to generate the TRADACOMS BAT control header segment Generate Functional Acknowledgments select the checkbox if you want the system to automatically generate a Functional Acknowledgment once inbound mail has been interpreted Generate UNG Segment select the checkbox to indicate whether or not you would like DiTranslator to generate the EDIFACT UNG control header segment Group Control Numbers GS06 Exercise caution in changing this control setting Make sure you consult your trading partner since they use these numbers to track your transmissions Inbound The first time you receive a transmission from this trading partner your DiTranslator system expects to get a value of 1 for this control number You may overwrite this default by entering a control number you and your partner agreed upon DiTranslator expects the number to increase by on
256. oot your computer 213 Segment sequence This error occurs during the Sort Mail process when there are missing or incomplete segments or groups of segments This error also may occur if a segment is out of sequence To solve this problem contact your trading partner to re send the transmission 220 Cannot open file This message occurs when the input file of a task is not present and is required to be processed This message usually occurs during the Sort Mail process In this case the New Mail In file does not contain EDI data for the Sort Mail task to process Typically you may have double clicked on the task twice causing the file to be processed the first time The result is you either ran the sort twice or you have no mail 244 Unmatched control segments This message occurs during the execution of the Sort Mail task when missing or incomplete envelope segments are detected This error is usually the result of difficulties encountered during the receipt of the transmission To correct this contact your network or trading partner and request the transmission be re sent You can also check the New Mail In file to be certain the trailer and header segment are the same 242 341 Cannot run this task while other tasks are in queue This message occurs when a task that has a higher prority is already running when you tried to execute another task For example if you have the Interpret Mail Task Configuration window up fore the Interp
257. or 3 Network ConnectioN Seesen E E ET 42 Chapter IV Setting Up Your System ccssssssssseesneseessnessessneseesseeneseeeseseesseeseesseeseseneneesenenneseesseenenssnenaess J SECLING system OPON S iepa aa a a N a AN 43 2 Addinga Network Mailbox to Your SYStOM cccccccsssccecessececeenececeeescceceesececeenecesseeeceeseusecesseneess 46 2 1 Adding a Network Using the Asynchronous Network Collection cccccccsscccesssececeeseeeeeeees 46 2 2 Cheating A Custom NELWORK rss250 895Gehetsnibce dente n a a a N 49 S Conieuringe d NetWork oincaccch cnstecssarees aa tnteneennaceeh costeeetewitasaa Gadacacees ietoh eran A A ees 50 3 1 Configuring a Network Installed Using the Asynchronous Network Collection essc 51 32 COMTUNNE a CUSTOMINGLWON Kicizcince tat tethers it ete citnes ie ieee a Colecten A 51 4 Adding a Trading Partner to Your SYSt M cccccssecccsseccceseecesccceececeeceeeeceeeeeesencessuecesseceneness 53 4 1 Adding a trading partner using pre configured Trading Partner Kit ccccccesecceeesseeeeeeeeees 54 4 2 Creating a CUSTOM Trading Partner cccccesccccsscccessccceececeececeneceeeeeeeencesseucesseecesseeeneneeees 58 5 CONTEURING a Trading Panne seswe tetas mecatancencunstcgpateh aceite beienadaeadansis onamvacap weiadUesaneeeiaeeeamevans Segara 61 6 Moving a Trading Partner from One Network to another ssseccecceseeceeeceeseceesseeseeeeseaeess 66 7 Addinga Transaction Set Tor Y
258. or Archive commands in the File menu Purging deletes the data Archiving stores it 1 2 4 Generate an Inbound Report After you interpret mail you can generate a report of the document s you received Once you generate a report you can view or print it The Raw Data Report icon generates a report describing the EDI translated data for the particular inbound transaction set A raw data report will contain each segment and data element present in the translated file DiTranslator s raw data report format lists one data element per line and is center aligned with the EDI standard data element name on the left and the value placed in that data element on the right Fields without data will not appear in the report You may have a Hub or custom report icon e g P O Report that you wish to use Hub reports are included with Trading Partner Kits or you may have customized the reports yourself A Hub report is customized in its format for a particular trading partner and transaction set It describes received EDI data in an easy to understand format and follows your trading partner s segment specifications 1 Delete any previously generated reports before continuing with the next step To do this right click on the report icon and select Purge Data 2 Inthe Inbound window there must be data present in the Translated Mail file to generate a report Double click the icon of the report you want to generate e g the P O Report icon Do
259. or System 4 System Ai Maps 4 Maps o L Ansi d Standard C TskLists 4 Tsklists User User Details about each of the directories are found in the following table DiTranslator The DiTranslator Directory is the program directory which stores all of the DiTranslator 8 program files tasks maps and directory files The default program directory name is DiTranslator The DiTranslator 8 Directory contains system files and other files that DiTranslator 8 creates during processing The data directory holds all of the files contained within the network and trading partner menus The default data directory name is EData directory The Network sub directory contains network files such as MAIL_IN NEW MAIL_OUT NEW etc a Each network mailbox has a corresponding Network sub 253 The Partner sub directory has files for that trading partner mail slot such as MAIL_IN TP It also has a Standards sub directory Standard The Standards sub directory ANSI EDIFACT leads to all the Transaction Set sub directories or Message sub directories installed for that mail slot Transaction Set This sub directory leads to the versions for a particular type of transaction set or message For example 810 for an ANSI ASC X12 Invoice Standard Version This sub directory contains any database files for this particular transaction set or message type and version It also has an Archive sub directory where database file archives are
260. ore SkipAfter RptCol Length Tregnum Remarks Example TREGSAVE Syntax Use TREGPRINTR to right justify a text register print The length specified will be the exact size of the output field right justified Any additional characters longer than the length will be discarded See TREGPRINT for additional information TREGSET This 15 a test 1 TREGPRINTER 0 1 0 20 1 Using the above commands the following will print to the report This is a test TREGSAVE Seg Position Length Tregnum 239 Remarks Use TREGSAVE to save text to a register Seg Position and Length specify the segment from which the input data is to be extracted its offset position within the segment and its length beginning at the starting position respectively TREGSAVE stores the input data in the text register specified by Tregnum Example TREGSAVE 18 10 20 1 Using the above command text register 1 will contain 20 characters starting at position 10 of segment 18 TREGSET Syntax TREGSET Text value Tregnum Remarks Use TREGSET to save a value to a text register TREGSET stores the quoted string Text value in the register specified by Tregnum Example TREGSET This is a test 4 Register 4 will contain the text value This is a test TREGTOREG Syntax TREGTOREG Treg Reg Remarks This command will change a string to a numeric Treg can be either a quoted string or a text register number TREGTOREG will change the value repr
261. orting Data from DiTranslator 8 You can export files on a system wide level files from all your networks trading partners and transaction sets or by individual transaction sets The term export has the same meaning as the term upload 1 1 Exporting Files to another Computer or Application You may export all inbound transaction sets by using the inbound consolidated file This file is located at the System Wide Data Files window and is represented by the Export Consolidated File icon There are two ways to place a file in the Export Consolidated File 1 Use the Consolidate the Export File task to merge all the inbound mail files into a single file For every network and its trading partners run the Consolidate the Export File task for each transaction set that contains mail you want to append You can then use the Export File mail_in con to export your data In order to use the Consolidate the Export File task each transaction set must have an export file Use the Put Translated to Export File task to reformat a translated file 2 Configure the Interpret Sorted Mail task to output directly to the export consolidated file To do this right click the Interpret Sorted Mail task and select Properties Select the CON file type from the Output File selection box The consolidated file is in the following DOS directory under the following file name C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator USER MAIL_IN CON The consolidated mail file appe
262. osition InputLength Test value other commands ENDIF Use IFNE to execute other commands if input data does not equal a test value Seg Position and InputLength specify the segment from which the input data is to be extracted its offset position within the segment and its length beginning at the starting position respectively If the extracted input data is not equal to the quoted string Test value the commands between the IFNE command and the ENDIF command are executed Otherwise if the next segment in the input file is another segment of the same number the IFNE command is executed again LENE y LS 10 3 id TX 0 0 1 Message Type TX 0 0 1 5 LOOP 13 FOO 07 1500153240 5 7 UBF 0 CODE GEN General Information CODE TRA Transportation Information DEFAULT Other Instructions NOFIELD No Field Sent LOOP la TX Uy Oy ly Customer Name i FD 0 017151030 LJBF U ENDLOOP ENDLOOP ENDIF If the 3 characters starting at offset position 10 in segment 13 are not blanks the commands between the IFNE and the ENDIF will be executed The condition will be checked for every segment 13 that is encountered IFREQ amp ENDIF Syntax IFREQ Regnum Test value other commands ENDIF 228 Remarks Use IFREQ to execute other commands based on a register value If the value in the register specified by Regnum is equal to the value of the quoted string Test value
263. ound Documents Eigg System Management Elfed Trading Partners 2 Use your mouse to expand and contract the list of available items in the left half of the screen 121 That is if you click the sign next to Networks amp the Internet then all networks installed in your system will appear in the list If you continue and click the sign next to a network then all the tasks available within the network will be displayed in the list as well You may contract the list by clicking sign to close up that portion of the list 3 Select the item task for which you wish to add new or change current restriction s Open select the checkbox to restrict the user from opening the specified item If this restriction is set the item will be hidden from the user s view Properties select the checkbox to allow the user to open the specified item but restrict their ability to change the properties of that item Other select the checkbox to restrict any action the specified item may have other than Open or Properties When a restriction is set the item will be bold to indicate the restriction has been set 4 Once you have changed all of the necessary restrictions for the group click the OK button to save your Changes and return to the User Viewer window 5 Select Exit from the File menu to return to the Desktop 15 4 Creating a User Profile 1 Perform either option below to create new user a Click the Add User icon on the
264. our Partner aucesincdciice demir Rael ede Ae 68 SO COMMPUNING a aNs oe Ussesep vests pesa et a a a 71 9 Deleting a Transaction Set wvarcasacvuncetevectbsdacentesdevecassdsoncesadavedteadacastuadauw cevddeuntecdaveatbeSasanteedawnncceasess 76 10 Customizing Data Element CodeS isnrenea rana nan E R 78 Jd COMPSUGING Repor erea aa a a a a a E E 80 11 1 Configuring Raw Data Reports ccccccccsssccccesscccceesececsusececeeeecceeeescceseesecessuneceseugeceesaeeeeetas 80 t12 CONSUMING HUD REDOT S uia N 82 12 Adding and Configuring Tasks 2svcnidendiend a n E nenanimennwnke 84 12 1 Consolidating the Export File Task Configuration cccccccssseccccsecceeesececeesecesseneceesenseeees 84 12 2 Generating EDI Mail from Translated Task Configuration cccccccssseccceeseceeeeseceeseneeeeeas 86 12 3 Interpreting Sorted Mail Task Configuration cccccccssseccccssscceceseceseesececsuseceeeeeceeeeseeetas 89 12 4 Network Generator Task Installation and Configuration cccccesccccsssececeseceeeeesceeseeeeeeeas 93 12 5 Putting Import File into Database Task ConfiguratiOn ccccccsssssecccceesseeccecseesececesaaaeeess 97 12 6 Putting Import File to Translated File Task Configuration cccccccsssececeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 99 12 7 Putting Translated to Export File Task Configuration ccssccccsssececcesececeeesceeseeseceseeneess 101 12 8 Sorting Host File Task CONFIQUrATION cccc
265. outbound data file In the Inbound or Outbound Documents tab expand the transaction set you wish to view by clicking the node to the left of its icon The transaction set will be bold if there is data to be viewed Double click the trading partner icon for which you will view a transaction set If a file has data in it the mailbox will have its flag in the up position Double click the desired data file to view it in the Data Editor 143 When you view a Translated File an Export File or an Imported File the Data Editor defaults to Read Only mode This means you may view the data but not change it If you would like to make modifications to the data unselect Read Only from the File menu to activate the Read Write mode Once Read Write mode has been activated see the Using the Data Editor section for assistance with entering data D Running the Data Editor Outside of DiTranslator 8 You may run the Data Editor without starting up DiTranslator 8 using the command line options listed below Each option begins with a slash White space delimits options and their values Italics identify values FILE Name In this required command Name is the file to be edited and may contain path specification MAP Name In this option the Name is the name of the map for this transaction set The default is calculated from WORK STANDARD Standard In this option the Standard is the name of the standard for this transaction s
266. ove the check mark and activate the Read Write mode Exit File Use this command to exit the Data Editor and return to the Process Outbound window Undo Edit Use this command to reverse the last editing action done in the active record Cut Edit Use this command to remove the currently selected data from the record and put it on the clipboard This command is unavailable if there is no data currently selected Copy Edit Use this command to copy selected data onto the clipboard This command is unavailable if there is no data currently selected Paste Edit Use this command to insert a copy of the clipboard contents at the insertion point This command is unavailable if the clipboard is empty New Edit Use this command to go to a blank record of the same type as the current record For example if you are currently viewing an N1 record and choose the New command a blank N1 record will appear Delete Edit Use this command to delete the current segment and its child records Duplicate Edit Use this command to duplicate a record and all its child records For example if you have a loop of information that is more alike than different than the current loop for example line item information duplicate the current record and its child records and just change the data that is different for the duplicated record Reformat Edit Use this command to display the Reformat window Check the boxes of all transaction sets you want to
267. particular model can contain V 32 bis for signal speed V 42 for error control and MNP for data compression Modem manufacturers mix and match which set of standards their modems support 41 The important fact to remember is that not all asynchronous modems are compatible with each other and not all asynchronous modems are compatible with all VANs 9 DiTranslator 8 Network Connections DiCentral delivers turn key communication network connections as well as a list of recommended modems on a per VAN basis in order to minimize the complexities discussed previously A network connection is easily installed into the DiTranslator 8 system These turn key network connections allow you to connect to VAN and point to point nodes with minimal configuration on your part Both asynchronous and bisynchronous connections are supported Once you have installed a network connection on your system you can find online documentation containing specific information related to that particular network using the following instructions 1 Inthe Desktop window double click the Networks amp the Internet icon In the Networks amp the Internet window double click the icon for the desired network 3 Inthe Network Wizard click the Network Help to display online documentation for this particular network You are not required to use DiTranslator 8 network connection software for your communications For example if you desire to use DiTranslator 8 as a work sta
268. ped in immediately after the The comments are for your internal purposes only 176 Section 4 Transaction Set Message Data Format A particular Record Type is fixed in length appearing on one line However different Record Types may have a different fixed length Each Record Type has three parts Pat oerion Record ID Length is 4 characters Sequence Length is 6 characters Data Field s Left justified space filled to the maximum size specified in the corresponding EDI Standard Example 0001 000001 00SA02344 One Record in file Record Sequence Data Elements ID Number Remarks The Record ID corresponds to the position of the segment in the transaction set definition per the EDI standard it refers to Each record represents a single occurrence of a segment For example segment 0001 is a BIG record for the ANSI ASC X12 invoice transaction set The Sequence number refers to a system generated number indicating the specific occurrence of the segment type The segment sequence number increases by one with each occurrence of that segment Data Elements each transaction set or message has a corresponding XRF file that describes the segment layout including the data element positions Data elements should be left justified blank filled and sized to the length specified in the XRF file Unused elements are represented by blanks Refer to the XRF file to reference the Transaction Set data section of the DiTran
269. r Both you and your trading partner have private mailboxes in a single VAN Your computer is at one physical location Your trading partner s computer is at a second physical location And the VAN resides at a third physical location Your trading partner s computer first sends the EDI Purchase Orders to the VAN A file transfer mechanism is used to move the Purchase Orders from your trading partner s computer to the VAN The EDI format includes an outer envelope much like the outer envelope of a paper letter which defines the sender s address in this case your trading partner s address and a receiver s address in this case your address Typical envelopes are the ANSI ASC X12 ISA BG and EDIFACT UNB envelopes When the VAN receives the EDI Purchase Orders the VAN reads the envelope to determine the ultimate destination of the data In this case the receiver s address indicates that the receiver is you and the VAN will place the EDI Purchase Orders in your electronic mailbox The communications session between your trading partner s computer and the VAN is then terminated Note that your computer is not yet directly involved with this process At this point the EDI Purchase Orders are stored in your mailbox You may then use DiTranslator 8 to launch a communications session between your computer and the VAN at your convenience The DiTranslator 8 communications module that you are using will automatically request the VAN sen
270. r and choosing Hidden to enter or remove a check Reformat A check in this box means the segment data will be included in the Imported File RFM Use the following table to assist you in editing the Element Properties screen Name Modify the field name as you want it to appear in the DB Map Editor and in your data entry screen Type Change the field type as desired for validation purposes Choices are alphanumeric numeric fixed point decimal real floating point decimal date time code and logical Length This is the maximum length for the data element according to the EDI standard and cannot be changed Element This number is the data element reference number which can be used to look up the data element in your EDI standards manual and which cannot be changed Default There is nothing pre entered in the data element at the time of data entry unless you change this value from None to Literal user determined text Date YYMMDD Functional Group e g IN for X12 invoice Set e g 810 for X12 invoice Time HHMMSS or Version e g 003010 All values other than Literal will be automatically entered by your DiTranslator 8 system If Default is set to Literal then enter the characters you want displayed in this data element at the time of data entry Justify Left When data entered is not as long as the maximum length allowed this option will place excess spaces to the right of the data
271. r the network trading partner and transaction eg 850 you would like to have turnaround e Select Convert PO to Invoice e Document Turn Around uses the translated data in the Translated Mail file After you ran the Interpret Sorted Mail task in the inbound process the Translated Mail icon then contained the processed data Before running the Document Turn Around task make sure the Translated Mail icon contains the transaction set data you wish to convert Double click the previously generated report to view the data to confirm this 135 i NS_AS ae Ja 810 Ver3010 850 Ver3010 InBound Consolidate the Export File Interpret Sorted Mail Process Inbound Data Put Translated to Export File Convert PO to INVOICE og P O Report Raw Data Report E Epot File Gl Sorted Mail Translated Mail g Unknown Translated File e When the conversion process is complete the resulting data is located in the outbound transaction set in the Imported File 2 Now convert the outbound transaction set to a format suitable for the Data Editor e Inthe Tree View tab expand the network trading partner and transaction set eg 810 you wish to process by clicking on the sign to the left of its icon e Inthe Outbound check for data in the Imported File When data is present the Imported File icon shows the red flag on the mailbox in the up position e Double click the Put Import File into Database icon NS AS 610 Ver3010 InBound G
272. radingPartner Standard Transaction Set Version Tanelared Edata NS_AS2 3M Ansi 850 3010 Consolidated et Network l Edata Network Edata NS_AS2 3 4 DiTranslator 8 File Format Description A DiTranslator 8 file has five sections Section 1 File Type Tag of the Envelope Header Section 2 Envelope Header information Section 3 Start Set Section 4 Transaction Set Message Data Section 5 End Set Note See the DiTranslator 8 File Format section in this chapter for examples of the file format 3 5 About The Organization of the File 174 Section 1 File Type Tag of Envelope Header Section 2 Envelope Header Information Occurs once for each Section 3 Start Set transaction set for the Section 4 Transaction Set Message Data same trading partner Section 5 End Set Occurs once for each network trading partner combination 3 6 File Section Descriptions The following descriptions include an example for each file section and a detailed description of each record 1 A record beginning with a semi colon refers to control information 2 Arecord that does not begin with a semi colon refers to data 3 You need a carriage feed after return and line the last character of each record Section 1 File Type Tag for Envelope Header Format File Type Tag Example Host File Remarks The File Type Tag of the Envelope Header indicates the type of file you ar
273. ransaction set each time you send data to your partner you can create a template consisting of all of your repetitive information pre entered for you The Data Editor can work in conjunction with the Document Turn Around feature See the Creating Outbound Data Using Document Turn Around section in this chapter for details The Data Editor validates data you enter based on EDI standards to cut down on mistakes Pressing Enter after entering data in a segment in the Edit View window validates the following Ifasegment or data element is mandatory you will be required to fill it in Ifthe data element is an EDI code you must enter only a valid code most of the coded fields have a pull down list so you can choose from a list of valid codes with descriptions or press F1 Dates and or time format The Data Editor can view any data file at any stage of processing after the file has been interpreted in your system in a user friendly format You may view any inbound data that you have received You may customize the look of your data entry screens using the instructions in Creating Custom Data Entry Screens in the Custom Data Entry Screens Reports and Document Turn Around chapter You may run the Data Editor without starting up DiTranslator 8 See the Running the Data Editor Outside of DiTranslator 8 section in this chapter for details Here is what the Data Editor looks like Menu Bar Toolbar
274. re you will enter the Trading Partners Module address and 3 your Module address found within the Transaction Set configuration screen D S N S E S S S S S S E S E S DS N S A AS E S D N DS S AS E S S S DS S S E S DS S DS S S E S S S OS S S E S S S DS S S E S S S DS N S E S DS S DS N DS S S S S S PL Ora Seb Control SPECTAM O 0 IMT SH ICONTROL CO Oy aa Gee Oem tee SEKA 0 0 4 GROUPCONTROM x 070717 Gaps Lac D0 Oy Gre TagZ X 0 0 1 V ACCEPTE Turnaround pN Body of data here kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxxk xx xx k oe SB ND Sal EORI ONE e ores Tx 0 0 1 END CHS lOn VEE SOTON OCSCOlOn CROUP all TX UG Module EGO OF Set Contre lS SPECIAL 0 0 4 sh CONT ROM X 0 071 cep Conk rol SPECIAL O71 4 GROUPCONTROl Dx 0 Op Gre fag l TA 0 07 Grp lagZ TX A O E The only item you may need to change in the above code is the information located in the Start Set and End Set lines Both of those lines should reflect the information about the transaction set you are creating For example if you are creating an Invoice of version 3030 you should change the version from 003010 to 003030 3 3 Sample Document Turn Around Instructions A report map operates sequentially on the data in the input file For example if a command operates on the second segment the next command can operate on the third segment in the input file but not on the first segment in the input file Document Turn Arounds may be tricky in this respect
275. reerssrressrrrresrrressreresrrressreresrrrrssrereserressreresrrressne 187 iedala eaea E ISG O E E EO AIE E PEA E EEE 188 2 Usine Unattended MoE vic cesiascsdnscsretebansecddncercaastecensactotancesdnnesoadsboswenesearsueeseie rectneansecdseteueueteeanenns 190 2 1 Scheduling Task Lists and COMMANAS cccceseccccesseceeesececeesececcescceseuscceceueceeeegeceesaneeeetas 190 2 2 DiTranslator 8 Scheduler Menu CommandS ssssssssenrsssssssereresssssssrrresssssssrrrressssseerereesssse 192 Chapter VIII Custom Data Entry Screens Reports and Document Turn Around ssns 193 1 Creating Custom Data Entry Screens ssessessessessesseeseesersersersrrsrrsersersrreressrsrrsreeressessesseeseeseese 193 2 Creating Custom Reports iecesaciiistievantecrorinenstecanetarasd tneatedinturvendannsdercataennviibetdediseucispianederencniy ines 199 2 1 Steps for Creating a Custom Report FOrMat cecccccsssecccesseccceenecceeeeseceeeesecesseeceesenseeeeas 199 2 2 Sample Custom Report Map for 850 Version 4010 cccccescccceeseccceeesececeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeas 203 3 Creating Document Turn Around Instructions ccccceseccceseeceescceeeeceeeueceeeeeeeeeeesuecessueceeeneeees 204 STB CLOC yO DCE I ene mee oe ne See eee eS E ee 205 3 2 Steps for Creating Document Turn Around INStrUCtIONS ccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeenseeeees 205 3 3 Sample Document Turn Around INStFUCTIONS cccccccseseccceesecccceeceeeeeseceseesecess
276. ret Sorted Mail task and try to run the Interpret Sorted Mail task you would get this message 514 Data element delimiter in inbound mail not configured for TP amp 541 Sub element delim in inbound mail not configured for TP These errors occur during the Interpret Sorted Mail task when either the data element or sub element delimiter is missing from your trading partner s configuration Element and sub element delimiters separate information in your ISA for ANSI ASC X12 or UNA line for EDIFACT To solve this error you will have to first check what delimiters your trading partner is sending by viewing the New Mail In data After recording the information you will then check the information in the Trading Partner Wizard window where your trading partner s configuration resides Please follow the steps below 1 Inthe Tree View tab in the desired network level double click the New Mail In icon 2 Depending on the error you wish to solve record the element or sub element delimiter from the ISA or UNA line The element delimiter is the fourth character down from the beginning of the line The sub element delimiter is the last character of the line Typical delimiters are an asterisk and gt greater than character Exit out of Notepad 3 Refer to Appendix A for the decimal equivalent for the delimiter character you recorded Example an is 42 anda gt is 62 You will have to enter the decimal for
277. ric N Segment Number Offset number of characters come before this element Length number of characters make up the maximum length of the element Description Report Writer commands will always refer to the individual elements by their segment number offset and length just as they are found in the XRF file All elements are left justified and blank filled to their maximum length as defined by the ANSI ASC Standards Once you understand how to read an XRF file you need to determine which segments and elements you will be receiving in your inbound file the example we will use is a Purchase Order and which segments and elements you need to send in your outbound file POONER SAD Oeo oO OOO OE OO PREG Shy I eo REGADD 137 20 LPREO 205 1 X 0 0 07 RSTOLMaTTtTEC TOTOO ENDIF The Network is where you will enter the name of the communication network you are using The network name is case sensitive and should be entered as it appears within the system POO E ENVELOPE MATE Receipt Ia 00 Ly Network SEKCANTO O OANE ORK PA OTO ITN ERSE SRE el By AN Eryas Oli 91 coy ed el E 07 070 Gay The TP is where the Trading Partner Name should be entered TP is case sensitive so you must enter the name as it appears within the system This will reflect the addresses contained within the Trading Partner configuration screen The order in which it appears is 214 COMM ID PASSWORD PARTNERS ADRRESS YO
278. riter would have skipped to this point before continuing Code Qual Code Qual Extracts the N1103 from tche PO anci prints LE im tche j NLOS of the invoice Code Code Extracts the N1104 from che PO anc prints Lt in the N104 of the invoice Allows for the existence of multiple occurrences of the N3 segment Creates the N3 segment in the invoice Extracts the sequence number from each occurrence of the Nl in the Purchase order Address Info Address Info p Extracts che N1104 from che PO anc prints sot in the N104 of the invoice Address Info ING Cheater bing ato ra Thie is a condicional command that checks to see if N302 is blank I it ig NOL blank iReporm Writer carries out the following command Extracts the N3902 from che PO anc prints it in the N302 of the anvoice This is the matching statement for IFNE above If element N302 was blank Report Writer would have skipped to this point before continuing This closes the LOOR 0031 211 at NAYS E KOO 2 PhO Ole f ae aoe aon a CR Ca Ca eR ea ea ee a ER e Olas en Sa pe a el e Ceng oa pPrICTEGCAINI ODR a a a ee a ae OS ee Se LOOPS 0s Allows for the existence of multiple occurrences of the N4 segment PX 0 0 1 Oe Ore Creates the N4 segment in the invoice EBD Oy Ope UUs 4 Gy LJBE 0 Extracts the sequence number from each Occurrence oF che NA an the Purchase order 2 NIOL A 0052 10 19 City Name MIOL A 0009 10 19 City Name ED 0 0 1
279. rk level G Mail Out Ready to appropriate trading partner Data files generated from the network level task lists This view display all activities within DiTranslator in the tree structure It also provides platform to add and modify configuration of networks trading partners transaction sets data files reports EDI processing tasks and Task Lists 23 6 2 Detail View Networks Tasks and Files Process Inbound Data Process Outbound Data Receive Mail Send And Receive Send Mail Send Receive And Sort Sort Mail Mail Out Ready G New Mail In G Status NEW G Unknown TP Mail This view organizes activities within DiTranslator to categories It also provides platform to add and modify configuration of networks trading partners transaction sets data files reports EDI processing tasks and Task Lists 24 6 3 Inbound Documents 204 Ver4010 210 Ver4010 610 Ver3010 610 Ver4010 S20 Ver4010 624 Ver4010 690 Vers010 90 Ver4010 92 Ver4010 Ver4010 696 Ver4010 InBound Document Files a7 Consolidate the Eeport Fi s Interpret Sorted Mail gt Frocess Inbound Data fs Put Translated to Esport Convert PO to INVOICE FO Report Raw Data Report E Export File INVIDS 810 SHIPIDS 856 T Sorted Mail Gl Translated Mail 2 Unknown Translated File This view lists all the inbound transactions that exist in DiTranslator Expand the transaction by clicking the icons in front of the transactions A
280. rogress of your inbound or outbound processing 1 Perform either option below to access the Task Queue 160 Goto Tools gt Task Queue Select sc Task Queue icon on the toolbar The Task Queue window is displayed Di Task Queue Status when Details The Task Queue displays tasks Task Lists that are in the task queue waiting to execute in the order they will execute The Task Queue also displays the status of the task Task List when the task Task List started to execute and any details about that task Task List 2 Click the Close button to close the Task Queue window Click the Delete button to delete the selected task Task List from the task queue 4 3 Audit Log Viewer The Audit Log Viewer will display all of the task execution warnings errors and status messages that have occurred To Access the Audit Log Viewer 1 Perform either option below to access the Audit Log Viewer Go to Tools gt Audit Log Viewer Select Audit Log icon on the toolbar The Audit Log Viewer is displayed 161 ea Audit Log Viewer File View Help SHS FX VOR Error 1119 1119 1119 1119 2706 2705 1119 1119 1121 1001 1003 Description Starting Task Starting Task Starting Task Starting Task Starting Task Object Added Object Added Starting Task Starting Task Finished Task Application Dilranslator Dilranslator Dilranslator Dilranslator Dilranslator 20 2011 1 14 04 PM 20 2011 1 11 23 PM 20 2011 1
281. rol There is a Topic string which serves different functions depending on the situation There is also an Item string which is only used during query operations Client applications need to create these DDEML strings via the DdeCreateStringHandle DDEML API DiTranslator 8 Commands via DDE The Server string must be TPPC The Topic string must be Connect or System however Connect is the preferred string There must be no item specified in the DdeClientTransaction call The command you wish to pass to DiTranslator 8 is specified as a far pointer to a buffer owned by the client application The command string may be enclosed in braces to provide backwards compatibility with old DiTranslator 8 versions The following table enumerates all the commands the DiTranslator 8 server supports A o CLEARQUEUE Removes all items from the Task Queue The DDE program is hidden from view but still processes commands Paame e commenda wane The bE mewn ines curve asestieTesesetobedisined OO 264 The DDE program is shut down without any questions Task queue is TERMINATE The DDE program is shut down normally User will be prompted if emg Task numbers may be found by pressing the F2 key when a task le O Tasklist identifiers i e L7 may be found by pressing the F2 key when EE DiTranslator 8 Configuration Query via DDE The Server string must be TPPC The Topic string must be the trading partner you wish to get i
282. rt here if you are creating outbound data from another application 2 Start here if you are creating outbound data using document turnaround 3 Start here if you are creating outbound data manually through Data Editor Explanation for the diagram above If you are creating outbound data by importing data from another application The application must place all the information for all the trading partners in the Import Host Sort File Use the Sort Host Data File task to sort the data by producing data in the Import File icon for each applicable trading partner for whom the data is intended The Import Files are in flat file format The Imported File starts the process of outbound data If this file exists you may post the data into the database via the Put Import File into Database task if you need to add to view or change the data Then you must use the Reformat command in the Data Editor to create a Translated File From the Translated File you can generate your EDI mail using the Generate EDI Mail from Translated task The Send Mail task uses the data file associated with the Mail Out Ready icon to send the EDI mail to your network or directly to your partner Notes For complete details about interfacing with other PC or mainframe applications outside of DiTranslator 8 see the Interfacing With Other Applications chapter If you are creating outbound data using Document Turn Around You first must receive your mail Document Tur
283. s Number Pl 070 16 0001 10 6 hb0BF 0 TX 1 0 1 SSSS 3 S SSS SS SS SS SSS SS SS SS SSS SSS ENDHEADER The statements between HEADER and ENDHEADER identify the header to be used in your report This header will print at the top of each new page and when the purchase order number changes it will be reflected in the header The example above will print out the following Top Of Report P O Number 123456 IFEQ amp ENDIF Syntax Remarks IFEQ Seg Position InputLength Test value other commands ENDIF Use IFEQ to execute other commands if input data equals a test value Seg Position and InputLength specify the segment from which the input data is to be extracted its offset position within the segment and its length beginning at the starting position respectively If the extracted input data is equal to the quoted string Test 227 Example value the commands between the IFEQ command and the ENDIF command are executed Otherwise if the next segment in the input file is another segment of the same number the IFEQ command is executed again TFEO O0Z1 10 2 P47 TX 0 0 15 De Not PreShip ENDIF If the 2 characters starting at offset position 10 in segment 21 are equal to P4 then Do Not PreShip will print in your report starting in column 1 The condition will be checked for every segment 21 that is encountered IFNE amp ENDIF Syntax Remarks Example IFNE Seg P
284. s completed you will have sent Functional Acknowledgments for all mail received since you last executed the Send Mail task The inbound Interpret Sorted Mail task can be configured to automatically generate Functional Acknowledgements or to disable the generation of Functional Acknowledgments at the document level altogether See the Interpret Sorted Mail Task Configuration section of the Setting Up Your System chapter for details on configuring Functional Acknowledgment 4 Additional DiTranslator 8 Features There are several features in DiTranslator 8 that are not mandatory to use in your routine processing but you may find that you could use one or more of them at some point to enhance your processing Unattended Mode Use the Scheduler to schedule your processing to run automatically without an operator present You can build a schedule containing one or more tasks or Task Lists for one or more partners to run on specific days or every day and at the time s of day you want them to run See the Automating DiTranslator 8 chapter in this User Guide for complete details on this function 153 Functional Acknowledgment Reconciliation This feature enables you to access a list of all outgoing transaction set you have sent via any network to any trading partner and easily determine whether your trading partner s has acknowledged these documents and if so whether they were accepted accepted with errors or rejecte
285. send to your trading partner You must reformat a transaction set in order to generate a transaction set as EDI mail and send it to your trading partner If you want to delete the transaction set after sending it to your partner check the Delete after Reformat box Leave TRN as the Output To option and click the OK button Delete Sets Edit Use this command to display the Delete Sets window Enter a check next to all document numbers you want to delete from the Data Editor and click the OK button Options Edit Use this command to display the Options window Select a date format check the desired boxes indicating when you want confirmation screens to display and indicate whether you want to automatically delete the document from the Data Editor after reformatting and then click the OK button First View Use this command to move to the first record of the same type as the current record For example if you entered data into four N1 records choosing First brings you to the first N1 record of the four Next View Use this command to display the next record for data entry if you are entering a new document or for viewing and editing existing data Pressing Enter is a short cut for the Next command When viewing existing data you may display records sequentially giving you an opportunity to enter new records or edit existing records The Next command displays records of the same type as the current record until you press Enter in a record wi
286. session The signaling speed is usually designated as the number of bits per second bps sent Common speeds are 1200 2400 9600 and 14400 bps The trend is definitely toward higher data rates 9600 bps 14400 bps and higher Not all VANs support these higher speeds For cases in which a VAN does support a higher speed you are not always guaranteed the data throughput will be at the highest speed Noise bursts and low quality lines can cause higher speed modems to fall back to a lower speed some modems do this automatically some do not The situation is much like that of a high performance car you can t usually utilize all the horsepower it has 3 3 Data Compression A common characteristic of the new breed of asynchronous modems is to have provisions to compress data before it is sent as electrical signals on the communications line This has the overall 40 effect of increasing the throughput while still using the same signaling speed There are varying degrees of data compression offered by the various data compression standards As with signaling speed if a certain type of data compression standard is used both modems must support it Common data compression standards are tabulated later in the Data Communication Standards section of this chapter 3 4 Error Control Error free communications is absolutely essential An error which drops or adds a digit in an invoice could mean disaster There are a number of different error
287. settings Select the Active checkbox to enable a special print utility If you select the Active checkbox type the print utility executable file name in the Name box Editor If you want to change the file editor for this data file enter the executable file name Notes The changes you make to this data file are valid only for this file which is associated with the specific network or transaction set and partner identified in the title bar of the window where the task you are configuring resides 14 Adding Shortcuts The Favorites window allows you to add shortcuts to frequently used DiTranslator 8 tasks and external programs You can also create folders so that you can group a set of tasks and or programs together This allows you to effortlessly navigate to and perform day to day tasks by accessing one window in your DiTranslator 8 system This section includes the following topics Creating a Shortcut Creating a Folder Running a Shortcut Outside Of DiTranslator 8 14 1 Creating a Shortcut Using the Shortcut Wizard 1 Select the Favorites tab 2 Right click on the window and select New Favorites then Shortcut from the pop up menu New Favorites Folder Ctrl F Open Ctrl O Shortcut Ctrl Run Ctrl R Run Unattended Ctrl T The Shortcut Wizard is displayed 116 Shortcut Wizard Create Ir f Favortes f Start Menu f Startup hs b Outbound Documents C Desktop W System Management C Trading Partners
288. sion dbm This field is for Raw Data reports only Unique Print Utility Change the Unique Print Utility settings if you are using a special print utility for this report Select the Active checkbox to enable a print utility In the Name box type the print utility executable file name and put the file in the Code directory where your DiTranslator program files are installed 11 2 Configuring Hub Reports You may have a Hub or custom report icon e g ACME PO Report you wish to use Hub reports are included with DiTranslator Kits You may also create a custom report yourself see Creating Custom yy lt Reports in the Custom Data Entry Screens Reports And Document Turn Around chapter A Hub report is customized in its format for a particular trading partner and transaction set It describes received EDI data in an easy to understand format and follows your trading partner s segment specifications To access the appropriate configuration screen 1 In the Tree View expand the node for connection trading partner transaction inbound or outbound where report locates Right click on the desired custom Hub report icon e g Invoice Report and select Properties 82 lt Generate EDI Mail from Trans Process Outbound Data Translated File T Unknown Generate Data 3 Select Configuration in the DiTranslator Setup window In the Task Wizard the Report Writer Task Configuration tab displ
289. sion Number which will be placed in the UNHO202 field Release Enter the Message Type Release Number which will be placed in the UNH0203 field Agency Code Enter the Controlling Agency which will be placed in the UNH0O204 field Association Code Enter the Association Assigned Code which will be placed in the UNHO205 field See also MSGLINK in this table Message Identification TRADACOMS Type Enter the message type which will be placed in the TYPE field of the MHD segment Version Enter the message version which will be placed in the TYPE field of the MHD segment See also MSGLINK in this table Message Reference Number Enter the Message Reference Number which will be placed in the EDIFACT field UNHO1 MSGLINK EDIFACT and TRADACOMS The MSGLINK function exists because EDIFACT and TRADACOMS may combine two or more messages together into one unit when transmitting for example an invoice An EDIFACT user may combine the TAXCON message with the INVOIC message when sending an invoice A TRADACOMS user may combine the INVFIL invoice file header INVOIC invoice detail and INVTRL invoice file trailer when sending an invoice Now in order for the system to correctly interpret these types of messages you must provide the system with a MSGLINK entry for the Custom Tag displayed on the left in this tab for any message combinations you may use Toadd anew MSGLINK entry for an
290. slator 8 file Terminate each record by a carriage return and line feed Note See the The XRF File topic at the end of this chapter for information on how to read and generate the XRF file for a specific transaction set or message Section 5 End Set Format END SET transaction set VERSION version GROUP Functional Group ID Module trading partner s Application Code your Application Code Set Control transaction set control number Grp Concrol Frinctional Group concrol number date time Grp Tagl free form comments Grp Tag2 free form comments Example END SET 810 VERSION 003010 GROUP IN Module 3122721850 7083179000 Set Control 1 177 r Gro Control 1 920512 1450 Grp Tagl 810 version 3010 for ACME Grp Tag2 l Remarks This set of records identifies the transaction set type version and functional group This information should match the Functional Group ID and Version fields in the Transaction Set Configuration dialog box Notes See the DiTranslator 8 File Format section in this chapter for an example of the file format 4 The XRF File Each transaction set or message has a corresponding XRF file The XRF file details the segment and data element formatting positions and descriptions for the specific transaction set or message 4 1 Generating an XRF File DiTranslator 8 includes a DOS utility for generating XRF files 1 From the drive where DiTranslator 8 is installed
291. so be activated by right clicking on a task or file icon and selecting Update Wizard from the pop up menu The Delete Object command removes the selected icon from your DiTranslator 8 system Use this command with caution The Schedule Event command is active only for the Task List icons It allows you to access the DiTranslator 8 Schedule Task List window for scheduling the Task List to activate in unattended mode This command can also be activated by right clicking on a Task List icon and selecting Schedule Event from the pop up menu The Run Unattended command allows you to run your task lists in unattended mode Your task list will run minimized and without the focus so you are free to use your PC This command can also be activated by right clicking on a task or Task List icon and selecting Run Unattended from the pop up menu The Properties command allows you to configure the currently selected task or to view edit or print a Task List This command can also be activated by right clicking on a task or file icon and selecting Properties from the pop up menu The Exit command exits DiTranslator 8 5 2 2 View Menu The View menu commands are listed below Modern View Classical View Menu options Toolbar options Form options Switch between Modern View and Classical View 20 E Ditranslator 8 Server ohh oe DiTranslator 8 Server Tree Forms elella elal 2 e Tlotbound Document an Files _ Parent
292. splayed in the list If you continue and click the sign next to a network then all the tasks available within the network will appear in the list as well You may contract the list by clicking signs to close up that portion of the list 4 Select the item task for which you would like to set restrictions and add the appropriate restrictions Open select the checkbox to restrict the user from opening the specified item If this restriction is set the item will be hidden from the user s view Properties select the checkbox to allow the user to open the specified item but restrict their ability to change the properties of that item Other select the checkbox to restrict any action the specified item may have other than Open or Properties When a restriction is set the item will be bold to indicate the restriction has been set 5 Once you have set all of the necessary restrictions for the group click the OK button to save your changes and return to the User Viewer window Click the OK button to save your changes and return to the User Viewer window Select Exit from the File menu to return to the Desktop 15 3 Editing a Group 1 Perform either option below to edit a group a Click Edit Group on the toolbar b Select Edit from the Group menu The Edit Group window is displayed 4 Edit Group 3 Restrictions aes Daily Processing Open lf Inbound Documents P Properties H T Networks amp the Internet E fils Outb
293. ssuaecessenseeetseness 124 16 3 Updating Trading Partner Rit csiagessnatseasactsakcsasnscacencdetnencodenimenteekeeavorsenneesentseeitienreedsukesontoe 125 16 4 Updating Transaction Set Versi n eessen neei E 126 Ve DVN VCE DITONTON A 126 Chapter Vi Dally Processio saisine Naiona unana aiaia aA ENa A Naa AiR A AEAT AAAA ARAE 128 Dye FRO OUING POTES SIE era E E eaceasecece 128 1 1 Overview of Inbound ProcesSing eesssssssesssrresssrrrssreresrrressreresrrressrerosseressreresrrressrereseeresene 129 1 2 Steps to Receive and Process EDI Dat a soseneseussrerssenssreesrrrssrersresssrrsressrerssreesrersrereseeesne 130 2 Creating Outbound Dala espessir E EE a 134 2 1 Creating Outbound Data by Importing Data from another Application 135 2 2 Creating Outbound Data Using Document Turn Around sesssssssesssseesesreresrreresreresrreresrerese 135 2 3 Creating Outbound Data Using the Data Editor ecccccescccccesecceceeseceeeeeceeeeeeceeseeneeseas 137 SS OURDOWNG POCCS SIS cascada tech scence ceceic ices sea iee stare AES 148 3 1 OVErview OF OULDOUNG PFOCESS ING aens ere e evil anaeeivewied ETA A 148 3 1 Steps to Process and Send EDI Data ec cceeccccsscceesseeeeececeececeeceeeeeseecessescessueceseeeeeens 150 4 Additional DiliransiatOr s Features wicca a E E ns 153 4 1 Functional Acknowledgment ReCONCIIAtTION cceeeccccessccceeesececeeeceeeeeecceeauecessuneceseenes 154 AD TETAS OU UC yi ccescedsainscastoonsese
294. t 10 Accept or modify the partner Name which will display underneath the new partner icon and click the Next button The Folder name the name given to the DOS directory associated with this partner is displayed for your information but cannot be changed The Use Default button will restore the partner name to the original default if desired Files are then copied from the disk and will take a short time to finish 56 11 If you did not select the Show Task List contents during install option in the System Configuration window skip this step For more information on Setting System options see Setting System Options at the beginning of this chapter Audit Log Settings Data File Settings Registration Server Preferences Database Maintenance Single click to open point to select I Reload window details on startup Hide Trading Partner Documents IV Show Task List contents during install F Do not build Task Lists during install F Allow multiple queuing of the same scheduled task Seconds of delay after each task execution fo The One Task List or Both Task List screen will then display for the transaction set One Task List j Configure the initial Task List for the following Transaction Set 852 Ver5010 Inbound Available Tasks Processing Task List s Interpret Sorted Mail Interpret Sorted Mail Put Translated to Export File amp 852 Report Consolidate the Export File Select the
295. t requirements for a transaction set you can tailor the transaction set to meet your trading partner s specifications A translate map TM is a file that contains the validation rules for a given transaction set By editing EDI codes in a transaction set s translate map you can define valid data for a particular field When you customize a translate map you are doing so only for a particular transaction set e g 810 Invoice and trading partner All translate maps for all other transaction sets and for all other partners will remain unchanged Perform as follows to edit a translate map 1 Inthe Tree View right clicking on the desired trading partner icon and selecting Properties The DiTranslator Setup is displayed A 997 VerALL a 3M 4010 EI amp CostcoW feel My Trading Partner ARF File Mercator Tree XML DTD 4 tem is configured tem is not configured Transaction Sets cannot be used until configured Select Transaction Sets tab 3 Select trading partner and transaction whose map you would like to modify 4 Select Translate Map button The Translate Map window is displayed 78 Translate Map Current Active Translate Map Custom Map C PROGRA TDICENT T3DITRAN 91 Ssystemmape4nec7 0407 Ot Create The translate map dictates how data will be received from and generated for communicatione with pour Trading Partner In Most Cases Custom translate maps are never ne
296. ta Task List icon in the Inbound window or a Process Outbound Data Task List icon in the Outbound window to process data only for that transaction set type and for that particular partner See the Process Inbound Data Task List icon in the following screen 183 850 Ver4010 InBound Consolidate the Export File Interpret Sorted Mail E Put Translated File into Database f Put Translated to Export File Convert 850 to 55 Convert PO to Invoice Purchase Order Report i Raw Data Report Sorted Mail Translated Mail G Unknown Translated File Out Bound Generate EDI Mail from Translated Jutbound Data A Fut Import File into Database As Put Import File to Translated File Invoice Report Raw Data Report For example when Process Inbound Data Task List is opened you can see that it executes the Interpret Sorted Mail task generate Purchase Order Report task and then the Convert PO to Invoice task in the following screen Additional tasks could be added to this Task List if further processing of the data is required 1 1 2 Task Lists at the Trading Partner Level Each trading partner window contains a Process Inbound Data and a Process Outbound Data Task List icon to process data for all transaction sets the partner uses H E 810 Ver3010 9 850 Ver3010 H E 997 VerALL Process Inbound Data Process Outbound Data 184 When you open the Process Inbound Data Task List at this level you can see
297. table to assist you in changing the configuration settings Phone Number Type the phone number used to access the network Enter the phone number without any dashes If your long distance carrier requires you to enter a 1 when dialing outside your area code type a 1 and then the area code and phone number without spaces or dashes If you are not using a direct phone line enter your access code using a comma or other separators to separate the access number and the phone number Parameters Type in any other parameters that may be needed to enter the particular network such as log in name password etc These parameters will be written out to a file called Acontrol TMP in the Home Directory edata network directory Executable Name Type in the executable file name of the task Arguments Type any arguments such as script names you need for this task Notes The changes you make to this task are valid only for this individual task If you want all communication tasks configured in the same way you must set options for each individually 12 11 Mercator Mapper and Tracked Task Installation and Configuration 12 11 1 Installation If you want to add a Mercator mapper task or a tracked task to your DiTranslator 8 system use the following instructions 1 Select New from the File menu or select _ icon on the toolbar 109 2 Select New button in the Tasks tab The Task Wizard is displayed 3 Click the Create a C
298. te for your needs This section includes the following topics Consolidate the Export File Task Configuration Generate EDI Mail from Translated Task Configuration Interpret Sorted Mail Task Configuration Network Generator Task Installation And Configuration Network Translator Task Installation And Configuration Put Import File into Database Task Configuration Put Import File to Translated File Task Configuration Put Translated to Export File Task Configuration Sort Host File Task Configuration Sort Mail Task Configuration Communication Task Installation And Configuration Mercator And Tracked Task Installation And Configuration 12 1 Consolidating the Export File Task Configuration The Consolidate the Export File task appends each new reformatted RFM file to a common consolidated file called the Export Consolidated File which may be further processed by another PC or mainframe applications 1 Inthe Tree View expand the node for connection trading partner transaction whose tasks will be configured 2 Expand the node for Inbound icon 84 3 Right click on the Consolidate the Export File icon and select Properties 4 Select Configuration in the DiTranslator Setup window Dilranslator Setup rn o 810 Ver3010 Eg 810 Ver3010 Inb fae ag Consolidate tH 3 810 Ver3010 Out 10 Ver4010 890 Ver3010 pee SY VerALL 7 WA Custom Kit Document 3M 4010 i CosteoW Task Id 138 Unique
299. ted This file can be either user delimited where data elements are separated by a user defined character with pad characters suppressed or it can be database delimited where data elements are enclosed in double quotes and separated by commas with pad characters suppressed Std dBase A DiTranslator 8 database file Delimiter If you would like your output file to have a delimiter enter the delimiter you would like used Notes The changes you make to this task are valid only for the specific transaction set and partner identified at the beginning of the process 12 8 Sorting Host File Task Configuration When you are creating outbound data by importing data from another application the Sort Host Data File task sorts the data by producing an Import file for each trading partner for whom the data is intended 1 Inthe Tree View expand the node System Wide Data Files icon 2 Right click on the Sort Host Data File task icon and select Properties 103 _ j Task ld fa New Update Delete UniquelD 1174405122 3 The Sort Host File Task Configuration tab below is displayed your configuration options with the default values shown For additional information about the task click the Details tab Task Wizard 4 Change the configuration settings as desired To save the settings click the OK button 104 Meaning of Settings Use the following table to assist you in changing the conf
300. terchange When you have finished comparing the ISA line and making any necessary changes click the OK button 7 To save the changes click the OK button and then click the Finish button Next you need to unarchive the New Mail In data Next perform the following steps to unarchive New Mail In 1 Inthe Tree View tab in the desired network level double click the desired network 2 Right click on the New Mail In icon and select Unarchive The Unarchive dialog box is displayed 3 Select the desired file and click UnArchive Note For detailed instructions on unarchiving files see Archiving And Unarchiving Files in the Daily Processing chapter for details 245 4 Solving the Unknown Documents Perform the following steps to compare the GS for ANSI ASC X12 or UNG for EDIFACT segment sent by your trading partner with the system transaction set configurations 1 Inthe Tree View tab in the desired network level double click the Unknown Documents icon Files must remain in a text format in order to process through the system If you are using an editor such as Microsoft Word be sure to save the file in text format 2 Inthe example below the transaction set is an ASC X12 Purchase Order 850 version 4010 Copy the GS or UNG line on a separate piece of paper UNKNOWN MOD Notepad File Edit Format View Help iGS PO ISAO6S5ENDERIDXX ISAOBRECEIVERID 20101213 1406 995 x 004010 ST 850 9950001 BEG 00 S5A 00268
301. the transaction set in use type the customized map file name The default is the translator map name for the transaction set in use The translator file name is the transaction set and version number followed by a TM file extension For example 8103040 TM for an 810 version 3040 transaction set EDI Standard Type the standard name for the current transaction set The default is the standard name for the current transaction set in use For example ANSI Acknowledgments Use the information below to define the way you wish to handle Functional Acknowledgment Inthe Generate box enter a 0 if you want the system not to automatically generate a Functional Acknowledgment 997 when the task is executed a 1 if you wish to generate a Functional Acknowledgment when the task is executed a 2 if you want to generate an Acceptance Rejection Advice 999 and a 3 if you want to generate an EDIFACT CONTRL acknowledgment f your trading partner requires you to only send functional group level acknowledgments put a 1 in the No Error Detail box If your trading partner expects transaction set level Functional Acknowledgments put a 2 in this text box Inthe event of an error s if your trading partner requires you to send error detail at the functional group level enter 1 in the Error Detail box Likewise enter 2 for error detail at the transaction set level 3 for segment level error detail and 4 for element level error detail Inthe Wr
302. the Tree View expand the node for connection trading partner transaction whose tasks will be configured 2 Expand the node for Outbound icon 3 Right click on the Put Import File into Database icon and select Properties 4 Select Configuration on the DiTranslator Setup window t 810 Ver3010 E 810 Ver3010 Inb 2 810 Ver3010 Out 10 Ver4010 600 Ver3010 Task Id 140 UniquelD 1174405140 5 The Put Import File to Database Task Configuration tab below displays your configuration options with the default values shown For additional information about the task click the Details tab Task Wizard 6 Change the configuration settings as desired To save the settings click the OK button 98 Meaning of Settings Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings Write Status Message select the checkbox to send messages to the Audit Log when this task is executed You must have the Audit Log option selected in the System Settings window to use this option Archive File select the checkbox to automatically archive the input data when this task is executed Map Name Type the database map name for the transaction set in use The default is the database map name for the transaction set in use The database file name is the transaction set and version number followed by a DBM file extension For example 8103010 DBM for an 810 Invoice version 003010 transactions set Input File
303. the commands between IFREQ and ENDIF are executed Example REGSET 25 3 IFREQ 3 25 Tey Oy Oy dl Quantity 25 ENDIF If register 3 is equal to 25 then Quantity 25 is printed on the report IFREQR amp ENDIF Syntax IFREQR Regnum1 Regnum2 other commands ENDIF Remarks Use IFREQR to execute other commands if two register values are equal If the value in the register specified by Regnum1 is equal to the value in the register specified by Regnum2 the commands between IFREQR and ENDIF are executed Example REGSET REGSET REGSET IFREOR REGADD ENDIF The REGADD command will be executed because the value in register 5 has been 1 OF NO Ee O OUO NOA U set equal to the value in register 6 IFRGTR amp ENDIF Syntax IFRGTR Regnum1 Regnum2 other commands ENDIF Remarks Use IFRGTR to execute other commands if one register value is greater than another If the value in the register specified by Regnum1 is greater than the value in the register specified by Regnum2 the commands between IFRGTR and ENDIF are executed Example REGSET 10 5 REGSET 1 6 REGSET 2 7 IFRGTR 5 6 REGADD 7 5 ENDIF The REGADD command will be executed because the value in register 5 is greater than the value in register 6 IFRNE amp ENDIF Syntax IFRNE Regnum Test value 229 other commands ENDIF Remarks Use IFRNE to execute other commands based on a register value not equ
304. the specific transaction set and partner identified at the beginning of the process 12 3 Interpreting Sorted Mail Task Configuration The Interpret Sorted Mail task validates the data against the appropriate EDI standard creates the Translated Mail file and will generate a Functional Acknowledgment for the data just interpreted if the task is configured to do so 1 In the Tree View expand the node for connection trading partner transaction whose tasks will be configured Expand the node for Inbound icon Right click on the Interpret Sorted Mail icon and select Properties Select Configuration on the DiTranslator Setup window DiTranslator Setup Data Path C Program Files DlCentralDi Translator Edata NS_A 10 Ver3010 Bg 4 810 Ver3010 Inb vse a Consolidate tt s Interpret Sorte J 810 Ver3010 Out 810 Ver4010 850 Ver3010 i 997 VerALL ff Custom Kit Document amp 3M 4010 Task Id 136 1174405137 5 The Interpret Sorted Mail Task Configuration tab below displays your configuration options with the default settings shown For additional information about the task click the Details and Status tabs 90 Task Wizard M Write Status Message E Generate if Archive Input File mE E T A e oa Variable Records Eror Detail Disable Validation Wrap Length Use Envelope as Data A ea Acceptance Level a0 Translator Map Name 8103010tm EDI Standard Ansi Mercator Map 6
305. the translated file as input for this task Disable Validation select the checkbox if you want to use the feature that activates Mercator mapper tasks from within DiTranslator 8 This feature will stop validation for this transaction set version in order to produce a Functional Acknowledgment to confirm receipt of the document without commenting on any errors that may have occurred When using this option it is assumed that all validation and translation will occur in the Mercator mapper as opposed to DiTranslator Wrap Output File select the checkbox if you want DiTranslator 8 to wrap your outbound file If you choose this option you must also use the Wrapped Record Length option described below Wrapping refers to how the file s text is formatted If you select the checkbox text will continue on the same line after a carriage return line feed Text will go to the next line according to the wrapped record length defined by the option described below Save Unwrapped File select the checkbox to save the output file before it is wrapped 88 Wrapped Record Length If you selected the Wrap Output File option type the numeric value for a wrapped record size Acceptance Level Type an integer between 0 and 20 to set the Acceptance Level for this task The default is 20 The Acceptance Level specifies how DiTranslator 8 marks data in the translated file Data is marked accept if the data has no associated error and it has an assoc
306. the translator to fill in the data prior to any other operation and identify any envelopes by placing a NL new line character in front of each This will also replace all segment terminators with a lt CRLF gt and unwrap any wrapped data 106 Enable Sort to Mail_in TP select the checkbox if you want DiTranslator 8 to create the Mail_In TP file in each edata network partner directory containing all the transaction sets for that trading partner Notes The changes you make to this task are valid only for the specific network identified at the beginning of the process 12 10 Communication Task Installation and Configuration Several communication tasks come already installed in your system such as Send Mail and Receive Mail If you want to add an additional communications task of your own use the following instructions 12 10 1 Installation 1 Select New from the File menu or select _ icon on the toolbar 2 Select New button in the Tasks tab The Task Wizard is displayed 3 Click the Create a Custom Task option button and click the Next button 4 Enter the name you want to display beneath the new icon you are creating in the Task Name box In the Task Type box select Communications Task and click the Next button Task Name Communications Task TPPC Report User Tracked Task User Un Tracked Task Mercator Task Communications Task File Utility Task Segment Teminator Task Send Email Task Unite
307. this chapter to assist you in configuring the network you installed Once the installation is complete you will see the new network icon in the Networks amp the Internet window 3 Configuring a Network The configuration of a network is different depending on whether you installed the network using the Asynchronous Network Collection or creating a custom network manually See one of the following sections e Configure a network installed using the asynchronous network collection e Configure a custom network 50 3 1 Configuring a Network Installed Using the Asynchronous Network Collection Before a network can be used to send or receive mail it must be configured The configuration of a network is somewhat different for each kind of asynchronous network connection For this reason there is a unique Network Help file for each different network The following instructions will tell you how to access your network specific online help documentation and network configuration screens 1 Configuration can be done at the end of installation in this case continue with Step 2 or at any other time by right clicking on the desired network icon in the Networks amp the Internet window and selecting Properties The Network Wizard is displayed Network Wizard Network Name NS AS Part 04 06 2011 Coy Configuration Hemio Help Done Trading Partners ieee Network cannot be used until this item is Checked
308. thout entering any information When a parent record is left blank all its child records are skipped and the next record to be displayed is the next parent record Selecting Next when at the end of a transaction set will start a new transaction set of the same type as the current one 142 Previous View Use this command to display the previous record for viewing and editing existing data This command works like the Next command only in reverse See the Next command for details Skip Forward View Use this command to move to the next record of the same type as the current record Skip Backward View Use this command to move to the previous record of the same type as the current record Go to View Use this command to open a document by selecting from a list of existing documents Control Data View Use this command to access the EDI Control Data window to view control information about the envelope group and transaction set Toolbar View Use this command to hide or display the command push button tool bar at the top of the data entry screen which includes buttons for some of the most commonly used commands in the Data Editor Status Bar View Use this command to hide or display the status bar at the bottom of the data entry screen The status bar provides information about where you are within the Data Editor The current document number is to the left which is helpful when you have entered more than one transaction set Th
309. tion on a LAN you can use data communication facilities on your LAN to exchange EDI files with your trading partner You simply copy the EDI files to and from the DiTranslator 8 data directory 42 Chapter IV Setting Up Your System This chapter includes the following topics Setting System Options Adding A Network Mailbox To Your System Configuring A Network Adding A Trading Partner To Your System Configuring A Trading Partner Moving A Trading Partner From One Network To Another Adding A Transaction Set For Your Partner Configuring A Transaction Set Customizing Data Element Codes Configuring Reports Adding And Configuring Tasks Adding And Configuring Files Adding Shortcuts User Viewer Updating DiTranslator 8 Maintaining Your DiTranslator 8 System 1 Setting System Options Configuring the System Configuration allows you to set system wide options 1 Perform either of these options below to access System Configuration a Goto Tools gt System Configuration b Select System Configuration Ba icon in the toolbar The System Configuration window displays and has six tabs Audit Log Settings Data File Setting Registration Preferences Server and Database Maintenance The Audit Log Settings tab is displayed as default setting System Configuration Server Freferences Database Maintenance Audit Log Settings Data File Settings Registration Waming Level Log Threshold 4
310. tner icon in the Trading Partners window 4 2 Creating a Custom Trading Partner Follow the steps below to add a trading partner to DiTranslator 8 1 Perform either of the steps below to open DiTranslator Setup window a Goto File gt New b Select New Lion in the toolbar 2 Select the Trading Partners tab 3 Select New at the bottom of the screen The Trading Partner Wizard window displays 58 Trading Partner Wizard How do you wish to add a Trading Partner Install pre configured Trading Partner Kit 4 Select the Create a Custom Trading Partner option and click the Next button 5 Select the network you will use to communicate with this trading partner and click the Next button If the network you intend to use is not in the list click the Install New Network button and see the Adding A Network Mailbox To Your System section for assistance 6 Type a name for your partner which will display underneath the trading partner icon in the Name box The Folder box the name given to the DOS directory associated with this partner is displayed for your information and cannot be changed Then select the standard type you will use with this partner and click the Next button 59 Trading Partner Wizard Enter the name to Display for this Trading Partner Name My Trading Patned Folder My Trading Partner E X12 ISA EA Select the EDI Standard to x12 BG EG use with this Trading Partner x12 ICS ICE EDIFACT
311. to create a custom map from scratch You will now see the report task icon you just created Right click this report icon and select Properties E ACME 810 Yer3040 Inbound of x T Ow Interpret Put Translated Consolidate Sorted Ma ail Translated Sorted Mal to Export File the Export File Mall iA y ie Ge Open Enter Raw Data Properties Alt Enter Export File Unknown Report Translated File 12 When the Task Wizard window is displayed click the Report Writer Map tab 13 In the Report Writer Map tab click the Edit button 14 The Create Report Writer Map window is displayed if the report has not been previously generated If an existing report map is displayed go on to step 3 200 g Create Report Writer Map DEM File Path DIN 1 Edata MpNetwork MyTradingPartner Ansi 60 3070 8603070 dbm Browse Config File Path Browse BPM FilePath C PROGRATINTRADINIWREPORTS myrptipm Brose Report Title POO Tj Cancel Use the following table to assist you in completing the RPMEDIT screen and then click the OK button DBM File Path This field is mandatory Leave the default value in place Config File Path Leave this field blank RPM File Path This field is mandatory Leave the default value in place This file path must match the file name entered when the icon was created Report Title Enter up to 49 characters to display as the report title 15 Customize the report map to produce the desired cus
312. to identify your partner in the transmission This value will be placed in field UNGO201 or UNBO301 depending on whether your partner is sending or receiving Qualifier If the Identification field is coded enter the Application Sender s Recipient s Qualifier which specifies the source of the codes used to identify your partner This value will be placed in UNGO202 or UNGO302 field depending on whether your partner is sending or receiving 6 Moving a Trading Partner from One Network to another 1 Right click on the desired trading partner icon in the Trading Partners window and select Properties The Trading Partner Wizard is displayed 66 DiTranslator Setup ay am 3 i Tek Part W lt gt My Trading Partner EDI Standard x12 ISAIEA kem is configured Bem is not configured V Trading Partners cannot be used until configured Unique ID 671088643 2 Click the Down arrow to the right of the Network dropdown list and select the desired network then click the OK button DiTranslator 8 will confirm the move 3 Click the Yes button if you would like to move this trading partner to the selected network Click the No button to cancel this procedure Dilranslator Wizard Fh Are you sure you want to move My Trading Partner to the cat test Network Once you click the Yes button DiTranslator 8 will then move all of the required files to the new net
313. to their transaction set or message and version and end with the DBM or TM extension For example 8503040 DBM for an ANSI ASC X12 850 Purchase Order version 3040 The number of maps in this directory depends on how many transaction sets you have loaded into DiTranslator 8 You can modify these maps according to your needs but we advise that you make a copy of the map before you make any changes A change to the maps in this sub directory will affect all transaction sets that use custom maps 254 The Masks sub directory contains all of the configuration masks that DiTranslator 8 uses with every file ending in an MSK extension The number and type of masks may vary from user to user depending on which functions you have loaded Template Contains any data entry templates you have created Tsklists The Tsklist sub directory holds files that contain more than one task for example a Task List DiTranslator 8 creates these files when you install the program and also when you create a Task List Each file is labeled with an L and a number indicating the order in which they were created You can create tasks ina number of ways but remember that if you manually create a task do not give it the same number as an existing task The User sub directory holds the system wide files and system wide tasks 255 Appendix F File Names and Icon Names E orespndng eae 256 Appendix G Data Errors Data errors are c
314. tom report format When you click the OK button in the Create Report Writer Map window WordPad will display the map for editing The map as you see it in this screen will create a report in the system default format which lists one data element per line and is center aligned with the EDI standard data element name on the left and the value placed in that data element on the right Fields without data will not appear in the report The loops segments and data elements that appear in this generic report format are determined by the Hidden status within the DB Map Editor described in the Customizing Data Entry section The names of the fields in the report are also determined using the DB Map Editor B acme810 1pm WordPad Miil E File Edt Wiew Insert Format Help nisle ael al led Sl oystem Generated ReportUUriter Task HEADER T 0 0 0 ACME INVOICE REPORT SFECIAL 0 0 0 DATE Txe O Ord Pg N SFECIAL 0 0 74 5ETPAGE T 0 0 23 Transmit Control Number SFECIAL 0 0 0 CONTROL ENDHEADER LeRoi oo oe eo e OO01 BIG Invoice ORR WR WWW ero oer TENE O00 LOr iea TZ 0 0 6552210 Invoice Date T a Pe T T ar a m PFIFIF 8 T T l oer ee For Help press FI 16 Edit the generic report map and customize it to your needs The map is a script of commands instructing Report Writer to take specified data from an input file and format the data in an easy to read business format The remaining sections of this chapter cov
315. toolbar b Select Add from the User menu The Add New User window is displayed E Add New User First Hame Cancel Last Hame Work Phone E Mail Address Location Queue Priority Hotes 2 Enter all the user s information using the following table to assist you Logon Enter the user s Windows logon ID First Name Enter the user s first name Last Name Enter the user s last name Work Phone Enter the user s work phone number 122 E Mail Address Enter the user s e mail address Location Enter the user s location Queue Priority Enter the user s queue priority The Queue Priority is the order in which the tasks are performed on the server The highest queue priority is 1 and the lowest is 99 3 Once you have entered all of the user s information click the OK button to save the information and return to the User Viewer 4 Select Exit from the File menu to return to the Desktop 15 5 Editing a User Profile 1 Select the user that you would like to edit in the User Viewer window 2 Perform either option below to edit a user a Click the f Edit User icon b Select Edit from the User menu The Edit User window is displayed F Edit User First Name IT est Cancel Last Name DiCentral Work Phone 1 291 490 1121 E Mail Address test dicentralcom Location Queue Priority Hotes 3 Change the necessary information using the following table to assist you Log
316. tor 8 database The Repair option will not delete network connections trading partners transaction sets or configurations If you select this option you will be asked to locate the new DiTranslator file Click the OK button to continue The appropriate files are copied to your system e Remove will remove all of your DiTranslator 8 files We strongly recommend you do not select this option When the Confirm File Deletion dialog displays if you must use this option click the OK button to remove all of your DiTranslator files or click the Cancel button to exit without removing any of your DiTranslator 8 files 6 When the Maintenance Complete window is displayed click the Finish button 127 This chapter includes the following topics Inbound Processing Creating Outbound Data Outbound Processing Additional DiTranslator 8 Features Select Inbound Documents tab or Outbound Documents tab for lists of transactions available for each perspective process in ents Outbound Documents 4f Consolidate the Export File 2710 Ver4010 Put Translated to Export File 210 Ver3010 Raw Data Report 3m ll Export File 810 Ver4010 a Sorted Mail o0 Wer4010 T Translated Mail 994 Ver4010 G Unknown Translated File 850 Ver3010 50 Ver4010 852 Verd010 55 Verd010 56 Ver4010 60 Ver4010 64 Ver4010 997 VerALL E E E E E E E E awa Expand the transaction set icons to list all trading partners from whom you receive
317. tput File Name Type the output file name you want this task to generate For example MAIL _OUT RFM Input File Type Identify the file type of the input file for this task Flat File This format is used for TRN and RFM files and contains no delimiters Click Discard to reject new transaction set with duplicate key Delimited This file can be either user delimited where data elements are separated by a user defined character with pad characters suppressed or it can be database delimited where data elements are enclosed in double quotes and separated by commas with pad characters suppressed Database This is a DiTranslator 8 database file Output File Type Choose a file type that this task will output Flat File This format is used for TRN and RFM files and contains no delimiters Delimited This file can be either user delimited where data elements are separated by a user defined character with pad characters suppressed or it can be database delimited where data elements are enclosed in double quotes and separated by commas with pad characters suppressed Std dBase A DiTranslator 8 database file Delimiter If you would like your output file to have a delimiter enter the delimiter you would like used Notes The changes you make to this task are valid only for the specific transaction set and partner identified at the beginning of the process 12 7 Putting Translated to E
318. trading partner your DiTranslator 8 system expects to get a value of 1 for this control number You may overwrite this default by entering the control number you and your partner agreed to DiTranslator 8 expects the number to increase by one each time you receive an interchange from this trading partner A warning is issued if the inbound control number does not agree with DiTranslator s expectations Outbound The setting is initially O zero The number automatically increases by one each time you send an interchange to this trading partner Authorization Information Qualifier If you entered a value in the Authorization field on this screen enter the Authorization Information Qualifier you and your partner have agreed upon to define the type of Authorization Information to be used This value will be placed in the ISA01 field Common Outbound Group Control If you did not select the Unique Outbound Group Control option on the Generate EDI Mail from Translated task configuration screen the 62 control number assigned to a functional group increment based on this control number Using this option the group controls number increments by trading partner rather than by transaction set Custom Envelope Tags In the Custom tag 1 and 2 boxes optionally type custom group tags Custom group tags flag the transaction set envelope of the DiTranslator 8 file For more information about the DiTranslator 8 file see the Interfac
319. tral com 4 3 Technical Support DiCentral provides technical support to all customers enrolled in a maintenance program When you call DiCentral Technical Support you can be assured of high quality courteous and expedient service Contact the Technical Support Center to Request technical assistance Log in an enhancement request or Report a fault DiCentral provides you with several ways to obtain technical support You can Call the Support Center at 281 480 1121 x3 Send an email to translatorsupport dicentral com When you contact Technical Support you will need your Customer ID 17 5 DiTranslator 8 Overview This overview includes Common DiTranslator 8 Terms Menu Commands System Windows and Icons Common Processing Terms Basic Operations 5 1 Common DiTranslator 8 Terms Use Tab section to change how EDI data is displayed Toolbar displays all relavant Properties pane displays The Detail View is ideal for commands based on which critical information about a System Management Tasks section is selected selected file Process Inbound Data Process Outbound Data Working Directory C Program Files DCentral DiTra File View pane has different Tasks and Files pane displays Detail pane shows the look depending on the tasks and data files associated content of any selected file view selected with a given Network Trading in DiTranslator Partner or Transaction set 5 2 Menu
320. trol Structure There are three basic levels of ASC X12 envelopes the interchange envelope the functional group envelope and the transaction set envelope 29 The outermost envelope of EDI data is the interchange An interchange consists of three components an ISA Header segment a series of functional groups and an IEA Trailer segment Header and Trailer segments contain sender and receiver addresses They envelope the series of functional groups The second level of enveloping is a functional group A functional group consists of three components a GS Header segment a series of similar transaction sets and a GE Trailer segment The Header and Trailer envelope the series of similar transaction sets For example if a trading partner sends a transmission containing 50 purchase orders and 30 invoices all the purchase orders belong to a PO functional group and all the invoices belong to an IN functional group A GS Header segment and a GE Trailer segment bind the functional groups together The third level of enveloping is the transaction set level Transaction sets consist of three components an ST Header segment a collection of related segments and an SE Trailer segment The ST Header segment and the SE Trailer segment bind the related segments ISA Interchange Control Header GS Functional Group Header ST Transaction Set Header PO 1 Segments SE Transaction Set Trailer ST Transaction Set Header
321. umber and CTT Line Items REGSE aly REGZERO 3 pann Temp Quantity REGZERO 4 not Mocal Quanicicy cor Segment LSS REGZERO 5 IRNS PELOS REGZERO 6 pann total Price p Seg 0012 Level 1 ITD Terms Deferred Terms Ae One 00120000012 LOOP 0041 REGADD 2 1 CTT TAr Or Ary 0020 EO Oke 5 0041 4 6 LJSE O TLO N 0020 21 12 OQueantcicy Layorced FD 0 0 17 0041 16 11 LJBEF 0 Fe ONO ERO Us OA eas RECSAVE O04 lio ll 0 3 SAVE QUANTITY REGADD 3 4 Eee NN Oe nee el ESRI Oss C 0020 28 2 Unit of Measurement Code TPLA N 0020 30 16 Unit Price 215 FSWITCH 1 ID Oh OL NO 27 2 LIER 10 FOR THE ISS SEGMENT FSWITCH 0 REGSAVE 0041 29 16 2 5 SAVE PRICE REGMPY 3 5 MULTIPLY QTY BY PRICE REGADD 5 6 SDI TO TOTAL ED OO 2S OCC 27 ey LIERE O PO103 amp PO104 REGZERO 10 ITLOG C 0020 52 2 Product Service EOF A 0020 54 30 Product Service BD 0 0 49 0041747722 LIBRE 0 IT108 C 0020 80 2 Product Service IT109 A 0020 82 30 Product Service EDO 0 sie O04 Oo 32 bJ 0 HNDEOOR POL Seg 0051 Level 1 TDS Total Monetary Value Summary N 0051 10 11 Total Invoice Amount TX 1 0 0 0051000001 REGZERO 3 REGSHE 100 3 REGMPY 3 6 MU ei OTY BY PRILCH RE Ge RNC OO i OrG Seg 0054 Level 1 ITA Allowance Charge Service rX L 0 0 00540000017 Seg 0056 Level 1 ISS Invoice Shipment Summary le OO OOS COCCOO Ts TOOTO I exon GO Oy og 2 PISSOL N 0058 10 12
322. und or outbound where report locates 2 Right click on the desired Raw Data Report icon and select Properties Select Configuration in the DiTranslator Setup window Dilranslator Setup i 610 Ver3010 A E 810 Ver3010 Inb i 9 Consolidate tt ft Put Translate amp Raw Data Relg J 810 Ver3010 Out 810 Ver4010 850 Ver3010 997 VerALL ff Custom Kit Document 3M 4010 Costco The Raw Data Report Task Configuration tab displays your configuration options with the default settings shown below 81 Task Wizard Raw Data Report Task Configuration Details Unique Print Utility Active Map Name 8103010 dam Name For additional information about the task click the Details tab 4 Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings in the Raw Data Report Task Configuration window To save the settings click the OK button Meaning of Settings Auto Print select the checkbox to instruct the system to automatically print the report when the report is generated Map Name The default is the database map name for the transaction set in use The database file name is the transaction set and version number followed by a DBM file extension For example 8103010 DBM represents an 810 version 3010 transaction set If you customized a DBM file type the database map name for the transaction set in use and put it in the directory Home Directory edata network partner standard set ver
323. ustom Task option button and click the Next button 4 Access the window where you would like to create the Mercator mapper or tracked task icon 5 Right click on a blank area on the left side of the window and select New The Task Wizard is displayed 6 Click the Create a Custom Task option button and click the Next button 7 Enter the name you want to display beneath the new icon you are creating in the Task Name box In the Task Type box select either Mercator Task or User Tracked Task depending on what type of task you are creating and click the Next button Task Wizard Task Type TPPC Report User Tracked Task Select the type of User UnTracked Task Task that you Mercator Task wish to create Communications Task File Utility Task Segment Teminator Task Send Email Task Unite Task Network Generator Netware Tranelatar 8 Enter the command line into the Command Line box or click the Browse button to search for the required command line and click the Finish button 110 Tracked Task Configuration Command Line m niemam Edt Code Treat exit codes at or above this value as an eror lo Zero disables checking 9 You will now see the new Mercator or user tracked task icon in your window with the name you assigned to it E User Tracked Task GMail Out Ready 12 11 2 Configuration 1 Inthe Tree View right click on the desired Mercator or User Tracked Task icon
324. vad canes haneacares taaneaicinessdu vata A toon vadasabicnentaaavennseenesinte 160 A AICO Se NOU oe tah ite ih eae eee ie eters ce eR ea ade ae ae nada emesis come 161 4 4 Archiving and Unarchiving PICS ciiisean E eas ata eo ecadeaaen O 164 Chapter VI Interfacing with Other ApplicationS sssussussnnununnunnnnunnununnunnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 167 LEXpOrting Data fron DIMCANSISLON S seres u e dieubeeiaex vids ote ietiees 167 1 1 Exporting Files to another Computer or Application cccccssccccsssececeeseceeeeeseceseesecessuneees 167 1 2 Exporting a Lransaction Set File nuruni e ani E 167 1 3 Exporting Files Using the Mercator Tree Utility eseusosssnssseenssserserresesrrrssrrrresrrresrrererrrreesne 168 1 4 Exporting Files Using the Network Translator cccccccsssccccssececeesececeeeeceeeeescceseusecessuneees 170 2 lMpOrting Data tO DiIranslator S srren TO 171 2 1 Importing Files from another Computer or Application cccceseccccessececesececeeeceeeeeeeeeeas 171 2 2 Importing a Delimited File into a Database in DiTranslator 8 ccssccccssececeeseeeeeeeseeeees 171 23 Importing IndividWal Transaction SOUS scaisisccseedciadotota abice tse ecard 172 2 4 Importing Data Using the Network Translator cccccssccccsseccccesecceeeesececeeneceeseeceeseeeeeeeas 172 3 INE DUT ANS atOl SF IVC TE OLIN ep saevewast eissloveasaivecuaslea T a A N 173 3 1 Ditranslator 3 Files Used Tor
325. version in order to produce a Functional Acknowledgment to confirm receipt of the document without commenting on any errors that may have occurred When using 91 this option it is assumed that all validation and translation will occur in the Mercator mapper product as opposed to DiTranslator 8 Use Envelope as Data select the checkbox if you want the output file to contain envelope control information in the first record Acceptance Level Type an integer between 0 and 20 to set the Acceptance Level for this task The default is 20 The Acceptance Level specifies how DiTranslator 8 marks data in the translated file Data is marked accept if the data has no associated error and it has an associated warning whose severity number is equal to or higher than the number you enter for Acceptance Level Otherwise the data is marked reject Data marked reject cannot be posted to the Data Editor or reformatted For example if the Acceptance Level is set to O all data will be accepted If the Acceptance Level is set to 10 data associated with a Warning Severity number of 10 and below will be rejected Data with an associated warning severity number of 6 will not be posted to the Data Editor or reformatted regardless of the Acceptance Level For a complete list of data errors and how they relate to acceptance levels see Appendix G Data Errors Translator Map Name If you have customized the translator map file name for
326. w click the Next button to accept the default directory of C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator for DiTranslator 8 Otherwise select Browse to choose your desired location 6 Again in the Choose Destination window click the Next button to accept the default directory of C Program Files DiCentral DiTranslator Edata for DiTranslator 8 data files The Select Type stage is displayed Setup Type Select the setup type to install Click the type of setup you prefer then click Next Program will be installed with the most common options Recommended for most U ETS Compact Program will be installed with minimum required options Custom You may select the options you want to install Recommended for advanced UZETE Installshield Next gt Cancel 7 Select the type of installation you would prefer and click the Next button e Typical will install all of the DiTranslator 8 files including the online help files and documentation files You will need the Adobe Acrobat Reader to view the documentation files which can be installed at the end of the DiTranslator 8 installation e Compact will install all of the DiTranslator 8 files except for the documentation files e Custom will install the files that you manually select The Database Server Login stage is displayed 13 Database Server Login Select database server and authentication method Connection Name DiT ranzlator Database server that you are
327. wer The User Viewer allows you to control access to any item s within DiTranslator 8 First you will need to create a Group s based on the restrictions required for the users accessing DiTranslator 8 Next you will need to create a User Profile for each user This section includes the following topics Accessing The User Viewer Creating A Group Editing A Group Creating A User Profile Editing A User Profile 15 1 Accessing the User Viewer 1 Perform either option below to access User Viewer window _ a Select Mf User Editor icon on the toolbar b Goto Tools gt User Editor The User Viewer is displayed 119 te User Viewer File User Group Help TROR Total Restrictions 15 2 Creating a Group 1 Inthe User Viewer window perform either of the following e Click the re Add Group icon on the toolbar e Select Add from the Group menu The Add New Group window is displayed we Add New Group New Group Ee Restrictions Hih Daily Processing M Open li Inbound Documents P Properties EE Networks amp the Interet E als Outbound Documents E System Management Flt Trading Partners 2 Inthe Group field enter a name for the group you are creating 3 Use your mouse to expand and contract the list of available items in the left half of the screen 120 That is if you click the sign next to Networks amp the Internet then all networks installed in your system will be di
328. wing will print 10 31 1998 DATEFORMAT MM DD YY SPECIAL 0 0 0 ENVDATE If the date in the GS is 980102 the following will print 01 02 1998 DATEFORMAT MM DD 19YY FD LygbyZ2 0001 66 6 LJIBF 0 If the date in the data is 980102 the following will print 01 02 1998 For Use With Century Dates Only May only be used with ANSI ASC X12 Standards Version Release 003072 and higher 223 Remarks Use DATEFORMAT to insert a date in a report DateString is a value with the embedded reserved words CC YY MM and DD The minimum length of date string is 6 the maximum is 30 DATEFORMAT inserts the date string in a report replacing CC with the century YY with the year MM with the month and DD with the day of the date specified by a SPECIAL or FD command A SPECIAL or FD command must follow a DATEFORMAT command If you use an FD statement the FD argument input length is specified as 8 assumes a CCYYMMDD input format If you use a SPECIAL statement the argument SpecialCode is DATE current date in YYMMDD format or ENVDATE envelope date in CCYYMMDD format Example DATEFORMAT MM DD CCYY SPECIAL 0 0 0 ENVDATE If the date in the GS appears as 19990317 the following will print 03 17 1999 Example DATEFORMAT MM DD CCYY FD 1 lylyZ OU001 66 0 bJBEF 0 If the date in the data is 20000102 the following will print 01 02 2000 Example DATEFORMAT MM DD YY
329. work directory 67 4 The Trading Partner Wizard is displayed to confirm the move to the new network Click the OK button Dilranslator Wizard a n My Trading Partner has been moved to the cat test Network Please we edit the Task Lists for the Networks removing My Trading Partner Tasks from the old network and adding therm to the new network If you added a trading partner using a pre configured trading partner kit the standard transaction sets 850 810 997 you need to communicate with this partner have already been installed If you would like to install additional transactions follow the instruction below 1 You may install transaction sets at the end of trading partner configuration in this case continue with Step 2 or at any other time by right clicking on the desired trading partner icon and selecting Properties The DiTranslator Setup is displayed 68 DiTranslator Setup EDI Standard x12 ISAIEA bd Network NS_AS2 a ee Tasks and Transaction Sets Data Files 4 tem is configured UniquelD 671088640 2 Select Trading Partners tab Click the trading partner name that you would like to add transactions 3 Click Transaction Sets or Messages when using EDIFACT The Documents window is displayed or the Messages window when using EDIFACT Tasks and Files Install Update 4 Click the Install button 69 The Transaction Set Wizard is display
330. xport File Task Configuration After inbound data has been translated the Put Translated to Export File task will create an Export file from which you may further process the data in an application outside of DiTranslator 8 1 In the Tree View expand the node for connection trading partner transaction whose tasks will be configured Expand the node for Inbound icon Right click on the Put Translated to Export File icon and select Properties 101 4 Select Configuration on the DiTranslator Setup window Het e Name Put Translated to Export File C Program Files DlCentralDiTranslator Edata NSA 4 m t E 810 Vers010 l ql 810 Ver3010 Inb be 47 Consolidate tt 4 Interpret Sorte a Translate J 810 Ver3010 Out J 810 Ver4010 Jo 850 Ver3010 J 997 VerALL New Update Delete 5 The Put Translated to Export Task Configuration tab below displays your configuration options with the default values shown For additional information about the task click the Details tab Task Wizard Map Name e1 03010 dbm Input File Name mailin TRN Output File Name mail_in RFM Output Delimiter IN 6 Change the configuration settings as desired To save the settings click the OK button Meaning of Settings Use the following table to assist you in changing the configuration settings Write Status Message select the checkbox to send messages to the Audit Log when this task is
331. y such as network trading partner and transaction set configuration Chapter 5 Daily Processing provides instructions for tasks that you perform on a daily basis including receiving mail creating your outbound data sending mail sending functional acknowledgments generating reports reconciling mails checking the task queue backing up and restoring files and viewing and printing audit logs Chapter 6 Interfacing With Other Applications provides all the information you will need for transferring inbound data to one of your applications or for taking data from one of your applications and using it to create outgoing EDI data Chapter 7 Automating DiTranslator tells you how to use Task Lists and the Scheduler to automate the EDI process Chapter 8 Custom Data Entry Screens Reports And Document Turn Around provides instructions for creating your own custom reports and Document Turn Around instructions using Report Writer commands A complete command reference for Report Writer commands is also included Chapter 9 Solving Common Problems lists common problems and how to fix them The Appendices provide helpful information as you begin setting up and using your system for sending and receiving EDI mail 4 2 Education and Training DiCentral offers a regular schedule of DiTranslator training courses To obtain a schedule of training sessions or to sign up for a course visit DiTranslator Web Site at http dit portal dicen

User Manual - DiTranslator

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents